2017 Mitsubishi Outlander Sport 101290 PDF

Outlander Sport & RVR
Outlander Sport
/ 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL
&
RVR (Canada)
2017 / OWNER’S MANUAL
BK0239500US.book 1 ページ２０１６年５月１３日　金曜日　午前８時５３分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202560
Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-129
Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-123

Turn signal lever P.5-129
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-130
Instrument cluster P.5-83
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
P.5-71, 5-91 (if so equipped) P.5-55
Wiper and washer switch P.5-130

Rear window wiper and washer
switch P.5-135
Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-17
Steering wheel audio remote control

switches (if so equipped) P.7-38 Cruise control switch
(if so equipped) P.5-73
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) P.5-137
Ignition switch (if so equipped)
Tilt & Telescopic steering lever P.5-41 P.5-17, 5-46
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat) P.4-26, 4-33
Horn switch P.5-136 Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag P.4-33
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System 1

(if so equipped)
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)
Refer to the separated owner’s manual.
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-25
Air conditioning P.7-4, 7-9, 7-14, 7-19 Center vents P.7-2
Multi-information meter switch

P.5-87
Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-22
Fuses P.9-25 Side vents P.7-2
Engine hood release lever

Glove compartment P.5-174
P.9-3
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-130
Heated seat switch Rear window defogger switch P.5-136

(if so equipped)
P.4-6 12V power outlet P.5-164
Gearshift or selector lever P.5-49, 5-51

Fuel tank filler door release
lever P.3-3 Parking brake lever P.9-21
Drive mode-selector (if so equipped)
Cup holder P.5-176
P.5-58
Overview 1-2
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302402
Sun visors P.5-163

Vanity mirror P.5-163
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped) P.5-172
Card holder P.5-163
Dome light (front)/Reading lights

Assist grips P.5-178 P.5-171
Coat hook P.5-178 Sunshade switch (if so equipped)
P.5-39
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) P.5-138
(if so equipped)
P.5-177
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - air bag (for front
passenger’s seat) P.4-26, 4-33
Bottle holder P.5-177
Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-7 Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-6
Cup holder (if so equipped) Floor console box P.5-175
P.5-177 12V power outlet P.5-164
Rear seat P.4-7 USB input terminal (if so equipped) P.5-160
1-3 Overview
Interior
1
Electric remote-controlled outside mirror switch P.5-44
Lock switch
P.5-38
Power door lock
switch P.5-30
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbags
P.4-37
Power window switch P.5-37
Sunshade illumination lamp

Seat belts P.4-11 dimming control switch
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-17
Inside rearview mirror

P.5-42
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so
Tether anchors for equipped) P.5-165
child restraint system
P.4-22
Front seat P.4-2
Heated seat (if so equipped) P.4-6
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

(for front seats) P.4-37
Cargo room light
P.5-172 Head restraints P.4-7
Overview 1-4
Luggage compartment
1 Luggage compartment
N00100501508
Spare tire P.8-6
Luggage hooks P.5-179
Hook
Tools P.8-5 Jack P. 8-5
1-5 Overview
Outside
Outside 1
N00100602711
Side turn signal lights

Headlights, low beam
P.5-129, 9-30, 9-35
P.5-123, 9-30, 9-32
Power window P.5-37
Windshield wipers P.5-130

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-44
Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-129, 9-30, 9-35
Engine hood P.9-3
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Front turn signal lights

P.5-129, 9-30, 9-35
Headlights, high beam

P.5-127, 9-30, 9-33
Front side-marker and parking lights
P.5-123, 9-30, 9-34
Front fog lights (if so equipped)
P.5-130, 9-30, 9-35
Daytime running lights (if so equipped)
P.5-123, 9-30, 9-37
Overview 1-6
Outside
Antenna Liftgate P.5-32
High-mounted stop light

P.9-30, 9-40 F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if
so equipped) P.5-12
Rear spoiler Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-25
Locking and unlocking P.5-28
Rear window wiper

P.5-135
Rear-view camera
Tire pressure monitoring system
P.5-77
Changing tires P.8-6
Size of tires and wheels P.9-14
License plate light
Tire inflation pressure P.9-18
P.5-123, 9-30, 9-39
Tire rotation P.9-19
Back-up light P.9-30, 9-38 Tire chains P.9-21
Turn signal lights P.5-123, 9-30, 9-37

Tail and stop light/Rear side-marker lights
P.5-123, 9-30, 9-37
1-7 Overview
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702175
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-85.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-121
tance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-120
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-120
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)
Quick index 2-1


Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
2 the ordinary braking system is functioning.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
Test the system as described on page 5-67. P. 5-67
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-32
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
P. 5-77
Tire pressure monitoring system warn-  If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
ing light ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200900867
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Cannot turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF”.
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
P. 5-47
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key) Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-20
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
ate.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot inside the glove compartment, and then start the P. 5-23
(for vehicles equipped with the
engine or change the operation mode.
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-3


Cannot shift the selector lever
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-51
(for vehicles with continuously Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
variable transmission (CVT))
The windows are fogged up.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P. 7-8, 7-13,

2. Turn on the blower. 7-18, 7-24
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
P. 9-11
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-4 Quick index


The engine coolant temperature
display “ ” in the multi-infor-
2
mation display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine
compartment.
Type 1
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Type 2
1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the “4WD AUTO” or “4WD LOCK”
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
position and then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving. P. 8-14
sand, mud or snow
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle back and forth to free
it.
WARNING
 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for help.
Quick index 2-5


The brakes are not functioning
2 properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-62,
P. 6-5
or stream.
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if they P. 5-54
is slow when the vehicle starts come on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
moving.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
2-6 Quick index

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-6
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Methanol
N00301001919
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
filler pipe especially designed to accept only type of alcohol could adversely affect the
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- vehicle’s performance and damage critical
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Reformulated gasoline
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Many areas of the country require the use of
injured or killed when handling it. When-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
door areas. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although emissions and improve air quality.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
CAUTION areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and durability of engine and fuel system.
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Ethanol (Gasohol)
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
and oxygen sensors. A mixture of up to 10% ethanol (grain alco- manganese tricarbonyl)
hol) and 90% unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
Gasoline detergent additives is at least as high as that recommended for additive that is blended into some gasolines
unleaded gasoline. to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
In the United States, fuel suppliers are Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
required by law to add detergents to their gas- lines without MMT.
3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE Filling the fuel tank
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems
malfunction indicator on your instrument N00301101978
such as poor starting, stalling during idling,
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- WARNING
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob-  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
3
repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. sive. You could be burned, seriously
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- injured or killed when handling it. When
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine
Sulfur in gasoline light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames,
soon as possible by the nearest authorized sparks, and smoking materials. Always
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
isfy California’s low-emission regulations of your choice. areas.
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel be sure to get rid of your body’s static
than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in poor starting electricity by touching a metal part of the
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
occur, you are advised to add a detergent your body could create a spark that
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the ignites fuel vapor.
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-  Perform the whole refueling process
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not
tion of this indicator while you are using Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an let any other person near the fuel tank
high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily unsuitable additive could make the engine filler. If you allowed a person to help you
mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunction. For details, please contact the and that person was carrying static elec-
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
Motors dealer may suggest you try using a  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas- until refueling is finished. If you moved
oline to determine whether the problem is away and did something else (for example,
fuel-related. sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
WARNING turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
WARNING
 Keep the doors and windows closed while  Since the fuel system may be under pres-
clockwise.
refueling the vehicle. If they were open, sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
fuel vapor could get into the cabin. slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 uum that might have built up in the fuel
tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
Fuel tank capacity hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L) fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)
5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
Refueling on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 1- Remove zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear 2- Close goes.
driver side of your vehicle.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened CAUTION
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap  Your vehicle can only be operated using
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
cord on the hook located on the inside of unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
filler door release lever located at the left
the fuel tank filler door. lytic converter damage will result if leaded
side of the driver’s seat.
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not try to add more fuel.
CAUTION
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler pipe cap  Modification of any onboard com-
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking Modifications to and racing puter/control module, including repro-
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
filler door closed. N00301600149 any onboard computer/control module
This vehicle should not be modified with 3
WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
securely closed. If the fuel cap were loose, erage.
high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may Installation of accessories
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
N00301701222
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations. CAUTION
use only the cap specified for your model
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB- ries are installed, consult an authorized
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR  Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
NOTE VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED connector (data link connector) for checking
 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while and servicing the electronic control system.
UNDER WARRANTY.
driving, the engine malfunction indicator Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con-
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check necting a device other than the Scan Tool for
Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light”) may come on when the inspections and service to this connector
that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs because an unexpected problem could result.
a self check. lems include the following:
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect-
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until ing a device other than the Scan Tool may
you hear at least 3 clicks.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
not be covered under warranty.
The indicator will go off after driving several parts
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels  The installation of accessories, optional
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, parts, etc., should only be carried out
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train within the limits prescribed by law, and in
or electrical wiring systems accordance with the guidelines and warn-
ings contained within the documents
accompanying this vehicle.
General information 3-5

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
Important point! Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
 Improper installation of electrical parts parts
could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica- Due to the large number of accessory and N00301400219
3 tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel replacement parts provided by different man-

ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
systems” section within this owner’s designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
manual. sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer to check whether the attachment or dards of performance, and are recommended
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
the vehicle without an external antenna installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
ine parts affects the driving safety of your able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
may cause electrical system interference, a wide variety of accessories to personalize
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- Mitsubishi-vehicle.
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
tion. vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- Modification/alterations to the authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
ifications must not be used.
electrical or fuel systems lor your new vehicle to your own personal
Refer to the “Specifications” section for preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
N00301800138
information regarding wheel and tire Parts Manager has information on various
sizes. Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is audio systems, protection items, as well as
important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi interior and exterior accessories available for
WARNING Motors dealer before installation of any your specific model.
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone accessory which may involve modification of
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
thing, including cellular phone usage, that
the electrical or fuel systems. California Perchlorate
distracts you from the safe operation of Materials Requirements
your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- CAUTION N00300100017
dent.  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Certain components of this vehicle, such as
Refer to and follow all state and local laws Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
in your area regarding cellular phone sory fitment or modification. airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
usage while driving. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
improper installation methods are used (pro- materials.
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic Special handling may apply. For additional
devices may be adversely affected, resulting information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident. waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-7
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Extending a luggage compartment ..................................................4-9
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-11
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-17
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-17
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-19
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-26
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-26
Seats
Seats
N00408401522
locks also are safety equipment, which must

1 - Front seat Seats and restraint systems be used correctly.
N00401601264
 To adjust the seat forward or backward  Always check the following before you drive:
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
Page 4-3
 To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-4 that help protect you and your passengers in
 That everyone in your vehicle is properly
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat an accident.
wearing their seat belt.
Seat belts are the most important safety
only)  Page 4-5  That infants and small children are prop-
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-6 erly secured in appropriate child restraint
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
 Heated seat (if so equipped)  Page 4-6 systems in the rear seat.
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
 That all doors are fully closed and locked.
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
2 - Rear seats  That seatbacks are upright, with head
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System
restraints properly adjusted.
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-7 gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
WARNING CAUTION
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con- catch your hand or leg.
ever, by following the instructions in this
trol and result in an accident.  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
manual.
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that it pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
WARNING
is securely locked into position.
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
gers.
4
 Do not place objects under the seats. This injury or death during deployment of the
could prevent the seat from locking driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
To adjust the seat forward or
securely, and it could lead to an accident. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far backward
It may also cause damage to the seat or back as possible while maintaining a posi- N00401901371
other parts. tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
Manual seat adjustment
and safely operate the vehicle.
 To reduce the risk to the front passenger
Front seats of serious injury or death during deploy- Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
N00401801468 ment of the passenger’s airbag, always seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi- properly wear the seat belt and adjust the tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
ble while maintaining a position that still front passenger’s seat as far back as possi- seat in place.
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ble.
control the steering wheel and safely operate  Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
the vehicle.
child restraint systems.
Manual seat Power seat

adjustment adjustment CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving.
The effectiveness of the head restraints will
be reduced in the event of an accident.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
WARNING To adjust the seatbacks Power seat adjustment

 To make sure that the seat is securely N00402001425
locked, try to move it forward or back- Operate the switch in the direction of the
ward without using the adjusting lever. Manual seat adjustment arrows to adjust the seatback.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,

Power seat adjustment gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
lean backward to a comfortable position and
Operate the switch forward or backward to release the lever. The seatback will lock in
move the seat to the desired position. Release place.
the switch to lock the seat in place.
1- Move forward
2- Move backward
NOTE
 To prevent the battery from going dead,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle) ning.
CAUTION
2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
cle) back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
NOTE When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
 To prevent the battery from going dead, back or hold the seatback with your hand to
operate the power seat with the engine run- control its return motion.
ning.

Front seats
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident 4
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- Raise 1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat
the body during an accident, there is 2- Lower
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
Power seat adjustment
To adjust the seat height Operate the switch in the direction of the
(Driver’s seat only) arrows to raise or lower the seat.
N00402101282
NOTE
Manual seat adjustment  To prevent the battery from going dead,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower ning.
2- Raise or lower the back end of the seat
the seat.

Front seats
Heated seat (if so equipped) WARNING

N00435601405  Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
The heated seats can be operated by pushing ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,
the switch when the ignition switch or the
fatigue or other physical conditions or
operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
4 (A) will illuminate while the heater is on. when using the heated seat even at low
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care
when using the heated seat.
3- Raise or lower the entire seat

CAUTION
 Switch off the heated seats when not in use.
Arm rest (if so equipped) Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
N00402300069 quick heating. After the seat has become
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
The lid on the floor console box can be tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
moved forward and backward and used as an seat temperature may be felt while using the
arm rest. heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
2 - Heater off into the seat.
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)  Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
heater.

Rear seats
CAUTION Rear seats Head restraints

 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the N00402500191 N00404300542
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
Padded head restraints for the seats can
attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
Arm rest (if so equipped) reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
tioning during use. vehicle is hit from the rear.
4
N00403000308
Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to trated position.
“Cup holder: For the rear seat” on page To maximize the effectiveness of your head
5-177.) restraint, adjust the front seatback to the
upright position, the rear seatback to the nor-
mal seating position, and the head restraint to
the proper position. Sit back against the seat-
back with your head close to the head
restraint.
NOTE
 Never sit on the arm rest.
Doing so could damage the arm rest.

Head restraints
 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
WARNING  To lower the restraint, push down on it
 Driving without the head restraints in
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
place can cause you and your passengers
direction shown by the arrow.
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,  After adjusting the height, push down on
always make sure the head restraints are the restraint to make sure it is locked in
4 installed and properly positioned when position.
the seat is occupied.
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-
back must be adjusted to the upright posi-
tion, the rear seatback to the normal
seating position, and the head restraint to WARNING
the proper position before vehicle opera-  To help minimize the risk of neck injury
tion. The driver should never adjust the in the event of an accident, the head
seat while the vehicle is in motion. restraints must be properly installed and
 Never place a cushion or similar device on positioned to proper height before vehicle
the seatback. This can adversely affect operation.
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To install
To remove
Adjustment of the head First check that the head restraint is facing in
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction the right direction as shown in the previous
restraint height shown by the arrows. Then pull the head illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
restraint up and out of the seatback. back. Push the head restraint down while
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
adjust the head restraint height so that the locks into place.
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
Extending a luggage compartment
CAUTION WARNING
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out  The luggage compartment in the rear of
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the the vehicle should never be used as a play
head restraint up to make sure that it is area by children. All children should be
locked in place and will not come out of the properly restrained in a restraint device
seatback. that offers the maximum protection for
their size and age. Refer to “Child 4
restraint systems” on page 4-19.
 The front passenger seat is equipped with
weight sensors. Depending on the weight
detected, the front passenger airbag is dis-
abled or enabled. When folding the rear
seats forward for increased cargo capac-
Extending a luggage com- ity, the front passenger seat and seatback
must be adjusted to assure they are not
partment contacting the rear seat. In the event the
N00405500105 front seat or seatback is allowed to contact
the folded rear seat, proper operation of
WARNING the front passenger airbag system may be
 Never adjust the seats to extend a luggage affected.
CAUTION compartment while the vehicle is in
motion or on a slope.
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the
The seats could move suddenly and cause CAUTION
serious injury or an accident.  In the luggage compartment, do not load the
correct head restraint provided for the seat
 After returning a seatback to its normal luggage higher than the top of the seats and
and do not install the head restraint in the
position, make sure that the seatback is make sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
wrong direction.
firmly secured. If the seatback is not Restricted rear vision or unsecured objects
secured, it could move and cause a serious entering the passenger compartment from the
accident. luggage compartment during sudden brak-
 Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage ing can cause serious injury or an accident.
compartment while the vehicle is in  Seatbacks should always be folded and put
motion. People who are not properly back into normal position by an adult. Seat
seated and restrained can be seriously adjustments by a child could lead to an unex-
injured or killed in an accident. pected accident.

Extending a luggage compartment
CAUTION To fold the seatbacks To return the seatbacks

 When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could 1. If the outboard seat belt has been sepa-
result. CAUTION rated from the seat belt guide (B), insert it
 Before folding the driver’s side rear seatback into the seat belt guide.
back, detach the center seat belt from the 2. Tilt the seatback up until it is locked prop-
4 NOTE detachable anchor and retract the center seat erly in position.
belt all the way to the rear trim to prevent
 When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
return it to the upright position before driv-
damage to the seat belt caused by an object WARNING
in the luggage compartment. For details,
ing.  After returning the seatbacks to their
refer to page 4-14.
upright positions, make sure that the rear
seat belts are in front of the seatbacks, and
Folding the rear seatbacks for- Push the rear seat release button (A) to fold not caught behind the seatbacks.
the seatback forward.
ward The rear outboard seat belt can be separated
N00417801069
from the seat belt guide (B) to help prevent NOTE
The passenger and luggage compartments can damage to the seat belt while the seatback is  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
be joined by folding the seatback forward. folded. out, pull it once with force and let it retract
This is useful for carrying long objects. all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly
The seatbacks can be folded with the rear seat once again.
release button.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked securely
NOTE in place and the seat belt is passed through
 You can separately fold the right and left the seat belt guide (B).
side of the seatback.
WARNING
 If the red part (C) on the back of the rear
seat release button can be seen, the seat-
back is not locked firmly in place. Push
and pull lightly on the seatback to lock it
firmly in place.

Seat belts
5. After making sure that the seat belt is not
twisted, insert the small latch plate (E) Seat belts
into the detachable anchor (F) aligning the N00406001537
marks (G) on the plate and buckle until a Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
“click” is heard. Make sure the detachable reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
anchor is securely latched and seat belt is senger in the event of an accident. Always
not twisted. For details, refer to page use the provided seat belts. 4
4-14. Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.
WARNING
4. If the center seat belt is stored in the rear  To help reduce the risk of injury or death
trim, pull the seat belt out and pass it in an accident, seat belts and child
through the seat belt guide (D) near the restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page
center of the rear seat backs.
4-19 for additional information.
 Never use one seat belt for more than one
person.
 Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
WARNING  Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
 Using the rear center seat belt with the  Always place the shoulder belt over your
detachable anchor unlatched increases the shoulder and across your chest. Never put
risk of serious injury or death in an acci- it behind you or under your arm.
dent. Make sure the detachable anchor is  Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
properly latched. across your hips, not around your waist.

Seat belts
WARNING WARNING Seat belt instructions

 Never insert any foreign object, such as a  Never hold an infant or child in your arms N00406201500
piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin, or on your lap when riding in this vehicle All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
into the seat belt buckle. even when you are wearing your seat belt.
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
Never place any part of the seat belt you
an emergency locking retractor.
are wearing around an infant or child.
4 Failure to follow these simple instructions
This system is designed to provide both com-
creates a risk of serious injury or death to
your child in the event of an accident or
fort and safety. It permits full extension and
sudden stop. automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
 Children 12 years old and under should mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
always ride in the rear seat and be prop- inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
erly restrained. This reduces their risk of retractor in the event of a sudden change in
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in serious injury or death in an accident, the vehicle’s motion.
your vehicle. especially due to a deploying front passen-
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
injury or death during deployment of the tems” on page 4-19 for additional
NOTE
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the information.  For instructions on installing a child restraint
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far  Any child who is too small to properly system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
back as possible while maintaining a posi- child restraint system using the seat belt” on
wear a seat belt must be properly
tion that still enables you to fully apply the page 4-23.
restrained in an appropriate child
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, restraint system.
and safely operate the vehicle.  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen- child safety seat and positioned in the rear
ger of serious injury or death from a seat.
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
always wears the seat belt properly, assemblies, including retractors and
remains seated all the way back and attachment hardware, should be inspected
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- dealer to determine whether replacement
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on is necessary.
page 4-26 for additional information.

Seat belts
1. Occupants should always sit back in their 4. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
seats with their backs against the upright
WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
death in the event of an accident or sud-
injury or death during deployment of the up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back the upright position while the vehicle is in locked securely in the buckle.
as possible while maintaining a position motion.
that still enables you to fully apply the Seat belt performance during an accident 4
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
and safely operate the vehicle. The front are reclined. The more a seatback is
passenger seat should also be moved as reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- mance will be adversely affected. If the
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
on page 4-26. Also refer to “To adjust the
increased risk you will slide under the belt
seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
and receive serious injury or death.
2. Before using the rear center seat belt,

make sure that the detachable anchor is NOTE
securely latched and the seat belt is not  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
twisted. For details, refer to page 4-14. out, pull it once with force and let it retract
3. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the all the way.
webbing so that it easily pulls across your Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
body.
5. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
take up any slack in the lap belt.

Seat belts
luggage compartment while the driver’s side
WARNING rear seat back is folded down.
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance. WARNING
 Never detach the rear center seat belt
6. To release the belt, press the button on the
4 buckle and allow the belt to retract.
except when the driver’s side rear seat
back is folded down. Using the rear center
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it seat belt with the detachable anchor
out and check for kinks or twists in the unlatched increases the risk of serious
webbing. Then make sure it remains injury or death in an accident. Make sure
untwisted as it retracts. the detachable anchor is properly latched
before the center seat belt is used.
NOTE NOTE
 With the exception of the seat belt for the  If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock- belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the mild soap or detergent solution.
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function (see page 4-23).
When the ALR function has been activated,
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 5.
WARNING To attach
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
is worn as low as possible across the hips, Detachable rear center seat belt 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly and pass it
not around the waist. Failure to follow this N00409700017
through the seat belt guide (A).
instruction will increase the risk of serious
The rear center seat belt can be detached to
injury or death in the event of an accident.
help avoid damage caused by an object in the

Seat belts
3. After the seat belt is retracted completely,

NOTE To detach insert the latch plate (E) into the upper slit
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
(H) and the small latch plate (B) into the
out, pull it once with force and let it retract 1. Insert the latch plate (E) of the center seat
lower slit (I).
all the way. belt into the slit (G) on the detachable
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. anchor (C) and release the center seat belt
from the detachable anchor.
2. After making sure that the seat belt is not
twisted, insert the small latch plate (B)
into the detachable anchor (C) aligning
the marks (D) on the plate and buckle
until a “click” is heard.
2. Pass the seat belt through the seat belt

guide (A) and retract it completely toward
the rear trim.

Seat belts
If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened
Driver’s seat belt for longer than a minute from when the igni-
Front passenger seat belt warn-
reminder/warning light and tion switch or the engine switch is operated, ing light
display the warning light will come on and blink N00418300194
N00418400342 repeatedly and the tone will sound intermit- The front passenger seat belt warning light is
Warning light tently. located in the instrument panel.
4 The warning light and the tone will stop after
approximately 90 seconds.
If you then repeatedly stop and start your
vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the
Warning display type 1 warning light/display and tone will remind
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
vehicle starts moving. You will also be
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way
when you remove your seat belt while driv-
ing. The warning light and the tone go off
when the seat belt is fastened.
Warning display type 2
WARNING When the ignition switch is turned to the

 In order to reduce the risk of serious “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
injury or death in an accident, always fas- ON, this indicator normally comes on and
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any- goes off a few seconds later.
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she The light comes on when a person sits on the
A tone and warning light are used to remind is also seated and fastening a seat belt. front passenger seat but does not fasten the
the driver to fasten the seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” in a secure child restraint system. sequently fastened.
position or the operation mode is put in ON
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, WARNING
a warning light will come on and a tone will NOTE
 Do not install any accessory or sticker that
sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind  At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”
makes the light difficult to see.
you to fasten your seat belt. will be displayed on the information screen
in the multi-information display.

Seat belt use during pregnancy
Adjustable seat belt shoulder WARNING Seat belt use during preg-
anchor (front seats)  Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
nancy
N00406300344
position after adjusting it.
N00406800134
To move the anchor (A), press the lock knob Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
(B) and slide the anchor to the desired posi- Seat belt extender nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
tion. N00406701228
women are more likely to be seriously injured
4
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is or killed in an accident if they do not wear
Anchor down Anchor up
not long enough, a seat belt extender must be seat belts.
obtained. The extender may be used for either
of the front seats.
WARNING
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
WARNING
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
that the shoulder belt is positioned across Seat belt pre-tensioner and
the center of your shoulder without touch- force limiter systems
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should WARNING N00417700641
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-  The extender should only be used if the
ure to follow this instruction can adversely The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
affect seat belt performance and increase who can use the standard seat belt should
have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
the risk of serious injury or death in the not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an system.
event of an accident. extender can adversely affect seat belt
 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when performance in an accident.
the vehicle is not in motion.  When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate
Pre-tensioner system under the same conditions as the airbag con-
trol unit.
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys- When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side some smoke is released and a loud noise will
4 collision or when a rollover or overturning of be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys- should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
tem operates simultaneously with the deploy- as it may cause some temporary irritation to
ment of the front airbags, side airbags or people with respiratory problems.
curtain airbags. Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within 1- SRS warning light tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, 2- Front impact sensors not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may
the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt 3- Seat belt pre-tensioner not activate in certain collisions, even though
webbing and increase seat belt performance. 4- Airbag control unit the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-
5- Side impact sensors aged. Such non-activation does not mean that
6- Seat belt buckle switches something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten-
sioner system, but rather that the collision
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness forces were not severe enough to activate the
of the electronic parts of the system whenever system.
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include WARNING
all of the items listed above and all related  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
wiring. designed to work only once. After the seat
[Except for vehicles equipped with the belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
F.A.S.T.-key] they will not work again. They must
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or promptly be replaced and the entire seat
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes “START” position. belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
the following components: [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The operation mode is in ON.

Child restraint systems

The child restraint system should be appropri-  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
SRS warning ate for your child’s weight and height, and (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches
N00408700081
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
This warning light tells you if there is a prob- For detailed information, refer to the instruc- use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
lem involving the SRS airbags and the seat tion manual accompanying the child restraint in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-
belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS system. shoulder belt fits them properly.
warning light/display” on page 4-32. 4
Guidelines for child restraint WARNING
Force limiter system system selection  All children must be seated in the rear
N00408900126 seat, and properly restrained.
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force Accident statistics show that children of
All children should be properly restrained in all sizes and ages are safer when properly
limiter system will help reduce the force
a restraint device that offers the maximum restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
protection for their size and age. the front seat.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial  Any child who is too large to use a child
Child restraint systems requirements for child size and age that may restraint system should ride in the rear
N00407101724 vary from the recommendations listed below. seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
When transporting infants or small children  Children less than 1 year old and who tioned over the shoulder and across the
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST chest, not across their neck, and with the
system must always be used. This is required ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
by law in the U.S. and Canada. MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat. not across their stomach. If necessary, a
Child restraint systems specifically designed  Children older than 1 year of age and who
booster seat should be used to help achieve
for infants and small children are offered by a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
several manufacturers. Choose only a child are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall
restraint system with a label certifying that it a booster seat that is certified as comply-
MUST be in a forward-facing restraint ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety that MUST ONLY be used in the rear Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle seat. Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety tions.
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
and child restraint system itself.

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Never hold an infant or child in your arms  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, passenger airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in
Never place any part of the seat belt you RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to
are wearing around an infant or child. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure
4 Failure to follow these simple instructions senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys-
creates a risk of serious injury or death to close to the passenger airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
your child in the event of an accident or deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious
sudden stop. be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.
child restraint systems or infant restraint
systems must only be used in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.

WARNING NOTE Installing a child restraint sys-

 When installing a child restraint system,  Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower
follow the instructions provided by the try installing it in the rear seat to make sure
manufacturer and follow the directions in there is a good fit. Because of the location of Anchors and Tethers for chil-
this manual. Failure to do so can result in the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat dren) system
serious injury or death to your child in an cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
accident or sudden stop. some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418800128
4
 After installation, push and pull the child If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
the child restraint system is not installed choose another manufacturer’s child The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
securely, it may cause injury to the child restraint system. of your vehicle are equipped with lower
or other occupants in the event of an acci- Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
dent or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
 When not in use, keep your child restraint you have, the child restraint system can be
system secured with the seat belt, or attached using one of the following 2 meth-
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre- ods:
vent it from being thrown around inside • Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
the vehicle during an accident. seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-21).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-23).
NOTE
 The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.

Tether anchor locations Examples of child restraint sys-

N00418901214 tems compatible with the LATCH
Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the system
backside of the rear seats. These are for N00419001209
securing a child restraint system tether strap
4 to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your
vehicle.
A- Vehicle seat C- Lower anchor

cushion
B- Vehicle seatback D- Connector
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the

A- Rear-facing child restraint system
child restraint system into the lower
B- Front-facing child restraint system
anchors (C) in accordance with the
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
instructions provided by the child restraint
connectors
system’s manufacturer.
D- Tether strap
Remember, the lower anchors provided
(These are only examples.)
with your vehicle are designed to secure
suitable child restraint systems compati-
Using the LATCH system ble with the LATCH system in the out-
N00419101268
board positions of the rear seats only. The
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, anchor connectors are NOT designed to
remove the head restraint from the loca- secure a suitable child restraint system in
tion where you wish to install the child the center position of the rear seat.
restraint system.
2. Open a small gap between the seat cush-
ion (A) and the seatback (B) with your
hand to locate the lower anchors (C).


5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
NOTE restraint system to the tether anchor bar
Installing a child restraint sys-
 In order to secure a child restraint system
(F) and tighten the tether strap so it is tem using the seat belt (with
compatible with the LATCH system, use the
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
securely fastened. emergency/automatic locking
of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the mechanism)
vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
however, MUST be used to secure a child
N00407301524
4
With the exception of the driver’s seat, the
restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat. seat belt in all other seating positions can be
converted from normal Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) mode to Automatic Locking
WARNING Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when
you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor,
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it the retractor will switch to its ALR child
before installing the child restraint sys- restraint installation function. Always use the
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away ALR child restraint installation function
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in
from, not looped through or otherwise when you install a child restraint system
all directions to be sure it is firmly
interfering with, the child restraint sys- using the seat belt.
tem. If foreign matter is not removed secured.
and/or the seat belt interferes with the Children 12 years old and under should
child restraint system, the child restraint WARNING always be restrained in the rear seat whenever
system will not be secured properly, could  Child restraint system tether anchors are possible, although the front passenger seat
detach and move forward in the event of designed only to withstand loads from cor- belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
sudden braking or an accident, and could rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
result in injury to the child or other vehi- no circumstances are they to be used for
cle occupants. adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust attaching other items or equipment to the
the seat where the child restraint system is vehicle.
installed.
4. Remove the cargo area cover from the

vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
page 5-177.)


2. Route the seat belt through the child
WARNING restraint system’s according to the
 When you install a child restraint system
instructions provided by the child restraint
using the seat belt, always make sure the
system’s manufacturer. Then insert the
retractor has been switched to the ALR
child restraint installation function. The seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Make
ALR function will keep the child restraint sure you hear a “click” when you insert
4 system tightly secured to the seat. the latch plate into the buckle.
Failure to convert the retractor to the
ALR function may allow the child
restraint system to move forward during
sudden braking or an accident, resulting
in serious injury or death to the child or
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.
other occupants.
If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
 When you install a child restraint system
using the 3-point type seat belt with 2 not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
buckles in the rear center seating position, can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
always make sure both latch plates are function has not been activated and you
secured. Do not use the seat belt with only will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.
one of the latch plates attached. This could 5. After confirming that the belt is locked,
result in a serious injury or death in the 3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal- grab the shoulder part of the belt near the
event of an accident or sudden stop. lation function, slowly pull the shoulder buckle and pull up to remove any slack
part of the belt all the way out of the from the lap part of the belt, allowing the
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
Installation feed back into the retractor. if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
restraint system will not be secure. It may
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat help to put your weight on the child
where you wish to install it. restraint system and/or push on its seat-
To help assure proper fitting of the child back while pulling up on the belt (See
restraint system, always remove the head illustration).
restraint.


their stomach, a commercially available
WARNING booster seat must be used to raise the child so
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
and the lap belt remains positioned low
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for across their hips. The booster seat should fit
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
attaching other items or equipment to the compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle 4
vehicle. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
8. Before putting your child in the restraint, tions.
push and pull the restraint in all directions
If your child restraint system requires the use to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this WARNING
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in before each use. If the child restraint sys-  Any child who is too small to properly
accordance with the following procedures. tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 wear a seat belt must be properly
through 7. restrained in an appropriate child
6. Remove the cargo area cover from the 9. To remove a child restraint system from restraint system, to reduce their risk of
vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, serious injury or death in an accident.
page 5-177.) remove the child from the restraint.  A child should never be left unattended in,
or unsupervised around, your vehicle.
7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
When you leave the vehicle, always take
child restraint system to the tether anchor from the restraint and let the belt fully
the child out as well.
bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is retract.
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or
securely fastened. 10. Reinstall the head restraint. trapped inside the vehicle, especially on
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7. hot days.
 Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.
Children who have outgrown Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
dren.
child restraint systems
N00407601673
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
Maintenance and inspection WARNING forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
of seat belts  Never use an organic solvent to clean the
seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to
and provide increased overall body protection
N00407001374 in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing.
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and These may weaken the seat belt webbing, sions.
their release mechanisms for positive engage- increasing risk of injury or death in an
4 ment and release of the latch plate. Check the accident.
The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
Clean seat belt webbing only with mild are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
retractors for automatic locking when in the
soap or detergent solution and rinse it The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
Automatic Locking Retractor function.
with lukewarm water, and dry the seat front passenger with protection against chest
The entire seat belt assembly should be belt webbing completely before retracting injuries by deploying the bag on the side
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious it. impacted in moderate to severe side impact
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
the driver and the passengers on the front seat
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or Supplemental Restraint Sys- and the rear outboard seats with protection
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
tem (SRS) - airbag against head injuries by deploying the curtain
which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
N00407701762 airbag on the side impacted in moderate to
mance in an accident. This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental severe side impact collisions and by deploy-
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- ing both curtain airbags when a rollover is
bags for the driver and passengers. detected. The curtain airbags are also
WARNING designed to help reduce the risk of complete
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any The SRS front airbags are designed to supple- and partial ejection from the vehicle through
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work ment the primary protection of the driver and side windows in both side impact and roll-
should be done by an authorized
front passenger seat belt systems by provid- over type accidents.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have
ing those occupants with protection against
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
perform the work could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the belts and could result in a severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air- of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
serious injury or death in an accident. bags, together with sensors at the front of the all types of accidents, seat belts must
vehicle and sensors attached to the front ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives
seats, form an advanced airbag system. or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-
supplement the primary protection of the led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

systems” on page 4-19.
WARNING WARNING
• A driver or front passenger sitting too  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
WARNING close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS panel during airbag deployment can be seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY seriously injured or killed. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. chest close to the steering wheel or the
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. If the driver and front pas- instrument panel. 4
sengers properly positioned. This senger are not properly seated and  Do not put your feet or legs on or against
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, restrained, the airbag may not provide the instrument panel.
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or the proper protection, and can cause
death when the airbags inflate. serious injuries or death when it inflates.
During sudden braking just before a col- • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
lision, an unrestrained or improperly injury or death due to a deploying
restrained driver or passengers can move driver’s airbag, always properly wear
forward into direct contact with, or your seat belt and adjust the driver’s
within close proximity to, the airbag seat as far back as possible, maintaining
when it begins to inflate. a position that still allows the driver to
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is have good control of the steering wheel,
the most forceful and can cause serious brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
injuries or death if the occupant comes in trols.
contact with the airbag at this time. • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in of serious injury or death from a deploy-
rear impact collisions, and in lower- ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
speed frontal collisions because the air- passenger always wears the seat belt
WARNING
bags are not designed to inflate in those  Infants and small children should never
properly, remains seated upright and all
situations. ride unrestrained, or lean against the
the way back in the seat, and positions
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being instrument panel. They should never ride
the seat as far back as possible.
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or held in your arms or on your lap. They
• Seat all infants and children in the rear
rollover. can be seriously injured or killed in an
seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
accident, especially when the airbags
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE ate child restraint system.
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the
PROPERLY SEATED.
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro-
priate child restraint system. Refer to
“Child restraint systems” on page 4-19.

Airbag

 NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  Older children should be seated in the
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat rear seat with their seat belt properly
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in worn, and with an appropriate booster
senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to seat if needed.
close to the passenger airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure Refer to “Children who have outgrown
deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys- child restraint systems” on page 4-25.
be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
in the rear seat.


When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
How the Supplemental front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
Restraint System works the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
N00407800450
The SRS includes the following components: When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
deployed. 4
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
11- Side airbag modules the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
12- Curtain airbag modules tion to people with respiratory problems.
13- Side impact sensors
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated.
1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
2- SRS warning light the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the
4- Airbag module (Passenger) all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.
5- Front impact sensors wiring.
6- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Driver’s seat position sensor F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
8- Passenger’s seat weight sensors
“START” position. force. In certain situations, contact with an
9- Weight control unit inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
10- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The operation mode is in ON.
The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418600243
This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-32.
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
NOTE
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a WARNING
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
road obstacle, data that will assist in under-  If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., play comes on, have the vehicle inspected
The EDR is designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash location) are by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
4 vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a recorded. However, other parties, such as dealer as soon as possible.
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or law enforcement, could combine the EDR  Please observe the following instructions
less. data with the type of personally identifying to ensure that the driver’s seat position
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- sensor can operate correctly.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
such data as: and sit well back against the seatback.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
 How various systems in your vehicle were • Do not recline the seatback more than
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
operating; necessary when driving.
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
 Whether or not the driver and passenger • Do not place metallic objects or luggage
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
safety belts were buckled/fastened; under the front seat.
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
ment, can read the information if they have
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
access to the vehicle or the EDR. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
and,
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. soon as possible.
Driver’s seat position sensor
These data can help provide a better under- N00417900177
standing of the circumstances in which The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat weight sensors
crashes and injuries occur. to the seat rail and provides the airbag control N00418000322
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft The passenger’s seat weight sensors are
position. The airbag control unit controls attached to the seat rails and provide the air-
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in bag control unit with information regarding
accordance with the information it receives the weight on the front passenger seat. The
from this sensor. airbag control unit controls deployment of the
If there is a problem involving the driver’s passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the information it receives from this sensor.
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to

The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
in an impact when the weight on the seat is
WARNING WARNING
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat weight • Do not expose the sensors to liquids or
sensed to be less than approximately 66
sensors can correctly sense the weight vapors.
pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passenger
being applied to the seat, observe the fol- • Do not subject the sensors to shock.
airbag off indicator will come on. lowing instructions. Failure to follow these • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on instructions can adversely affect the per-
page 4-31. formance of the passenger’s airbag sys-
the front passenger seat with their feet or
force the front passenger seat upward.
4
If there is a problem involving the passenger tem. • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp
seat weight sensors, the SRS warning light in • Adjust the seat to the correct position, the front passenger’s seatback or put
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to and sit well back against the seatback. their arms around it.
“SRS warning light/display” on page 4-32. Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. • When attaching a child restraint system
• Do not recline the seatback more than in the rear seat, make sure it does not
necessary.
WARNING • Never have more than one person (adult
interfere with the front seat.
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
 If any of the following conditions occur, or child) sitting on the seat. impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
you should have your vehicle inspected by
• Do not place anything between the seat an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
and the floor console. soon as possible.
soon as possible:
• Do not hang anything on the front pas-
• The SRS warning light does not initially
senger’s seatback.
come on when the ignition switch or the
• Do not remove the head restraints.
Passenger’s airbag off indicator
operation mode is under the following N00418100280
conditions. • When attaching a child restraint system,
secure it firmly. The passenger airbag off indicator is located
• [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key] • Do not place luggage or other objects on in the instrument panel.
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or the seat.
“START” position. • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] • Do not remove the seats and seat belts.
The operation mode is in ON. • Do not modify or replace the seat and
• The SRS warning light does not go out seat belt.
after several seconds. • Do not place luggage or other objects
• The SRS warning light comes on while under the seat.
you are driving. • Do not place the floor mat on the seat
rails.


WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur,
you should have the airbag system in your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
ble:
4 • The passenger’s airbag off indicator Warning display type 2
comes on when an adult is sitting on the
front passenger seat.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the front passenger
The indicator normally comes on when the seat is not occupied.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the ignition switch is
or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes The system checks itself every time the igni-
turned to the “ON” position or the oper-
out a few seconds later. In the following situ- tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
ation mode is put in ON.
ations, the indicator will stay on to show that the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
the passenger front airbag is not operational. comes on and goes out repeatedly. warning light will come on for several sec-
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi- onds and then go out. This is normal and
 The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense means the system is working properly.
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
a weight of less than approximately 66 indicator difficult or impossible to see. If there is a problem involving one or more of
pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger You must be able to see the passenger’s the SRS components, the warning light will
seat. airbag off indicator and verify the status come on and stay on. At the same time, the
 The front passenger’s seat is not occu- of the passenger’s airbag system. warning display will appear on the informa-
pied. tion screen in the multi information display.
The SRS warning light/display is shared by
When the weight applied to the front passen- SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66 N00408301592 system.
pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes Warning light
out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
is operational.


ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
WARNING passenger seat is not occupied or when the
 If any of the following conditions occur,
weight sensor in the front passenger seat
there may be a problem with the SRS air-
senses a weight on the seat of less than
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
they may not function properly in a colli- approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).
sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision: 4
• Even when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
ing light does not come on or it remains
on.
• The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
ing display comes on while driving. Driver
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
sioners are designed to help reduce the Front passenger
risk of serious injury or death in certain
collisions. If either of the above conditions
occurs, immediately have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. Driver’s knee airbag system
N00404500010
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

Driver’s and passenger’s front steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
airbag system designed to deploy at the same time as the
N00407900291 driver’s front airbag.
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-

Deployment of front airbags

N00408000592
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
4 Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are structure is above a specific threshold level. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful and can cause serious injury or
moderate to severe frontal impact. Typical (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
situations are shown in the illustration above. solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If Accordingly, it is important that you always
the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is wear the available seat belt.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are below this threshold level, the front airbags
designed to deploy only in certain moderate and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
area between the arrows in the illustration to cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
the right. either by bending or moving (for example,
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar- pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY row object
Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
when … tion.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not airbag do not protect the occupants in all 4
deploy, even if the deformation of the body Collision where the vehicle slides under the
types of collisions, be sure to always wear the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body rear body of a truck seat belts properly.
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee Side collision to your vehicle
airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
your seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or curb
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

4 may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee

airbag may deploy in certain types of unex- WARNING
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
and these unexpected impacts can move you ground in front of, the windshield. They could
out of position, it is important to always wear restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
the seat belts properly. When worn properly, injure an occupant, when the airbag
seat belts can help maintain your distance inflates.
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent
most forceful and can cause serious injury or the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
death if you are close to the deploying airbag. normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
WARNING  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
 Do not attach anything to the steering tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- Such objects could prevent the driver’s
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and knee airbag from inflating normally or
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. could be propelled to cause serious injury
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything if the airbag inflates.
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

N00408100391 N00419201328
The side airbags (A) are contained in the Your vehicle is equipped with a curtain air-
driver and front passenger seatbacks. bag in the front pillar, the rear pillar and the
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on side sections of the roof.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only 4
with no passenger in the front seat. on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can
adversely affect airbag performance, or
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys. A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some cles equipped with side airbags.
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned.
 The airbag system is designed to work
only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.


 Side airbags and curtain airbags can  Do not place any objects around the area  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
cause serious injury or death to anyone where the side airbags deploy. Such pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To objects can interfere with proper side air- tain airbag was activated, any such item
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying bag deployment, and cause injury during could be propelled away with great force
side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and deployment of the side airbag. and could prevent the curtain airbag from
4 front passenger must be properly  Do not place stickers, labels or additional inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
restrained and seated well back, upright, trim on the back of either front seat. They on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean can interfere with proper side airbag Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
against the door. deployment. objects in the pockets of clothes that you
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any hang on the coat hook.
other object around the part where the  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
windshield, side door glass or front and fere with proper side airbag deployment
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or mance.
other object may be hurled with great  Never install a rear-facing child restraint
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
correctly, resulting in death or serious facing child restraint systems MUST
injury. ONLY be used in the rear seat.
 Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
If a front-facing child restraint system
must be used in the front passenger seat,
WARNING move the seat as far back as possible, and
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from make sure that the child stays in the child
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any restraint system, properly restrained and
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back away from the door.
of either front seat. Special care should be
taken with children.


The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
WARNING Deployment of side airbag and mary means of protection in an accident. The
 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit curtain airbag SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
close to the passenger door, even if the N00408200493 airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
child is seated in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not lean provide additional protection. Therefore, for
against or be close to the section of the The side airbag and curtain airbag your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
seatback where the side airbag and cur- ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY sure to always wear your seat belts properly. 4
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if when...
the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys. The side airbag and curtain airbag
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious injury or death to the The side airbag and curtain airbag are MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
child. designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side moderate to severe side impact to the middle In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
airbag or curtain airbag components of the passenger compartment. bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
should be done only by an authorized The typical situation is shown in the illustra- if the deformation of the body seems to be
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk tion. large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
of a serious injury or death. Improper
designed to absorb the impact and to deform
work methods can cause accidental side
airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the in order to help protect the occupants. There
vehicle body’s side structure are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
could result in serious injury or death. depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations.
When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
(Curtain airbag only) do not protect the occupant in all types of side
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.

Side impact in an area away from the passenger Oblique side impact Head-on collision
compartment
4
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle
collision with the side of vehicle Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag
only)
Pitch end over end
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other

narrow object
The side airbag and curtain airbag
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when...
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not

designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags

do not protect the occupant in all types of col-
lisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
properly.

SRS servicing WARNING NOTE

N00408500698  Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Also, if you discover any tear or open To contact Mitsubishi Motors North
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air- America, Inc. 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you have found any scratch, crack or Customer Relations Department
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and P.O. Box 6400
ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles sold in Canada]
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
Canada, Inc.
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
tions could result in serious injury or Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
to another person, we urge you to alert the
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS
Customer Relations Department
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec- P.O. Box 41009
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owner’s manual. 4141 Dixie Road
part. For example, replacement of the  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can [For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
may lead to injury. Caribbean, Inc.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person, call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean,
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Inc.
make sure it is in proper working order. Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Customer Service Department
• Driver’s seat P.O. Box 192216
• Front passenger seat SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
• Front seat belt


[For vehicles sold in Guam]
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
Warning label
N00408600354
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
are located in the vehicle as shown in the
P.O. Box 6066
illustration.
TAMUNING
4 GUAM 96931
[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
[For vehicles sold in American Samoa]

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
Pacific Marketing, Inc.
P.O. Box 698
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3 Brake assist system ........................................................................5-66

Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-67
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-69 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-70
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Cruise control (if so equipped) ......................................................5-73
(if so equipped) .........................................................................5-12 Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................................5-77
Door locks ......................................................................................5-28 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) ................................................5-81
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-30 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-83
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-31 Multi-information display .............................................................5-85
Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-32 Indicator light, warning light, and
Inside liftgate release .....................................................................5-33 information screen display list .................................................5-106
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-34 Indicators ..................................................................................... 5-119
Power window control ...................................................................5-37 Warning lights ..............................................................................5-120
Sunshade (if so equipped)..............................................................5-39 Information screen display ..........................................................5-121
Parking brake .................................................................................5-40 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-123
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-41 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)..................................5-129
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-42 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-129
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-44 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-130
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-46 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ........................................5-130
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-47 Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-130
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) .................................................5-49 Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-136
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped).........5-51 Horn switch .................................................................................5-136
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)................5-58 Link System (if so equipped) ......................................................5-137
4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-60 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).....................................5-137
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-63 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-160
Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles ......................5-63 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-163
Service brake .................................................................................5-64 12 V power outlets .......................................................................5-164
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-65
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ...............5-165
Features and controls
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-170

Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-174
5 Cup holders ................................................................................. 5-176
Bottle holders .............................................................................. 5-177
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ............................................... 5-177
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-178
Coat hook .................................................................................... 5-178
Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-179
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508700330 N00508801660
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- F.A.S.T.-key
the break-in period. (with electronic immobilizer and keyless
entry system function)
 Avoid revving the engine. 2- Emergency key
 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, 3- Key number plate
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the NOTE
engine and also cause increased fuel and  The key is a precision electronic device with
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
malfunction of the engine components. Be keyless entry system the following in order to prevent damage.
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- 2- Key number plate • Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
tion while in low shift position (low
top of the dashboard.
gears).
• Do not take the remote control transmitter
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within Type 2 apart.
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load • Do not excessively bend the key or subject
precautions” on page 6-10.) Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys it to strong impacts.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. are provided. • Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency • Keep away from magnetic objects such as
key in a safe place together as a set of spare key rings.
keys.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
NOTE NOTE achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door or
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
and televisions. liftgate is opened after using the key, the
door lock knob or the power door lock cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular switch to unlock the vehicle. electronics.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation
5 quency equipment (including medical status if the keyless entry system or the NOTE
devices). F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-  In the following cases, the vehicle may not
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. cle. be able to recognize the registered ID code
• Do not leave the key where it may be from the key. This means the engine will not
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
ity.
Electronic immobilizer start even when the key is turned to the
“START” position.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system) • When the key contacts a key ring or other
the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509101862 metallic or magnetic object
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles
ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
 No keys other than those registered in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft theft starting system)” on page 5-23.
starting system)” on page 5-4.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on (F.A.S.T.-key)]
page 5-23.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
5-4 Features and controls


Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
NOTE NOTE your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
• When the key grip contacts metal of  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
have your ID code changed.
another key with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle Additional keys
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- tered keys. You need to register the ID code 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a to the vehicle.
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Registering the ID code can be done by your-
Motors dealer. self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or
• When the key contacts or is close to other by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
immobilizer keys (including keys of other For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
vehicles) CAUTION low the “Customer key programming” proce-
 Do not make any alterations or additions to dure below.
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi- If you choose to have your authorized
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Replacement keys dealer.
Only keys that have been programmed to the NOTE

 In cases like the above, move the offending
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the  You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
object(s) away from the key and turn the key
vehicle. register up to 8 keys.
back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then
try to start the engine again. If the engine
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
does not start, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
 The key may not operate properly when it is
referring to the key number.
near an object or facility that emits strong To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
electromagnetic waves. vehicle keys must be changed.


4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30  The procedure will be terminated automati-
cally if:
Canada) seconds after doing so, insert a blank
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
N00562201181 immobilizer key into the ignition switch
from the moment when the first key is
You can program new keys to the system if and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
you have two valid (already registered) keys this operation no more than 30 seconds when the second key is turned to the “ON”
after the immobilizer display starts blink-
5 and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
ing. When registration of the ID code is
position
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
dealer) by doing the following: complete, the immobilizer display will from the moment when the second key is
come on for 30 seconds then go off. If an turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition error occurs, the blinking immobilizer dis- when the blank immobilizer key is turned
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi- play will go off during the procedure. to the “ON” position
tion for 5 seconds.  To use the new remote control transmitters,
it is necessary to register the key with both
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
the electronic immobilizer and keyless entry
remove the first key. system.
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
key, insert the second valid key into the tomer remote control transmitter program-
ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. 5. If you wish to register another key, per-
ming” on page 5-9.
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer form the process again from step 1.
display will start to blink.
General information
NOTE N00562301111
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
play screen may prevent you from seeing the radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
immobilizer display. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
 It is not possible to register a key if: cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
• the immobilizer display goes off during the Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
procedure device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules
• the immobilizer display does not come on and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
within 30 seconds after step 4. standard(s).

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
To unlock
 This device may not cause harmful inter- Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
ference. driver’s door only.
 This device must accept any interference Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
received, including interference that may button one more time to unlock all the doors
cause undesired operation. and liftgate.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. 5
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
CAUTION
The front side-marker and parking lights will
 Changes or modifications not expressly
1- LOCK ( ) button also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button “Welcome light” on page 5-127.
ate the equipment. 3- PANIC button
4- Indicator light NOTE
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Keyless entry system (if so set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
equipped) To lock the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.

Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
N00509001988 function” on page 5-8.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
Press the remote control transmitter buttons doors and the liftgate.
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will also blink once.
It can also help you signal for attention by Answerback function
setting off the panic alarm.
NOTE The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the entry system answerback function can be
horn will sound once. changed as required. This is done with the
key removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
 The answerback function will not operate if
any of the doors are open.

Horn deactivation/reactivation Turn signal lights deactiva- Setting the door and liftgate
tion/reactivation unlock function
The answerback function can be set in the N00543601128
following three ways. The answerback function can be turned ON The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Each time the answerback function is set, a or OFF separately. set to the following two conditions.
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
the answerback function. 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
5 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
One The horn will not sound. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
function.
chime: the “OFF” position.
Two The horn will sound. 3. Press and hold the UNLOCK button (2)
Number
chimes: for 4 to 10 seconds and then press and Condition
of chimes
Four The horn will sound if the LOCK hold the LOCK button (1) during this
chimes: button is pressed twice within 1 time. All doors and the liftgate
One chime
second. 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK unlock
button in step 3, release the UNLOCK Two
button first, and then release the LOCK Driver’s door unlock only
chimes
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. button.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to Number of 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
To lock To unlock 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
the “OFF” position. chimes
3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4 bination headlights and dimmer switch to
One chime One flash Two flashes the “OFF” position.
to 10 seconds and then press and hold the
UNLOCK button (2) during this time. Two chimes One flash No flash 3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4
4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the Three chimes No flash Two flashes to 10 seconds and then press and hold the
UNLOCK button in step 3, release the UNLOCK button (2) during this time.
Four chimes Two flashes One flash 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the
UNLOCK button first, and then release
the LOCK button. Five chimes No flash One flash UNLOCK button in step 3, release the
Six chimes Two flashes No flash LOCK button first, and then release the
UNLOCK button.
Seven
No flash No flash
chimes


(already registered) remote control transmit-
Using the panic alarm Additional remote control ter by doing the following:
N00543701073
transmitters
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- N00543900049 1. Have available all (current and new)
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- To add a remote control transmitter, you must remote control transmitters you wish to
tion as follows: already have 1 registered remote control register.
transmitter. 2. With a valid (already registered) remote
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than control transmitter, press and hold the
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
1 second.
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. 5
2. The headlights will blink on and off and Then press and hold the LOCK button (1)
dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
the horn will sound intermittently for during this time.
self, follow the “Customer remote control
about 3 minutes. 3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
transmitter programming” procedure below.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on button, release the LOCK button first, and
If you choose to have your authorized
the remote control transmitter. then release the UNLOCK button.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and any remaining At this time, ID codes for all remote con-
Replacement remote control keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors trol transmitters except for the transmitter
used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the
transmitters dealer.
answerback function (door is locked and
N00543800051
unlocked) informs you that the registra-
Only remote control transmitters pro- NOTE tion mode has been activated.
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can  You are provided with 2 remote control 4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate. transmitters, but you may register up to 8
the following ID code registration opera-
remote control transmitters.
tion using the next remote control trans-
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you mitter you wish to register within 4
can order a remote control transmitter from seconds.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by Customer remote control trans- i) Press and hold both the LOCK and
referring to the key number. mitter programming (Except UNLOCK buttons for 2 seconds.
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
remote control transmitter must be changed. for vehicles sold in Canada) ii) Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons simultaneously for 1 second.
Take your vehicle and all remote control N00544001187
iii) Press the UNLOCK button. The
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi You can program new remote control trans-
answerback function informs you that the
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. mitters to the system if you have one valid
ID code registration of the transmitter is
completed.

5. To register the ID codes of additional Operation is subject to the following two con-
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4
NOTE ditions.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
within 60 seconds after step 4.
or unlocked.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
6. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
• The panic alarm cannot be operated. ference.
mitter is registered within 60 seconds
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not  This device must accept any interference
after step 4, the registration mode is can-
come on. received, including interference that may
celed and the normal mode returns.
 If you lose your remote control transmitter, cause undesired operation.
5 please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
NOTE Motors dealer for a replacement.
 For verification purposes, try to lock and  If you wish to obtain an additional remote CAUTION
unlock the doors with the re-coded remote control transmitter, please contact an autho-  Changes or modifications not expressly
control transmitters after the registration is rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum approved by the manufacturer for compli-
completed. of 8 remote control transmitters can be pro- ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
grammed for your vehicle. ate the equipment.
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
button is pressed.  To use the new remote control transmitters,
it is necessary to register the key with both
 The keyless entry system does not work if
the electronic immobilizer and keyless entry
the key is in the ignition switch.
system.
Procedure for replacing the
 The remote control transmitter can be used
from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However,
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti- remote control transmitter bat-
this distance may change if your vehicle is
theft starting system): Customer key pro- tery
gramming” on page 5-6.
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- N00544101162
tion, or a radio station. 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when General information electricity from your body by touching a
all doors and the liftgate are locked and no N00546101137 metal grounded object.
doors or the liftgate are opened within about 2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote
30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communica- control transmitter.
automatically re-lock.
 If the following conditions are observed after tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
ton on the remote control transmitter, the (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
battery in the remote control transmitter may complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and
need to be replaced. Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s).

NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the + side
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
open the remote control transmitter case, the - side
buttons may come out.
 The Federal Communications Commission Coin type
(FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
number and the model number (radio certifi-
battery 5
CR1620
cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
tion.
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, 6. Close the remote control transmitter case
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade firmly.
screwdriver into the notch in the remote 7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
control transmitter case and use it to open 8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
the case. it works.
NOTE
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
4. Remove the old battery.  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) replace the battery for you if you prefer.
up.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Free-hand Advanced Secu- WARNING WARNING

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-
 Individuals using other electro-medical
apparatus besides implantable pacemak-
key) (if so equipped) defibrillators should keep away from the ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-
N00503100111 external and internal transmitters. The brillators should check with the
electromagnetic waves used in the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of the effect of the electromagnetic waves
5 ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine
implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators.
used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
netic waves may affect the operations of
to be started and the operation mode to be the electro-medical apparatus.
changed simply by carrying it.
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
remote control transmitter of the keyless key can be modified as stated below.
entry system. (Keyless entry operations are possible.)
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security For details, contact an authorized
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
system” on page 5-25. • Enabling only the locking and unlocking
of the doors and the liftgate
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the • Enabling only the starting of the engine
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
vehicle operations such as locking and
unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
NOTE
starting the engine, and changing the
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
waves.
cle, make sure you are carrying the A- External transmitter In cases such as the following, operation
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle. B- Internal transmitter may be improper or unstable.
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
station or an airport

NOTE Operating range of the NOTE

• The key is carried together with other com- F.A.S.T.-key  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
munication devices such as cellular phones N00503201207
down or there are strong electromagnetic
or radios, or electrical appliances such as waves or noise in the area, the operating
computers When a person enters the operating range of range could decrease or operations could
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- become unstable.
metal object key and presses the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate
• A keyless entry system is being used
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch,
5
nearby Operating range for locking and
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down verification of the ID code is performed. unlocking the doors and the lift-
• The vehicle is in a location with strong The doors and the liftgate can only be locked
electromagnetic waves or noise and unlocked, the engine can only be started
gate
Use the emergency key in such circum- and the operation mode can only be changed
stances. when the ID codes of the vehicle and The operating range is within about 2.3 feet
Refer to “To operate without using the F.A.S.T.-key match. (70 cm) of the driver’s and front passenger’s
F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-23. door lock/unlock switches, the liftgate LOCK
 The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing switch and the liftgate OPEN switch.
reception operations in its communication
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions.
 Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
ing reception operations, the reception of
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
the running down of the battery. Do not place
near to electrical appliances such as televi-
sions or computers.
*: Front of the vehicle
: Operating range

NOTE To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

 Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the key
F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked. N00503401296
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
key is too close to the windshield, door win-
dows or liftgate.
To lock
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
5 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or front passen- While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate driver’s or front passenger’s door
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch, lock/unlock switch (A), or the liftgate LOCK
the system may not operate if the key is close switch (B) within the operating range to lock
to the ground or in a high position. *: Front of the vehicle
all the doors and the liftgate.
 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating : Operating range
The turn signal lights will blink once and the
range, even a person not carrying the
buzzer will sound once.
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors
or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s or NOTE Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat- locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-28, 5-30 and
the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate ing range, it may not be possible to start the
OPEN switch. 5-32 respectively.
engine and change the operation mode if the
key is in a storage space such as the glove
compartment, on top of the instrument panel, Driver’s and front passenger’s door
Operating range for starting the or in the door pocket or luggage compart- lock/unlock switches
engine and changing the opera- ment.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
tion mode it may not be possible to start the engine and
N00503300067
change the operation mode if the key is too
The operating range is the interior of the close to a door or door window.
vehicle.

Liftgate switches NOTE Driver’s door lock/unlock switch

 The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
To unlock
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the

5
operating range, you can unlock the doors
and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
NOTE The turn signal lights will blink twice and the NOTE
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- buzzer will sound twice.  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically retract when all doors and lift- Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door automatically extend when the driver’s door
gate are locked using the driver’s or front locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-28, 5-30 and is unlocked using the driver’s lock/unlock
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (A) or 5-32 respectively. switch (A), front passenger’s door
the liftgate LOCK switch (B). lock/unlock switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch switch (C).
key does not operate. (A) to unlock only the driver’s door.  Settings can be changed so that all doors and
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s the liftgate are unlocked automatically by
compartment pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
door lock/unlock switch one more time to
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar once.
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
function” on page 5-26.
 The liftgate OPEN switch (C) can be used to
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly.
Press the liftgate OPEN switch within about Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock
3 seconds of locking.
switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN switch (C) to
 If the liftgate OPEN switch is pressed 3 sec-
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked.

Front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch NOTE Operation of the outside rear-
 The amount of time after unlocking until the view mirrors (Vehicles
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi equipped with the mirror
Motors dealer for details. retractor switch)
 The doors and the liftgate cannot be N00585700030
unlocked by using the liftgate OPEN switch
5 for about 3 seconds after locking.
 The time within which locking confirmation
To retract
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- liftgate using the LOCK switch, press the
Liftgate OPEN switch key does not operate. LOCK switch twice rapidly to retract the out-
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar side rearview mirrors.
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
 Functions settings can be modified as stated To extend
below.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details. Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and
• Activating the operation confirmation func- liftgate using the UNLOCK switch, press the
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only UNLOCK switch twice rapidly to return the
during locking, or only during unlocking. outside rearview mirrors to their extended
• Deactivating the operation confirmation positions.
function (blinking of the turn signal lights)
NOTE and buzzer. The outside rearview mirrors are not initially
 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked • Modifying the number of blinks in the set to work as described above. If you want
using the driver’s or front passenger’s door operation confirmation function (blinking them to work as described above, you need to
lock/unlock switch when all doors and the of the turn signal lights). set them so that they do not retract/extend
liftgate are locked and no doors or the lift- • Making the buzzer sound when the when the doors and liftgate are
gate are opened within about 30 seconds, the F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger locked/unlocked using the F.A.S.T.-key or the
doors and the liftgate will automatically re- compartment when all the doors and the
lock. keyless entry system of the F.A.S.T.-key.
liftgate are closed. For details, please consult an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.


cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever
NOTE CAUTION is in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-  The indicator light (A) will flash orange
position.
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will when there is a problem or malfunction in
automatically retract or extend when all the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.
doors and liftgate are locked or unlocked Never drive if the indicator light on the ACC
using the remote control transmitter buttons engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
or the F.A.S.T.-key. ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi Allows operation of electrical accessories.
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
Refer to “Features and controls: Outside
rearview mirrors” on page 5-44.
Motors dealer.
 If the engine switch operation is not smooth minates orange. 5
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
switch. ON
Engine switch Immediately contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. All electrical accessories can be used.
N00513500075
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys
minates green.
other than those registered in advance can be NOTE The indicator light turns off when the engine
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-  When operating the engine switch, press the is running.
lizer function) switch all the way in. If the switch is not
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
switch can be used to start the engine. operation mode may not change. If the NOTE
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
need to hold the engine switch down. immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
Operation mode of the engine starting system)” on page 5-23)
switch and its function
OFF Changing the operation mode

N00568000025
The indicator light on the engine switch turns If you press the engine switch without press-
off. ing the brake pedal {continuously variable
On vehicles equipped with continuously vari- transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal
able transmission (CVT), the operation mode

(manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, you can change the operation mode
CAUTION Warning activation
 The operation mode cannot be changed from N00503500173
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-
through buzzers and displays on the informa-
ating range for starting the engine and
tion screen in the multi-information display
changing the operation mode” on page 5-14.
in order to prevent mistaken operations or
vehicle theft.
5 ACC power auto-cutout function When a warning operates, be sure to check
N00568101036
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed also displayed if there is a problem in the
with the operation mode in ACC, the function F.A.S.T.-key.
automatically cuts out the power for the audio
system and other electric devices that can be If the following warning displays, contact an
operated with that mode. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
When the engine switch is pressed while the
CAUTION operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup- There is a problem in the
 When the engine is not running, put the oper- plied again to those devices. F.A.S.T.-key
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when Put the operation mode in OFF
the engine is not running may cause the bat- NOTE and then start the engine again.
tery to be discharged, making it impossible  It is possible to modify functions as follows: If the warning is not cancelled,
to start the engine. • The time until the power cuts out can be there is a fault in the electronic
 When the battery is disconnected, the current changed to approximately 60 minutes. immobilizer (Anti-theft start-
operation mode is memorized. After recon- • The ACC power auto-cutout function can ing system).
necting the battery, the memorized mode is be deactivated.
Please contact an authorized
selected automatically. Before disconnect- For details, we recommend you to consult an
ing the battery for repair or replacement, Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
Be careful if you are not sure which opera- If the following warnings display, the display
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery goes off if the correct action is taken.
is run down.
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the
vehicle cannot be verified


Someone may be carrying a F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key with a different system  The warning may display even if the
ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key N00559801183 F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
may not be within the operat- starting the engine and changing the opera-
ing range tion mode. The surrounding environment or
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-out electromagnetic waves may make it impossi-
ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
monitoring system” on page
5-19.
and vehicle.
5
The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key When the operation mode in any mode other Key lock-in prevention system
is run down than OFF, if the door(s) are opened, the N00559900116
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger

 A door or the liftgate cannot be locked compartment, and then the door(s) are closed,
even when the driver’s or front passen- the warning display is displayed and the
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the lift- buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning since it’s
gate LOCK switch is pressed. impossible to verify the ID codes of the
F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
When the operation mode is in OFF, the
Refer to “Key lock-in preven- F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart-
tion system” on page 5-19. NOTE ment, all the doors and the liftgate are closed,
 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
and someone tries to lock the vehicle by
Refer to “Door ajar prevention does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is
pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
system” on page 5-20. removed through a window without opening
a door. door lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate
Refer to “Operation mode OFF This setting can be changed. LOCK switch, the warning display is dis-
reminder system” on page See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer played and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec-
5-20. for details. onds as a warning, and the doors and the
liftgate cannot be locked.


gate LOCK switch, the warning display is The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
Door ajar prevention system
displayed and the buzzer sounds for about 3 ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
N00560000117
seconds as a warning, and the doors and the temperature display starts to move. Refer
liftgate cannot be locked. to “Interrupt display screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-95.
Starting and stopping the
engine
5 N00514601360
WARNING
When the operation mode is in OFF, and  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing ventilated area any longer than is needed
the driver’s or front passenger’s door Tips for starting to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate LOCK bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
 The operation mode can be in any mode
switch while one of the doors or the liftgate is extremely poisonous, could build up and
to start the engine. cause serious injury or death.
not fully closed, the warning display is dis-  The starter motor will be turning for up to
played and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec- approximately 15 seconds if the engine
onds as a warning, and the doors and the switch is released at once. Pressing the
liftgate cannot be locked. CAUTION
engine switch again while the starter
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
motor is still turning will stop the starter
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
Operation mode OFF reminder motor. The starter motor will be turning at high speeds until the engine has had a
system for up to approximately 30 seconds while chance to warm up.
N00560100118 the engine switch is pressed.
If the engine does not start, wait for a
while and then attempt to start the engine Starting the engine
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
motor still turning will damage the starter
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
mechanism.
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
When the operation mode is in any mode a system that automatically controls fuel
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
other than OFF, all the doors and the liftgate injection. There is usually no need to depress
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
are closed, and someone tries to lock the the accelerator pedal when starting the
for instructions.
vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front pas- engine.
 A longer warm up period will only con-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the lift- sume extra fuel.

To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
between attempts to restart the engine.
NOTE uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
1. Make sure all occupants are properly variable transmission (CVT), the engine can
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
seated with seat belts fastened. only be started when the selector lever is in
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- there, then crank the engine. Release the
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. accelerator pedal, immediately after the
tion.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down For safety reasons, the engine should be engine starts.
firmly with your right foot. 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels could be flooded with too much gasoline.
5
NOTE lock. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
 After the engine has not started for a while, or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),
the brake pedal effort needed to start the push the accelerator pedal all the way
engine may become greater. If this occurs, 6. Press the engine switch.
7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- down and hold it there, then press the
depress the brake pedal more firmly than
ing displays are functioning properly. engine switch to crank the engine. If the
usual.
engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,
push the engine switch to stop cranking
4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way NOTE the engine, and release the accelerator
down (manual transaxle).  Minor noises may be heard on engine start- pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.
5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- up. These will disappear as the engine warms Wait a few seconds, and then press the
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” up. engine switch to crank the engine again
(Neutral) position. while depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
On vehicles equipped with continuously When the engine is hard to start or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but
variable transmission (CVT), make sure do not push the accelerator pedal. If the
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) After several attempts, you may experience
engine fails to start, repeat these proce-
position. that the engine still does not start.
dures. If the engine still will not start, con-
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear or a repair facility of your choice for
window defogger, are turned off. assistance.
Startability of continuously variable trans-

mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient
temperature of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower


When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
NOTE If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-
from a standstill even with the selector lever  If you have to bring the engine to an emer- ing properly
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) N00568301067
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
position. it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot in the
This phenomenon occurs because the trans- stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. glove box. Starting the engine and changing
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does  On vehicles equipped with continuously the operation mode should be now possible.
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
5 the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the
engine with the selector lever in any position after starting the engine or changing the oper-
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the ation mode.
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be engine is stopped with the selector lever in
able to start normally. any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up tion, the operation mode will go to ACC
rather than OFF.
operation.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
Stopping the engine tion.
N00568200014
WARNING 1. Stop the vehicle.

 Do not operate the engine switch while
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency. If the depressing the brake pedal.
engine is stopped while driving, the brake 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,
servomechanism will cease to function and press the engine switch to stop the engine,
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, and then move the gearshift lever to the NOTE
the power steering system will not func- 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a  Do not insert into the key slot anything other
tion and it will require greater manual downhill) position. than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
effort to operate the steering. This could On vehicles equipped with continuously age or a malfunction.
result in a serious accident. variable transmission (CVT), move the  Remove the object or additional key from the
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
and then press the engine switch to stop
receive the registered ID code from the regis-
the engine. tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
and the operation mode may not change.


vehicle has run down, the emergency key can
NOTE be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door.
 The F.A.S.T.-key is fixed in the key slot
when inserted in the illustrated direction. To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
Simply pull out the key to remove it from the lock knob (B) and remove it from the
key slot.
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
5
1- Insert or remove the emergency key

2- Lock
3- Unlock
If the operation mode is in OFF and the

driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
theft starting system)
warning display and the buzzer buzzing for
approximately 3 seconds to remind you to NOTE N00529600055
remove the key.  Only use the emergency key in an emer- The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
has run down, replace the battery as soon as theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
To operate without using the possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
F.A.S.T.-key  After using the emergency key, be sure to attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
N00514800017
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
Emergency key Locking and unlocking the driver’s door lizer system.
N00515200106 All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
Turn the emergency key toward the front of cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- the vehicle to lock the door. After checking electronics.
key. that the door is locked, turn the emergency
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such key back to the center and remove it.
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the


3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE slot.
N00561000042  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
used to start the vehicle. cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
5 F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle ming (Except for vehicles sold in
and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho- Canada)
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID N00561201184
codes reprogrammed.
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
system if you have two valid (already regis- and hold the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis- seconds and then press and hold the
N00561100014 tered) F.A.S.T.-key. LOCK button during this time.
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have 5. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
button in step 4, release the LOCK button
ter the ID code to the vehicle. procedures below.
first, and then release the UNLOCK but-
Registering the ID code can be done by your ton. (Perform the following procedure
1. Open the driver’s door.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it within 30 seconds.)
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
NOTE
sold in Canada). and hold the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10
 Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- seconds and then press and hold the
key programming is finished. Do not open or
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- close other doors. LOCK button during this time.
ming” procedure below. 7. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
If you choose to have your authorized button in step 6, release the LOCK button
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.- first, and then release the UNLOCK but-
code, take your vehicle and all remaining key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per- ton. The immobilizer display on the infor-
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi form the following procedure within 30 mation screen in the multi-information
Motors dealer. seconds.) display will blink.

NOTE NOTE
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
the immobilizer display goes off during the tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
procedure. automatically retract or extend when the
doors and the liftgate are locked or unlocked
When registration of ID code is complete, using the remote control transmitter buttons.
Keyless entry system Refer to “Features and controls: Outside
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
rearview mirrors” on page 5-44.
5
N00515501252
immobilizer display will come on for 30
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
seconds.
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
It can also help you signal for attention by To lock
setting off the panic alarm.
will sound for 3 seconds.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
NOTE doors and the liftgate.
 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi- The turn signal lights will also blink once.
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
before the immobilizer display starts blink- NOTE
ing.
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- automatically retract when the LOCK button
key, repeat the process from step 1 after (1) is pressed.
the operation mode is put in OFF.  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
horn will sound once.
NOTE 1- LOCK ( ) button

 The immobilizer display will go off immedi- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.
To unlock
3- PANIC button
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis- 4- Operation indicator light
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
play screen may prevent you from seeing the driver’s door only.
immobilizer display. To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press the
UNLOCK button two times within a 2 second
time period.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. Two The horn will sound. 4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. chimes: button in step 3, release the UNLOCK
The front side-marker and parking lights will Four The horn will sound if the LOCK button first, and then release the LOCK
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to chimes: button is pressed twice within 1 sec- button.
“Welcome light” on page 5-127. ond.
Number of
To lock To unlock
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. chimes
NOTE 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- One chime One flash Two flashes
5  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
the “OFF” position. Two chimes One flash No flash
automatically extend when the UNLOCK
3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4 Three chimes No flash Two flashes
button (2) is pressed.
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be to 10 seconds and then press and hold the Four chimes Two flashes One flash
set so that all doors and the liftgate unlock UNLOCK button (2) during this time.
4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the Five chimes No flash One flash
when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed
once. UNLOCK button in step 3, release the Six chimes Two flashes No flash
Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock UNLOCK button first, and then release Seven
function” on page 5-26. the LOCK button. No flash No flash
chimes
Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-

Answerback function tion Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
The answerback function from the turn signal The buzzer answerback function can be
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
lights can be turned ON or OFF separately. turned ON or OFF as required.
entry system answerback function can be
changed as required.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. Setting the door and liftgate
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- unlock function
Horn deactivation/reactivation
bination headlights and dimmer switch to N00544601109
The answerback function can be set in the the “OFF” position.
3. Press and hold the UNLOCK button (2) The door and liftgate unlock function can be
following three ways. set to the following two conditions.
for 4 to 10 seconds and then press and
hold the LOCK button (1) during this Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
One The horn will not sound.
time. tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
chime:


condition of the door and liftgate unlock 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
function. the horn will sound intermittently for
NOTE
 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
about 3 minutes.
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Number 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
Condition Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
of chimes the remote control transmitter. key can be programmed for your vehicle.
All doors and the liftgate  To use the new remote control transmitters,
One chime
unlock NOTE it is necessary to register the key with the
Two
Driver’s door unlock only
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tem.
5
chimes button is pressed.
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro-
feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. gramming” on page 5-24.
may change if your vehicle is near a TV
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- transmitting tower, a power station, or a
bination headlights and dimmer switch to radio station. General information
the “OFF” position.  If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when N00562001088
3. Press and hold the LOCK button (1) for 4 all doors and the liftgate are locked and no
to 10 seconds and then press and hold the doors or the liftgate are opened within about Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-
UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will quency subject to Federal Communications
4. Within 10 seconds of pressing the automatically re-lock. Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
UNLOCK button in step 3, release the  If the following conditions are observed after in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
LOCK button first, and then release the pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
UNLOCK button.
ton on the remote control transmitter, the plies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
replaced. Operation is subject to the following two con-
Using the panic alarm • The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked ditions.
N00544701083 or unlocked. •This device may not cause harmful inter-
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- • The panic alarm cannot be operated. ference.
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten- • The indicator light (4) is dim or does not •This device must accept any interference
come on.
tion as follows: received, including interference that may
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
cause undesired operation.
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
1 second. replacement.

Door locks
CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly  Be sure to perform the procedure with the  When the remote control transmitter case is
approved by the manufacturer for compli- Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
ate the equipment. open the case, the transmitter may come out. nents.
3. Remove the old battery.

5 Procedure for replacing the 4. Install a new battery with the + side (A) Door locks
remote control transmitter bat- up. N00509200488
tery + side WARNING

N00562100066
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static locked while driving.
electricity from your body by touching a • Locked doors, in combination with the
metal grounded object. - side
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, of ejection in an accident.
insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade • Locked doors can help keep passengers,
Coin type
screwdriver into the notch in the case and battery especially small children, from opening
use it to open the case. CR2032 doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
5. Close the case firmly. you slow or come to a stop.
6. Check the keyless entry system to see that  Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
it works. Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
NOTE overcome by heat and suffer serious
 You may purchase a replacement battery at injury or death due to heat stroke.
an electric appliance store.  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
replace the battery for you if you prefer. dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

Door locks
WARNING NOTE
 When closing a door, make sure that the  When locking or unlocking with the key,
door is fully closed and the door-ajar only the driver’s door will be locked or
warning display goes out on the informa- unlocked.
tion screen on the multi-information dis- To lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate,
play. If the door is ajar it could open while use the power door lock switches, the key-
driving and cause an accident. less entry system or the F.A.S.T-key opera-
tion.
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-30,
5
To lock and unlock with the key “Keyless entry system” on pages 5-7 and
(driver’s door) 5-25, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-14. 1- Lock
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, 2- Unlock
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
to lock the door. After checking that the door using the emergency key.
is locked, turn the key back to the center and The driver’s door can be unlocked without
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-23.
remove it. using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
To lock or unlock the door from
the inside To lock the door without using
the key
Move the lock knob to the lock position to 1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
lock the door. position.
All doors should be kept locked while driv- 2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
ing. cle. Close the door.
1- Insert or remove the key

2- Lock
3- Unlock

Power door locks

ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will The warning display will be displayed on the
sound intermittently to remind you to remove information screen in the multi-information
the key. display.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.
Power door locks
N00509300551
5 Lock out protection NOTE

N00517300042  When locking or unlocking with the key on
If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper- the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
lock or unlock.
ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
 Repeated continuous operation between lock
when you push the lock knob forward with
and unlock could activate the power door
Key reminder system (except the driver’s door or passenger’s door open, locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
for vehicles equipped with the the lock knob will automatically return to the and prevent the system from operating. If
unlocked position.
F.A.S.T.-key) this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the power door lock switch.
N00549600224
Type 1 Operation mode ON reminder

system (vehicles equipped with
the F.A.S.T.-key)
N00503800105
Type 2
If the driver’s door is opened while the

engine is stopped and the operation mode is
in any position other than OFF, the operation
If the ignition switch is turned off and the mode ON buzzer will sound intermittently to
driver’s door is opened with the key in the remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.

Child safety locks for rear door
To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors and liftgate
and liftgate N00563401122
You can select the functions to unlock the

doors and liftgate either using the ignition
Using the power door lock switch switch or the engine switch, or using the
selector lever position {continuously vari-
able transmission (CVT)}.
These functions are not activated when the
5
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Child safety locks for rear
door
Using the ignition switch or the N00509400262
engine switch
1- Lock
2- Unlock All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked
or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or the front passenger Using the selector lever position
door. {continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)}
1- To lock
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
2- To release
the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)
position with the ignition switch or the opera-
tion mode in ON.

Liftgate
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
gers, especially children, from opening the Liftgate WARNING
 When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the
rear door using the inside door handle. N00510101295
effort required to open or close the liftgate
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
vided on each rear door.
WARNING may be greater or less than expected. The
 The luggage compartment was not liftgate may also open or close more
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the quickly.
designed for people to ride in it. Do not let
rear door cannot be opened using the inside passengers ride in or let children play in
door handle.
5 To open the rear door when the child safety
the luggage compartment. Riding or play-
ing in the luggage compartment could CAUTION
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- result in a serious accident or injury.  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
side door handle.  Before driving, be sure that the liftgate is loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
When the lever is in the release position (2), securely closed. It is dangerous to drive the exhaust could lead to burns.
the child safety lock is released and the rear with the liftgate open since carbon monox-  To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure
door can be opened using the inside door han- ide (CO) gas contained in engine exhaust the area above and behind the liftgate is clear
dle. gases can enter the passenger compart- before opening it.
ment.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
WARNING cause unconsciousness and even death. NOTE
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and In addition, if the liftgate opens while  Locking and unlocking the doors by using
locked when driving. An unlocked door driving, luggage could fall onto the road power door locks (driver and front passenger
may be accidentally opened by a passen- and cause an accident. side), keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
ger, especially by a child who could fall  When opening and closing the liftgate, key operation (vehicles equipped with the
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there make sure that there are no people nearby F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift-
is a greater risk of someone being thrown and that there is sufficient space behind gate.
from the vehicle in an accident. and above the vehicle. In addition, be
careful not to hit your head or pinch your
hands, neck, etc.
 If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift-
gate, remove it before opening the liftgate.
Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close
due to the weight of the snow or ice.
 When opening the liftgate, always fully
open it. A partially opened liftgate can
unexpectedly close due to its own weight.

Inside liftgate release
To open NOTE NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-  Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations
After unlocking, press the liftgate OPEN tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will illustrated in order to support the liftgate.
switch (A) and raise the liftgate. automatically extend when the liftgate and
all doors are unlocked using the liftgate
OPEN switch (A).
To close 5
Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus-
trated and release it before the liftgate closes
completely. Gently slam the liftgate from the Please observe the following in order to pre-
vent damage or faulty operation:
outside so that it is completely closed.
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
when closing the liftgate.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
NOTE • Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
 The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.
raised immediately after pressing the liftgate
OPEN switch.
If this happens, press the liftgate OPEN
switch again and raise the liftgate. Inside liftgate release
 The liftgate cannot be opened when the bat- N00523101097
tery is discharged or disconnected.
The inside liftgate release is designed to pro-
The liftgate must then be opened using the
vide a way to open the liftgate if the battery is
inside liftgate release.
dead or disconnected.
 When the battery is reconnected, all doors CAUTION The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is
and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them  To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
before trying to open the liftgate. mounted on the liftgate.
attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (A).

Theft-alarm system
CAUTION
 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
Armed stage
5
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.
You and your family should familiarize your- 3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the
selves with the location and operation of the
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the
liftgate release lever.
WARNING ignition switch.
 Always keep the release lever lid on the For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
To open liftgate closed when driving so that your key, put the operation mode in OFF.
luggage cannot accidentally bump the 2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate. lever and open the liftgate. 3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key operation.
Theft-alarm system Arm the system and leave
N00510201283
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
armed” stage. If triggered, the system
provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate. nals.

Theft-alarm system
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
NOTE Type of alarm
on the audio panel flashes for confirma-
 The system will be disarmed if, while the
tion.
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol- When the alarm is activated:
lowing operation is performed.
• Except for vehicles equipped with the 1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned utes.
to the “ON” position. After 3 minutes the headlights automati-
• For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
cally shut off. 5
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3
 The system will not be armed if a door, the minutes.
liftgate or the engine hood is not completely
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as
described above. Horn sounds!
 The theft-alarm system can be activated Headlights blink on and off!
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
4. The system has entered the armed stage
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes system to the system armed mode while peo-
slower. ple are riding in the vehicle.
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
flash while the system is in the armed
stage. Alarm stage
NOTE The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-

 If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and NOTE
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can- the system is armed.  The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
not enter the armed stage. utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
The system enters the armed stage about 20  One of the doors and the liftgate is opened automatically shut off to save battery power.
seconds after the engine hood is closed. without using the keyless entry system or The system will then be rearmed until the
 The system will be disarmed if, while the the F.A.S.T.-key operation. proper disarming step is taken.
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all  The engine hood is opened.  The alarm will resume if unauthorized
doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key stopped.
operation.

Theft-alarm system
NOTE Disarmed stage NOTE

 While the alarm is operating, a warning is  The amount of time after unlocking until the
displayed on the information screen in the The system will be disarmed if the following vehicle relocks automatically can be
multi-information display. adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
operation is performed.
Motors dealer for details.
Type 1  Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
 Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
5 turned to the “ON” position.
ing procedure.
 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON. Testing the theft-alarm system
 All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by
Type 2 using the keyless entry system or the Use the following procedure to test the sys-
F.A.S.T.-key operation. tem:
Disarm...by the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation 1. Lower the driver’s window.
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
stage”.
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
Alarm deactivation comes on and flashes for approximately
20 seconds.
The alarm can be deactivated in the following 4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the
ways. driver’s side door by using the inside door
lock knob and open the door.
 By using the keyless entry system or the 5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermit-
F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock tently and the headlights blink when a
the doors and the liftgate. NOTE door is opened.
 Except for vehicles equipped with the  If the UNLOCK button on the remote control 6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
transmitter, or the driver’s or front passen- and the liftgate by using the keyless entry
F.A.S.T.-key, by turning the ignition
ger’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed
switch to the “ON” position. system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
when all doors and the liftgate are closed and
 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- no door is opened within approximately 30
key, by putting the operation mode in ON. seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.

Power window control
Power window control WARNING

N00510800370  Never leave the vehicle without carrying
the key.
 Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
Main switch
N00548700097
5
The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all the windows.
1- Driver’s door window switch
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
2- Front passenger door window switch
ing the corresponding switch.
3- Left rear door window switch
1- Open (down) Press the switch down to open the window,
4- Right rear door window switch
2- Close (up) and pull up the switch to close it.
5- Lock switch
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
NOTE window automatically opens/closes com-
 Never try to operate the main switch and pletely.
sub-switch in different directions at the same If you want to stop the window movement,
time. This will freeze the window in posi- operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion. tion.
 Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
Sub switch the front passenger’s door is opened, the
WARNING
N00548800098  Before driving with a child in the vehicle,
power windows cannot be operated.
be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with
Lock switch the switch could easily trap their hands or
N00549000130 heads in the window.
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
5 senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main Safety mechanism (Driver’s
switch will open or close only the driver’s door window only)
door window. To unlock the switch, press it N00528801132
again.
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the
1- Close door window is automatically lowered a little.
2- Open After the door window is lowered, pull up the
switch again to close the door window.
Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-
senger door window, unless the driver’s win- WARNING
dow lock switch is activated.  If the battery terminals are disconnected
or the fuse for power window is replaced,
the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
NOTE If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
 The rear door windows open only half-way. injury could result.
1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock CAUTION
N00548900132  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the door window closes. This allows
The power windows can be run up or down
the door window to close completely. There-
when the ignition switch or the operation
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
mode is in ON. trapped in the door window opening.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is

Sunshade (if so equipped)
CAUTION What to do if you hear wind CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while buffeting when driving  Do not place heavy luggage on the pan-
the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- N00551400043
oramic glass roof. Doing so could damage
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in the glass roof.
the door window opening. Wind buffeting can be described as the per-  Do not hang heavy luggage from, allow a
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head ception of pressure on the ears or a booming person to hang onto, or apply any other
in order to activate the safety mechanism. or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit strong force to the opening of the sunshade
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result. rear door windows down or partially opened.
receptacle or the parts between the ceiling
and the sunshade opening on either side.
5
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini- Doing so could damage the sunshade.
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
NOTE door windows open, open the front door win-
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the dows as well as the rear door windows to NOTE
driving conditions or other circumstances minimize the condition.  Release the switch when the sunshade has
cause the door window to be subjected to a reached a completely open or completely
physical shock similar to that caused by closed position.
trapped hand or head. Sunshade (if so equipped)  If the sunshade does not operate when the
 If the battery terminals are disconnected or N00511000614 sunshade switch is operated, release the
the fuse for the power window is replaced, switch and check whether something is
the safety mechanism will be cancelled and trapped by the sunshade. If nothing is
the door window will not automatically
WARNING trapped, have the sunshade checked at an
open/close completely.  Before operating the sunshade, make sure
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the that nothing can be trapped (head, hands,
 Operating the sunshade repeatedly with the
driver’s door window switch until the win- fingers, etc.).
engine turned off will run down the battery.
dow has been fully closed.  Never leave a child (or other person who is
Operate the sunshade only while the engine
Following this, release the switch, raise the incapable of safely operating the sunshade
is running.
switch once again and hold it in this condi- switch) alone in the vehicle.
 Close the sunshade when parking the vehicle
tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You  Do not bring your head, hand, finger, etc.
for a long time. Parking in the hot sun with
should now be able to operate the driver’s near the opening edge of the sunshade
the sunshade open will make the vehicle
door window in the normal fashion. receptacle while the vehicle is in motion.
inside extremely hot.
It may cause injury to your head, hand,
finger, etc. in the event of a sudden brak-
ing.

Parking brake
The sunshade can be opened and closed with To stop the moving sunshade, press the uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
the ignition switch or the operation mode in switch (1), (2) or (3). tion for vehicles equipped with a manual
ON. transaxle, set the selector lever to “P”
(PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a
Safety mechanism continuously variable transmission (CVT).
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing

sunshade opening, the safety mechanism will To apply
5 cause the sunshade to re-open automatically.
The opened sunshade will become opera-
tional again after a few seconds.
NOTE
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the sunshade to be subjected to a phys-
ical shock similar to that caused by a trapped
To open hand or head.
Press the switch (1), the sunshade opens. 1- Pull the lever up without pushing the but-
Press and hold the switch (1), the sunshade CAUTION ton at the end of hand grip.
automatically opens. Release the switch once  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head When the parking brake is set and the
the sunshade starts moving automatically. in order to activate the safety mechanism. ignition switch are in the “ON” position,
To stop the moving sunshade, press the Personal injury and malfunction of the sun- the brake warning light in the instrument
switch (1), (2) or (3). shade could result. cluster will come on.
Before driving, be sure to release the

To close
Parking brake parking brake.
N00511400373
Press the switch (2), the sunshade closes.
Press and hold the switch (2), the sunshade To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
automatically closes. Release the switch once plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
the sunshade starts moving automatically. and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
To deactivate CAUTION Steering wheel height and

 Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
reach adjustment
N00511500228
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully To adjust the steering wheel to the desired
released, the warning display will appear on position, move the lever upward or down-
the information screen in the multi-informa- ward while moving the steering wheel to the
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
desired level. 5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip.
3- Push the lever downward.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a A- Wheel lock
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. B- Release
WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lever is
secured in the locked (A) position.
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.

WARNING Type 1
 When releasing the lever (moving it to the
position (B)), be sure to hold the steering
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering
wheel may slip down too suddenly.

5 N00511601369
Type 2
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
Type 3 To adjust the mirror position

WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear- It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
view mirror while driving. This can be
left/right to adjust its position.
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.
To adjust the vertical mirror

position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down

to adjust its position.

To reduce the glare Type 3

When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of
Type 1
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi- 5
cles behind you during night driving.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the
reflection factor of the mirror is automatically
changed.
NOTE Normally, use the automatic mode. When the

 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity or the operation mode is put in ON, the green
could result. indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
1- Daytime position
factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
2- Night position
NOTE
Type 2  Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.

Outside rearview mirrors
NOTE WARNING To adjust the mirror position

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press  Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. N00549101170
the switch (3) and the indicator will go off. The objects you see in the mirror will look The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
To return to automatic mode, press the smaller and farther away than they when the ignition switch or the operation
switch again or perform the following opera- appear in a regular flat mirror. mode is in ON or ACC.
tion. Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis- Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free- tance of vehicles following you when
mirror you wish to adjust.
5 hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
changing lanes.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position Except for vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor
after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position. switch
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]
Put the operation mode in ON after putting
the operation mode in OFF.
Vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch

N00512200206
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment
WARNING R- Right outside mirror adjustment
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
dangerous.
tion.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
1-Up
2-Down
3-Right
4-Left
NOTE For vehicles equipped with the mirror CAUTION

 After adjusting, return the lever to the “•” retractor switch  It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors
(OFF) position (C). by hand. After retracting a mirror using the
Retracting and extending the mir- mirror retractor switch, however, you should
extend it by using the switch again, not by
rors using the mirror retractor hand. If you extended the mirror by hand
Retracting and extending the switch after retracting it using the switch, it would
mirrors
N00549201155
not properly lock in position. As a result, it
could move because of the wind or vibration
5
With the operation mode in ON or ACC, push
The outside mirror can be retracted towards while you are driving, taking away your rear-
the mirror retractor switch to retract the mir- ward visibility.
the side window to prevent damage when
rors. Push it again to extend the mirrors to
parking in tight locations.
their original positions.
Except for vehicles equipped with the After placing the operation mode in OFF, it is NOTE
mirror retractor switch possible to retract and extend the mirrors
 Be careful not to get your hands trapped
using the mirror retractor switch for about 30 while a mirror is moving.
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi- seconds.  If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
cle with your hand to retract it in.
after hitting a person or object, you may not
When extending the mirror, pull it out be able to return it to its original position
towards the front of the vehicle until it clicks using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-
to lock in place. pens, push the mirror retractor switch to
place the mirror in its retracted position and
then push the switch again to return the mir-
ror to its original position.
 When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as
this action can result in burn-out of the mir-
ror motor circuits.

Ignition switch
For information on operations for vehicles
Retracting and extending the mir- Door mirror heater equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rors without using the mirror N00549300191
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
retractor switch (automatic exten- When the rear window defogger switch is “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
sion function) pressed with the engine running, the outside (F.A.S.T.-key):
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Engine switch”on page 5-17.
Current will flow through the heater element
On vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or [Except for vehicles equipped with the
5 the mirrors automatically retract or extend
condensation. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
when the doors are locked or unlocked using
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while (F.A.S.T.-key)]
the remote control transmitter buttons or the
the defogger is on.
F.A.S.T-key.
The heater will be turned off automatically in
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-25
about 20 minutes.
or “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on
page 5-14.
NOTE
 Functions can be modified as stated below.
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
• Automatically extend when the operation
mode is put in ON with the driver’s door
closed, and automatically retract when the
operation mode is put in OFF with the
driver’s door opened. OFF
• Automatically extend when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 19 mph (30 The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
km/h). removed only when the switch is in this posi-
• Deactivate the automatic extension func-
Ignition switch
N00512400673
tion.
tion.
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]

Starting the engine
ACC ACC power auto-cutout func-

tion
Allows operation of electrical accessories N00539601114
with the engine off. After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the
ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the
ON function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position.
5
The engine runs and all accessories can be
When the ignition switch is turned from the
used.
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again
to those devices.
START CAUTION
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the
NOTE brake servomechanism will cease to function
Engages the starter. Release the key when the  It is possible to modify functions as follows: and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
engine starts.It will automatically back to the • The time until the power cuts out can be the power steering system will not function
“ON” position. changed to about 60 minutes. and it will require greater manual effort to
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can operate the steering.
NOTE be deactivated.  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running,
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
For details, we recommend you to consult an doing so will cause the battery to be dis-
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. charged.
which the transponder inside the key sends
must match the one registered to the immobi-  Do not turn the key to the “START” position
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo- when the engine is running, doing so could
bilizer” on page 5-23.) To remove the key damage the starter motor.
N00550900197
1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)

position {continuously variable transmis- Starting the engine
sion (CVT)}. N00512601832
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
remove it. Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]

Starting the engine

For information on operation for vehicles  A longer warm up period will only con- There is usually no need to depress the accel-
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up erator pedal when starting the engine.
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to enough for driving when the bar graph of The starter should not be run for more than 15
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter engine coolant temperature display starts seconds at a time.
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the to move. Refer to “Interrupt display To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
engine” on page 5-20. screen (With ignition switch or operation between attempts to restart the engine.
mode in ON)” on page 5-95.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
5 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter seated with seat belts fastened.
(F.A.S.T.-key)] WARNING 2. Insert the ignition key.
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
ventilated area any longer than is needed 4. Press and hold the brake pedal down
Tips for starting to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
firmly with your right foot.
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
 Do not operate the starter motor continu- extremely poisonous, could build up and
5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this cause serious injury or death. down (manual transaxle).
could run the battery down or damage the 6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
starter motor. If the engine does not start, axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF” CAUTION (Neutral) position.
position, wait a few seconds, and then try  Do not push-start the vehicle. On vehicles equipped with continuously
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive variable transmission (CVT), make sure
or starter motor still turning will damage at high speeds until the engine has had a the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
the starter mechanism. chance to warm up. position.
 If the engine will not start because the bat-  Release the ignition switch as soon as the
tery is weak or discharged, refer to engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor NOTE
will be damaged.  On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
for instructions. will not operate unless the selector lever is in
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
Starting the engine tion.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
This model is equipped with an electronically locked.
controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
tem that automatically controls fuel injection.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine This occurs because the transaxle has not
tion and make certain that all warning could be flooded with too much gasoline. warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a
lights are functioning properly before While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) problem. If this occurs, place the selector
starting the engine. or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” push the accelerator pedal all the way engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
position without pressing the accelerator down and hold it there, then crank the The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
pedal. Release the key when the engine engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni- able to start normally.
starts. tion switch to the “OFF” position and Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few operation.
5
NOTE seconds, and then crank the engine again
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the
up. These will disappear as the engine warms brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal
Manual transaxle (if so
up. (manual transaxle), but do not push the equipped)
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key N00512701194
if the engine starts. If the engine fails to

When the engine is hard to start start, repeat these procedures. If the The shift pattern below is shown on the gear-
engine still will not start, contact your shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair down while shifting gears.
After several attempts, you may experience
that the engine still does not start. facility of your choice for assistance.
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such Startability of automatic trans-
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
window defogger, are turned off.
axle vehicle and CVT vehicle with
2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin- ambient temperature of -22 °F (-30
uously variable transmission (CVT)} or °C) or lower
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30
there, then crank the engine. Release the °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
accelerator pedal, immediately after the from a standstill even with the selector lever
engine starts. in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
position.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Upshifting

 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-  To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the N00512901154
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, For the best fuel economy and performance in
up. This is normal and not harmful to the and then shift it into reverse.
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed
transaxle.  The gearshift indicator shows recommended
below.
gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
shows a “ ” when an upshift is recom- At low altitude locations, upshift as listed
5 To start mended, and it shows a “ ” when a down- below.
shift is recommended.
Press the clutch pedal all the way down and Shift point Upshift speeds
shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
gradually release the clutch pedal while
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
depressing the accelerator pedal.
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)
CAUTION 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)
 Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse
while the vehicle is moving forward; doing At high altitude locations, upshift as listed
so will damage the transaxle. below.
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal Proper shift points
because this will cause premature clutch N00537400052 Shift point Upshift speeds
wear or damage.
Always use care to change the gear with the 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
(illegal in many states).
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
because this can result in premature wear of and prolong engine life. 3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)
the transaxle shift forks. 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)
CAUTION
 Avoid downshifting that may cause the
NOTE tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the This puts the engine at risk of being dam-
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then aged.
be easier.

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

mode” on page 5-55.
Downshifting Maximum possible driving speed
N00513000096
It is recommended that you downshift to a Shift Maximum possible driving

DRIVING UPHILL
lower gear when needed to maintain the points speed
desired speed, according to the table. The transmission prevents unnecessary
1st
Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The 28 mph (45 km/h) upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
gear
engine may suffer damage. released and ensures smooth driving.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake 2nd
59 mph (95 km/h)
5
life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend- gear
DRIVING DOWNHILL
ing a steep hill. 3rd
Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug- 86 mph (140 km/h)
gear
ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as According to the conditions, the transmission
4th will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
when turning a corner or when driving up a 111 mph (180 km/h)
gear to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
steep hill.
help reduce your need to use the service
 The table above shows the maximum rec- brake.
Recommended downshifting speed ommended driving speed for in each gear.
Do not drive near or at these speeds for Selector lever operation
Downshifting speed Shift point prolonged periods of time.
N00560300048
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur- As an additional safety precaution, models
(32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear. Continuously variable equipped with a continuously variable trans-
20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur- transmission (CVT) (if so mission have a shift-lock device that holds
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
equipped) To move the selector lever from the “P”
N00560200047 (PARK) position to another position, follow
Driving precautions The CVT will automatically and continuously the steps below.
N00513100228
change its gear ratio depending on road and 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-
driving conditions. This helps achieve 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
drest. This can result in premature wear of
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. position.
the transaxle shift forks.
Also you can manually shift up and shift
down the transmission. Refer to “Sports

NOTE NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”  To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
(PARK) to another position if the ignition make sure you stop briefly at each position.
switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi- After operating, check the position in the
tion, or if the key has been removed, or if the multi-information display.
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
5 The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of  For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
the vehicle and the position of the accelerator tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
pedal. Set the selector lever in the gate to the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main operate while the brake pedal is selector lever before depressing the brake
gate (B) and the manual gate (C). depressed. pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.
When the selector lever cannot be
shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
WARNING tion
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- N00563300036
ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. When the selector lever cannot be shifted
When beginning to drive, do not shift the from the “P” (PARK) position to another
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while the brake pedal is pressed and
position while pressing the accelerator held down with the ignition switch or the
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat
“jump” forward or backward. or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
NOTE tioning.
 There are 4 selector lever positions in the Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
main gate. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
 For information on manual gate operation, repair facility of your choice.
please refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-55.


If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
When the selector lever position
selector lever as follows.
display blinks
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully N00582900028
applied.
2. Stop the engine if it is running. WARNING
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its  To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
keep brake pedal applied with your right
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
gently as shown to remove the cover.
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
5
play is blinking.
If the ambient temperature is low, the selector

Selector lever position display lever position display on the multi-informa-
N00560401091
tion display may blink when the selector
lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
When the ignition switch is turned to the
(REVERSE) position immediately after the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
engine has been started. This indicates that
ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
the transmission requires warming up. While
cated in the multi-information display.
the display is blinking, the vehicle will not
move, because the transmission keeps disen-
4. Depress the brake pedal with the right Type 1 Type 2 gaging until the warm up is completed even if
foot. the selector lever is placed in the “D” or “R”
5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock position.
release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while When the selector lever position display is
pressing the screwdriver down. blinking, perform the following procedure:
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right

foot and place the selector lever in the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several
seconds.


2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then
place the selector lever in the “D”
CAUTION CAUTION
 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
(DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. If After a while, confirm that the warning
the selector lever position display stops driving, the warning display or the display is no longer showing. It is safe to
blinking, the warm up is completed and warning display will appear on the informa- continue driving if the display is no longer
the transmission will function normally. tion screen in the multi-information display. showing. If the warning display remains or
3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps In this case, follow these procedures: flashes frequently, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
1 and 2 above. [When warning display is showing]
5 The continuously variable transmission
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
(CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con-
NOTE trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem- [When warning display is showing]
 While the selector lever position display is perature, causing the engine revolutions and It may be that there is something unusual
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently. vehicle speed to decrease, In this case, take happening in the CVT, causing a safety
one of the following procedures. device to activate. Have your vehicle
• Slow down your vehicle. inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Warning display • Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, choice as soon as possible.
N00560501063
Type 1 and open the engine hood with the engine

running to allow the engine to cool down.
Selector lever positions (Main
or gate)
N00560600054
Type 2
“P” PARK
or
This position locks the transmission to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
When the warning display or the warn- be started from the “P” (PARK) position.
ing display appears on the information screen
in the multi-information display while you
are driving, there could be a malfunction in
the CVT.


to “D” (DRIVE) operation, push the selector
“R” REVERSE WARNING lever back into the main gate (B).
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
Move the lever to this position only after the stopped on a slope, the engine should be
ply by operating the selector lever or spor-
vehicle has come to a complete stop. started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. tronic steering wheel paddle shifter.
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
CAUTION on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
5
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” tion.
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
NOTE
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission  For vehicles equipped with the sportronic
may be damaged. “D” DRIVE steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode
can be operated even when the selector lever
is in the main gate (B). Also, you can return
This position is used for most city and high-
to the “D” operation in any of following
“N” NEUTRAL way driving. The transmission will automati- ways. When returning to “D” operation, the
cally and continuously change its gear ratio selector lever position display will change to
At this position, the transmission is disen- depending on road and driving conditions. “D” (DRIVE) position.
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on • Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side sportronic
a manual transaxle and should be used when CAUTION steering wheel paddle shifter forward
the vehicle is not moving for an extended (toward the driver) for over 2 seconds.
 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
length of time during driving, such as in a into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” • Stop the vehicle
traffic jam. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in • Push the selector lever from the “D”
motion. (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A)
and push the selector lever back into the
WARNING main gate (B).
 Never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
Sports mode
N00560701078
you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position, Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
damaging the transmission. motion, sports mode is selected by pushing
the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
position into the manual gate (A). To return

CAUTION NOTE
 In sports mode, the driver must execute  To maintain good running performance, the
SHIFT upward shifts in accordance with prevailing transmission may refuse to perform an
UP SHIFT road conditions, taking care to keep the upshift when the selector lever or sportronic
DOWN engine speed below the red zone. steering wheel paddle shifter is moved to the
 Repeated continuous operation of the selec- “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
5 paddle shifter will continuously switch shift
position.
engine, the transmission may refuse to per-
form a downshift when the shift lever or
 On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter is
paddle shifter, shift ranges may not change moved to the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at
when the lateral paddle shifters are operated certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a
at the same time. buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is
not going to take place.
SHIFT
 In sports mode, downward shifts are made
UP
NOTE automatically when the vehicle slows down.
SHIFT When the vehicle stops, 1st position is auto-
 The upward shift may be made automatically
DOWN matically selected.
in sports mode when the engine revolutions
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer Sports mode display
dial). N00560900057
+ (SHIFT UP)  Shift ranges can only be selected in a for- In sports mode, the currently selected shift
Transmission shifts up once by each opera- ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
range is displayed on the information screen
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
tion. in the multi-information display.
the “R” or “P” position.
- (SHIFT DOWN)
Transmission shifts down once by each oper-
ation.

Type 1 Type 2 CAUTION NOTE

 Operating the accelerator pedal while the  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will when the accelerator is depressed all the way
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- to the floor.
mature wear of brake pads.
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi- Waiting
tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
5
ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE) or sport For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
mode} or coast forward in the “R” lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
(REVERSE) position. position and held stationary with the service
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal brake.
Operation of the CVT and steering effort could lead to an accident. For longer waiting periods with the engine
N00560800027  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal running, place the selector lever in the “N”
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
CAUTION This can damage the CVT. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
 Before selecting a position with the engine Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
with the service brake.
running and the vehicle stationary, firmly while holding down the brake pedal with the
Prior to moving off after having stopped the
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
the engine revolutions may not rise as high vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
cle from creeping.
as when performing the same operation with “D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi-
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
CVT is engaged, especially when the engine the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) tion.
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air position.
conditioning operating. CAUTION
Do not release the brake pedal until you are Passing acceleration  To avoid transmission overheating, never try
ready to drive away. to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
all times. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
the parking brake and/or service brake.
Using the left foot could cause driver move- position (when passing another vehicle) push
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
ment delay in case of an emergency. the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run automatically downshift. ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
the engine at high rpms when shifting from position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). (NEUTRAL).

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
Parking Electronically controlled Drive mode Function

This mode is for
4WD system (if so equipped) driving in slippery
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
N00517201178
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, conditions such as on
and then move the selector lever to the “P” The electronically controlled 4WD system is snow-covered roads
(PARK) position. an all-wheel drive system that allows one of or sand.
three drive modes to be selected with a The large amount of
5 When the CVT makes no speed switch, in accordance with the driving condi- 4WD LOCK driving torque that is
tions. applied to the rear
change tires enables getting
The following drive modes are available. out of slippery areas
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or and powerful driv-
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed Drive mode Function ing is possible across
when starting on an uphill slope, it may be all ranges.
This mode is for eco-
that there is something unusual happening in
nomical driving on
the transmission, causing a safety device to 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
normal dry roads and
activate. Have your vehicle checked at an 2WD ing skills.
freeways.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”
Driving in front-
repair facility of your choice as soon as possi- section on page 5-60 and take care to drive
wheel drive.
ble. safely.
The default mode.
This mode is for
NOTE automatically con- Drive mode-selector
 When the warning display and “SLOW trolling the distribu-
4WD AUTO
DOWN” or the warning display and tion of driving torque The drive mode can be changed by pressing
“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the to all four wheels the drive mode-selector while the ignition
information screen in the multi-information according to the switch or the operation mode is in ON.
display, there could be a malfunction in the driving conditions.
CVT. Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT): Warning display” on page
5-54.

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
Drive Display Type 2

mode Type 1 Type 2
4WD
LOCK
Normally the indicator illuminates when the
CAUTION
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
or the operation mode is put in ON, and then 5
the drive mode is displayed a few seconds
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
after the engine is started.
in similar conditions. The vehicle could
lunge in an unexpected direction.
By pressing the drive mode-selector, the drive Drive mode
 Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD
mode can be changed in order of “2WD”, Drive indicator
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con-
“4WD AUTO” and “4WD LOCK”. sumption, noise, and premature tire wear. Mode “4WD” indi- “LOCK”
 Do not drive with the tires spinning in cator indicator
The drive mode is displayed as an interrupt
“2WD” mode.
display on the information screen in the 2WD OFF OFF
Doing so could generate heat in the drive-
multi-information display when the drive system components. 4WD AUTO ON OFF
mode is changed.
After a few seconds, the information screen 4WD LOCK ON ON
will then return to its prior display. NOTE
 The drive mode can be switched while driv-
Drive Display ing or stopped.
mode Type 1 Type 2
2WD Drive mode indicator
4WD Type 1
AUTO

4-wheel drive operation
CAUTION CAUTION 4-wheel drive operation

 If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-  The warning display on the information N00530601195
ing, the vehicle switches automatically to screen in the multi-information display, a
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for
front-wheel drive in order to protect the problem has occurred with the electronically
drive-system components, and drive mode controlled 4WD system and the safety device
use on pavement.
selection is no longer possible with the drive has activated. Have an inspection made by But its unique 4 -wheel drive system allows
mode-selector. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads,
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar
5 The warning display is also displayed in the
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
sible. locations.
display. Not only does this ensure better handling on
Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-
after driving a while, resume driving as
Type 1 Type 2
tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
before. If the indicator continues blinking for covered roads and when moving out of mud.
more than about 5 minutes, have the vehicle
But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or
inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
towing in rough conditions.
soon as possible. It is particularly important to note that 4-
wheel drive may not give sufficient hill
climbing ability and engine braking on steep
Type 1 Type 2 slopes. You should try to avoid driving on
steep slopes.
CAUTION Also, you must exercise caution when driving
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and on sand and mud and when driving through
brand that have no wear differences. Using
water because sufficient traction may not be
tires that differ in size, type, brand, or wear
available in certain circumstances.
amount may activate the protection of the
drive-system components, causing the drive Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas
mode in “4WD AUTO” mode to lock or the where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or
“4WD” and “LOCK” indicators to blink mud.
alternately.


is called tight corner braking and results from
WARNING NOTE each of the four tires being at a different dis-
 Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi-  Note that the stopping distance required of
tance from the corner. The phenomenon is
cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim- the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this
its to the system and ability to maintain from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
control and traction. Reckless driving may When driving on a snow-covered road or a occurs, either straighten out the steering
lead to accidents. Always drive carefully, slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you wheel or change to another mode.
taking account of the road conditions. keep a sufficient distance between your vehi-
 Improperly operating this vehicle on or
off-pavement can cause an accident or
cle and the one ahead of you.
 The driving posture should be more upright;
On snowy or icy roads 5
rollover in which you and your passengers adjust the seat to a good position for easy
could be seriously injured or killed. steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD AUTO”
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in the seat belt. or “4WD LOCK” in accordance with the road
the owner’s manual.  After driving on rough roads, check each conditions, and then gradually depress the
• Keep your speed low and do not drive part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly accelerator pedal for a smooth start.
faster than conditions. with water. Refer to the “Inspection and
maintenance following rough road opera-
tion” section and “Vehicle care and Mainte-
NOTE
nance” sections.  The use of snow tires is recommended.
NOTE  Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
 Driving on rough roads can be hard on a avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-
vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
sure all scheduled maintenance and service CAUTION ing (downshifting).
has been done, and that you have inspected  Setting the drive mode-selector to “4WD
your vehicle. Pay special attention to the LOCK” position to drive on dry paved road
condition of the tires, and check the tire pres- will increase fuel consumption, with possible CAUTION
sures. noise generation.  Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
 Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con-
operator for any damage or injury caused or trol of the vehicle could be lost.
liability incurred by improper and negligent Turning sharp corners
operation of a vehicle. All techniques of
vehicle operation depend on the skill and
experience of the operator and other partici- When turning a sharp corner in “4WD
pating parties. Any deviation from the rec- LOCK” position at low speed, a slight differ-
ommended operating instructions above is at ence in steering may be experienced similar
their own risk. to feeling as if the brakes were applied. This


though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi-
Driving on sandy or muddy WARNING cle.
roads  When attempting to rock your vehicle out
of a stuck position, be sure that the area
around the vehicle is clear of people and Driving through water
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK” physical objects. The rocking motion may N00537800098
and then gradually depress the accelerator cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on If the electrical circuits become wet, further
ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, operation of the vehicle will be impossible;
5 and drive at low speed.
age to nearby people or objects.
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
absolutely necessary. If driving through water
NOTE is unavoidable, use the following procedure:
CAUTION
 Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly  Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration Check the depth of the water and the terrain
on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor- and sharp turning; such operations could
before attempting to drive through it. Drive
mal road surfaces, the engine and other result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
slowly to avoid creating excessive water
drive-system components are put under  If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
splashing.
excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
face. This could lead to accidents. rocking motion. Move the gearshift lever
 If any of the following conditions occur alternately between the 1st and “R” CAUTION
while the vehicle is being driven, immedi- (Reverse) positions (M/T), the “D” (DRIVE)  Never drive through water that is deep
ately park your vehicle in a safe place and and “R” (REVERSE) positions (CVT), while enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust
follow these procedures: pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal. pipe. Do not change the gearshift lever posi-
• If the engine coolant temperature display  Driving on rough road can cause rust on the tion (M/T) or the selector lever position
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon (CVT) while driving through water.
flashes on the information screen in the as possible after such use. Frequent driving through water can
multi-information display or the engine adversely affect the life span of the vehicle;
power drops suddenly. consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
Climbing/descending sharp dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
• If the “ ” warning display and “SLOW take the necessary measures to prepare,
grades inspect, and repair the vehicle.
DOWN” or the “ ” warning display and
“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
display.
climbing ability and engine braking on steep
Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-54. slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

 After driving through water, check the  Be sure all four tires and wheels are the
CAUTION engine, transaxle and differential oil. If same size and type.
 After driving through water, apply the brakes
the oil or grease is milky or cloudy When it is necessary to replace any of the
to be sure they are functioning properly. If
because of water contamination, it must tires or wheels, replace all four.
the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
erly, dry them out by driving slowly while be replaced with new oil.  All tires should be rotated before the wear
lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect  Check the inside of the vehicle. If water difference between the front and rear tires
each part of the vehicle carefully. entry is found, dry the carpet etc. is recognizable.
 Inspect the headlights. If water is in the
headlight housing, have it drained at an Good vehicle performance cannot be 5
Inspection and maintenance authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a expected if there is a difference in wear
following rough road opera- repair facility of your choice. between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on
 Have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors page 9-19.
tion dealer replace grease in the wheel bear-
N00530700098
ings.  Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
ditions, be sure to perform the following
Cautions on the handling of CAUTION
inspection and maintenance procedures:
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and
 Check that the vehicle has not been dam-
4-wheel drive vehicles brand that have no wear differences. Using
N00530800187 tires of different size, type, brands or degree
aged by rocks, gravel, etc.
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem-
 Carefully wash the vehicle with water. perature and result in possible damage to the
Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly Tires and wheels driving system. Further, the drive train will
depressing the brake pedal in order to dry be subject to excessive loading, possibly
out the brakes. If the brakes still do not Since the driving torque can be applied to the leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or
function properly, contact an authorized four wheels, the driving performance of the other serious failures.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
ity of your choice as soon as possible to greatly affected by the condition of the tires.
have the brakes checked.
 Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog- Pay close attention to the tires.
ging the radiator core.
 Install only the specified tires on all
wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on
page 11-5.

Service brake
Towing Jacking up a 4-wheel drive CAUTION

vehicle  It is important not to drive the vehicle with
your foot resting on the brake pedal when
braking is not required. This practice can
WARNING result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
 Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the brakes.
the vehicle.
5 The tire on the ground may turn and the
vehicle may roll off the jack.
Power brakes
N00517600436
Service brake Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes

N00517500275 for more braking force with less brake pedal
effort.
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
Brake pedal
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
used.
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,
CAUTION resulting in poor brake response and prema-
If the power assist is not being used, the effort
 Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
ture wear of the brake pads. If you should lose the power assist for some
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in When driving down a long or steep hill, use reason, the brakes will still work.
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. engine braking by downshifting. If the power brake unit or either of the two
If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
C or Type D equipment. WARNING erly, the rest of the brake system will still
 Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be  Do not leave any objects near the brake work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
towed with the front or the rear wheels on pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; quickly.
the ground. doing so could prevent the full pedal You will know this has happened if you find
stroke that would be necessary in an you need to press the brake down farther, or
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
the floor mat is securely held in place.
play in the multi-information display come
on. Have the brake system repaired at an

Hill start assist

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice immediately. Hill start assist CAUTION
N00562600074  Do not perform the following operation
while the hill start assist is operating.
WARNING The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the F.A.S.T.-key]
 Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
Keep the engine running whenever your vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the braking force for about 2 second when you “ACC” position.
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
engine while driving, the power brake
booster will stop working and your brakes accelerator pedal.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The
5
will not work as well. hill start assist could stop operating, which
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake could result in an accident.
CAUTION
hydraulic system stops working properly,
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
take your vehicle to an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. To operate
Under certain circumstances, even when hill N00562700059
ity of your choice immediately.
start assist is activated, the vehicle may 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- brake pedal.
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily 2. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
Brake pad wear alarm loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
axle, place the gearshift lever into the 1st
N00550700124 pery.
positon.
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a  The hill start assist is not designed to keep
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
On vehicles equipped with a continuously
metallic squeal when the brake pads have variable transmission (CVT), place the
for more than 2 seconds.
worn down enough to need service. selector lever into the “D” position.
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors as an alternative to depressing the brake NOTE
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. pedal.  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
Doing so could cause an accident. gearshift lever or the selector lever into the
WARNING “R” position.
 Driving with worn brake pads will make it
harder to stop, and can cause an accident. 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
assist will maintain the braking force
applied while stopping for approximately
2 seconds.

Brake assist system

4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
start assist gradually will decrease the
Warning display CAUTION
N00562800050  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the
NOTE tem, the following display/indicator will turn
indicator/display goes out, in which case the
 The hill start assist is activated when all of on.
hill start assist is again working normally.
the following conditions are met. If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
• The engine is running. ASC indicator
5 (The hill start assist will not be activated
- quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
immediately, but the vehicle should be
while the engine is starting or immediately inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
after the engine is started.) Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
• On vehicles equipped with manual trans- choice as soon as possible.
axle, the gearshift lever is in the following
position.
[When starting an uphill slope forwards.] Brake assist system
The gearshift lever is in any position other N00567301103
than “R”. The brake assist system is a device assisting

(The hill start assist will operate, even if the
Warning display type 2 drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
firmly such as in emergency stop situations
[When starting an uphill slope backwards.]
The gearshift lever is in the “R” position. and provides greater braking force.
(The hill start assist will not operate when
the gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
• On vehicles equipped with CVT, the selec-
brakes will be applied with more force than
tor lever is in any position other than “P” or usual.
“N”.
NOTE
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with
 The combination of items shown on the dis-
CAUTION
the brake pedal depressed.  The brake assist system is not a device
play varies depending on the vehicle model.
• The parking brake is released. designed to exercise braking force greater
 The hill start assist will not operate if the than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
accelerator pedal is depressed before the sufficient distance between vehicles in front
brake pedal is released. CAUTION of you without relying too much on the brake
 The hill start assist also operates when  If the warning is displayed, the hill start assist system.
reversing on an uphill slope. assist will not operate. Start off carefully.

Anti-lock braking system
NOTE Driving hints CAUTION

 Once the brake assist system is operational,  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
it maintains great braking force even if the  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden accidents. It is your responsibility to take
brake pedal is lightly released. braking), steering is slightly different safety precautions and to drive carefully.
To stop its operation, completely remove from normal driving conditions. Use the  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
your foot from the brake pedal. steering wheel carefully. system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
 When the brake assist system is in use while  Always keep a safe distance from the same size and the same type.
driving, you may feel as if the depressed
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- 5
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
motions in conjunction with the operation
system, leave a greater braking distance NOTE
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
when:  A whining sound is emitted from the engine
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered compartment when driving immediately
assist system is operating normally and does
roads. after starting the engine. These are the nor-
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
• Driving on uneven road surfaces. mal sounds the anti-lock braking system
depress the brake pedal.
makes when performing a self-check. It does
 You may hear an operation noise when the  Operation of anti-lock braking system is
not indicate a malfunction.
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed not restricted situations where brakes are
 The anti-lock braking system can be used
while stationary. This does not indicate a applied suddenly. This system may also
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
malfunction and the brake assist system is prevent the wheels from locking when approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
operating normally. you drive over manholes, steel roadwork working when the vehicle slows below 3
 When the anti-lock brake system warning plates, road markings, or any uneven road mph (5 km/h).
light/display or only ASC warning display surface.
illuminate, the brake assist system in not
 When the anti-lock braking system is in
functioning.
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat- Anti-lock braking system warn-
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also
feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
ing light/display
Anti-lock braking system In this situation, simply hold the brake N00531600645
Warning light
N00517900240 pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent brake, which will result in reduced
the wheels from locking up when braking. braking performance.
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and
steering wheel handling.

Anti-lock braking system

CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system
• When the ignition switch is turned to the warning light/display and brake
“ON” position or the operation mode is put warning light/display illuminate at
in ON, the warning light does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
the same time
• The warning light comes on while driving
Warning light
Warning display type 2 • The warning display appears while driving
5
If the warning light/display illu-
minate while driving
N00531701643
If there is a malfunction in the system, the If only the anti-lock braking sys-
anti-lock braking system warning light will tem warning light/display illumi-
come on and the warning display will appear
nate
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display.  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
light only comes on when the ignition switch Test the system by restarting the engine
is turned to the “ON” position or the opera- and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few (20 km/h) or higher.
seconds later. If the warning light/display then remains Warning display type 2
off during driving, there is no abnormal
CAUTION condition.
 Any of the following indicates that the anti- However, if the warning light/display do
lock braking system is not functioning and not disappear, or if they come on again
only the standard brake system is working. when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
(The standard brake system is functioning cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle Motors dealer or repair facility of your
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or choice as soon as possible.
a repair facility of your choice.

Electric power steering system (EPS)

The anti-lock braking system and brake force lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
Front
distribution function may not work, so hard son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
braking could make the vehicle unstable. cle, but you will notice it takes much more
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
facility of your choice. choice.
5
NOTE WARNING
 The anti-lock braking system warning light  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
and brake warning light illuminate at the moving. Stopping the engine would make
same time and the warning displays appear the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
alternately on the information screen in the Rear possibly resulting in an accident.
multi-information display.
NOTE
After driving on icy roads  During repeated full-lock turning of the
N00529200077 steering wheel (for example, while you are
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove
space), a protection function may be acti-
any snow and ice which may have be left vated to prevent overheating of the power
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an steering system. This function will make the
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the this event, limit your turning of the steering
cables located at each wheel. wheel for a while. When the system has
Electric power steering sys- cooled down, the steering effort will return
tem (EPS) to normal.
N00568400061  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
The power steering system operates while the
headlights may become dim. This behavior
engine is running. It helps reduce the effort is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
needed to turn the steering wheel. their original brightness after a short while.
The power steering system has mechanical
steering capability in case the power assist is

Active stability control (ASC)
Electric power steering system Active stability control CAUTION

warning display (ASC)  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
N00559100134
Type 1 may stop functioning properly.
The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control NOTE
5 function to help maintain the vehicle’s con-  An operation noise may be emitted from the
trol and traction. Please read this section in engine compartment in the following situa-
conjunction with the page on the anti-lock tions. The sound is associated with checking
Type 2 braking system, traction control function and the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
skid control function. may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
Anti-lock braking system  P.5-67 tion.
Traction control function  P.5-70 • When the ignition switch is turned to the
Skid control function  P.5-71 “ON” position or the operation mode is put
in ON.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the • When the vehicle is driven for a while after
warning display will appear on the informa- CAUTION the engine is turned on.
tion screen in the multi-information display.  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
from acting on the vehicle. This system, like ing sound from the engine compartment.
CAUTION any other system, has limits and cannot help This indicates that the system is operating
 If the warning display appears while the you to maintain traction and control of the normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-  When the anti-lock braking system warning
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
a repair facility of your choice as soon as responsibillty to drive carefully, This means
possible. It may become harder to turn the taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
steering wheel. ronmental conditions.
 Be sure to use the same specified type and
Traction control function
N00559200076
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
ASC may not work properly. On slippery surfaces, the traction control
function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to


start moving from a stopped condition. It also
provides sufficient driving force and steering
When the ASC is deactivated, the dis- NOTE
play/indicator will turn on. To reactivate the  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh
performance as the vehicle turns while press- ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
ing the acceleration pedal.
switch ; the display/indicator is turned off. allow the engine speed to increase. In such
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with
CAUTION the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy move out your vehicle.
road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
the vehicle at moderate speeds.
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
5
taken operation protection function” will
activate and the ASC will turn back on.
Skid control function

N00559300051 ASC operation display or ASC
The skid control function is designed to help OFF display
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on N00546500075
slippery roads or during rapid steering ASC operation display/ASC indicator

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine -
output and the brake on each wheel.
CAUTION The display/indicator will blink when
 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch the ASC is operating.
should be operated when your vehicle is ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator
-
NOTE stopped. This display/incicator will turn on
 The skid control function operates at speeds  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in when the ASC is turned off with the
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. normal circumstances. “ASC OFF” switch.
ASC OFF switch NOTE NOTE

N00559400241  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both  The combination of items shown on the dis-
the stability control function and the traction play varies depending on the vehicle model.
The ASC is automatically activated when the
control function.
or the operation mode is put in ON. You can
deactivate the system by pressing down the
“ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 When display/indicator blinks, ASC is  When a compact spare tire has been put on  The combination of items shown on the dis-
your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire play varies depending on the vehicle model.
operating, which means that the road is slip-
will be lower, making it more likely that the
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower display/indicator will blink.
with less accelerator input. CAUTION
 If the temperature in the braking system con-  The system may be malfunctioning.
5 tinues to increase due to continuous brake
ASC warning display Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
N00546600076 engine.
control on a slippery road surface, the
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
display/indicator will blink. To prevent the
tem, the following display/indicator will turn play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there
brake system from overheating, the brake
on. is no abnormal condition. If they do not go
control of the traction control function will
out or appear frequently, it is not necessary
be temporarily suspended.
to stop the vehicle immediately, but you
The engine control of the traction control - ASC indicator should have your vehicle inspected by an
function and normal brake operation will not
be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe place. - ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
When the temperature in the braking system
sible.
has come down, the display/indicator
will be turned off and the traction control Warning display type 1
function will start operating again.
NOTE
 The display/indicator may turn on when
you start the engine. This means that the bat-
tery voltage momentarily dropped when the
engine was started. It does not indicate a
malfunction, provided that the display goes
out immediately.

Cruise control (if so equipped)
Towing CAUTION Cruise control switches

N00546300031  Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
CAUTION speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
 When towing the vehicle with only the front that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
ground, do not place the ignition switch in  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,
the “ON” position or do not put the operation
mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N”
(Neutral) position while driving at a set
5
the “ON” position or putting the operation speed without depressing the clutch pedal.
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate, The engine will run too fast and might be
resulting in an accident. damaged.
Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
drive configuration. NOTE A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.  Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
speed on uphills or downhills. B- SET - switch
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
Cruise control (if so You may use the accelerator pedal if you desired speed.
want to stay at your set speed. C- RES + switch
equipped)  Your speed may increase to more than the set Used to increase the set speed and to
N00518301600
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use return to the original set speed.
Cruise control is an automatic speed control the brake to control your speed. As a result, D- CANCEL switch
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti- the set speed driving is deactivated.
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
vated at speeds from about 25 mph
(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). NOTE
 When operating the cruise control switches,
CAUTION press the cruise control switches correctly.
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, The set speed driving may be deactivated
turn off the cruise control for safety. automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.

To activate NOTE
N00518401409  If the cruise control is on when the following
1. With the ignition switch in “ON” position operation is performed, cruise control will be
or the operation mode is in ON, press the on automatically the next time you start the
CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A) engine. The “CRUISE” indicator light will
to turn on the cruise control. The also be on.
“CRUISE” indicator light in the meter
5 cluster will come on.
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
 If the battery voltage is insufficient, the NOTE
memory data for the cruise control may be  When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
erased. cle speed will be set.
As a result, the “CRUISE” indicator light
may not come on when you restart the
engine.
If this happens, press the CRUISE CON- To increase the set speed
TROL ON/OFF switch once again to turn on N00518501367
the cruise control. There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired RES + switch

speed, then push down and release the
SET - switch (B) when the “CRUISE”
Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
will then maintain the desired speed.
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.

To increase your speed in small amounts, To slow down your speed in small amounts,
push up the RES + switch for less than about push down the SET - switch for less than
1 second and release it.
To decrease the set speed about 1 second and release it.
N00518601296
Each time you push up the RES + switch, Each time you push down the SET - switch,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph
faster. (1.6 km/h).
SET - switch
Accelerator pedal Brake pedal
Push down and hold the SET - switch (B)
While driving at the set speed, use the accel- while driving at the set speed, and your speed While driving at the set speed, use the brake
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and will slow down gradually. pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then push down the SET - switch (B) and When you reach your desired speed, release then push down the SET - switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new the switch. Your new cruising speed is now release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed. set. desired cruising speed.

To deactivate
N00518801591
The set speed driving can be deactivated as

follows:
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned
5 off.)
 Press the CANCEL switch (D).
 Depress the brake pedal.
To temporarily increase or To temporarily decrease the speed

decrease the speed
N00541701079 Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
To temporarily increase the speed push up the RES + switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
5-77.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on

vehicles equipped with manual transaxle).
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed
because of a hill, etc.
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or less.


 When the active stability control (ASC) Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
starts operating.
To resume the set speed  “CRUISE” indicator light is turned OFF.
N00518901329
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-70. If the set speed driving is deactivated by any
condition described in “To deactivate” on Tire pressure monitoring
WARNING
page 5-76, you can resume the previously set system
speed by pushing up the RES + switch (C) N00530201625
 On vehicles equipped with continuously while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40
variable transmission (CVT), although the
km/h) or higher.
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire 5
set speed driving will be deactivated when inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels
shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
never move the selector lever to the “N” system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. cantly under-inflated.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated as follows:
 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
Under either of the following conditions,
however, using the switch does not allow you
CAUTION to resume the previously set speed. In these
 When the set speed driving is deactivated situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
automatically in any situation other than
those listed above, there may be a system  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
malfunction.
switch is pressed.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
switch to turn off the cruise control and have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit- F.A.S.T.-key]
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
your choice. “ACC” position.


warning light normally illuminates and goes
WARNING NOTE off a few seconds later.
 The compact spare wheel does not have a For details, please contact your authorized
tire inflation pressure sensor. Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for
When the spare tire is used, the tire pres- the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,
sure monitoring system will not work Type 1
the warning light will remain illuminated
properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
while the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
5 dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire. Refer to “If the warning light / display illumi-
nates while driving” on page 5-80 and take
the necessary measures.
NOTE
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a NOTE
substitute for regularly checking tire infla- Type 2  In addition, the warning display is displayed
tion pressures. on the information screen in the multi-infor-
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures mation display.
as described in “Tires” on page 9-14.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor (B) is Type 1
installed in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
the metallic air valve (C), replace grommet
and washer (D) with a new one when the
tire is replaced.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has The tire pressure monitoring
the rubber air valve (E), replace rubber air system warning light / display Type 2
valve (E) with a new one when the tire is
N00532700281
replaced.

ON, the tire pressure monitoring system


pressure telltale when one or more of your
CAUTION NOTE tires is significantly under-inflated.
 If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-  In addition, the warning display is displayed
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
ing light does not illuminate when the igni- on the information screen in the multi-infor-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or mation display.
the operation mode is put in ON, it means your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
that the tire pressure monitoring system is Type 1 them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
not working properly. Have the system nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
5
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
system may be preventing the monitoring of cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
sharp turning and high-speed driving. Type 2 proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
monitoring system warning light will blink
for approximately 1 minute and then remain the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
continuously illuminated. The warning light low tire pressure telltale.
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
exists.
should be checked monthly when cold and the system is not operating properly. The
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving. inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
If it then goes off during driving, there is no mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the with the low tire pressure telltale.
problem. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. When the system detects a malfunction, the
However, if the warning light does not go (If your vehicle has tires of a different size telltale will flash for approximately one min-
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is than the size indicated on the vehicle placard ute and then remain continuously illuminated.
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an or tire inflation pressure label, you should This sequence will continue upon subsequent
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. determine the proper tire inflation pressure
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
for those tires.) exists.
system may be preventing the monitoring of
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or
the warning light appears while driving,
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended.
high-speed driving.


TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
NOTE CAUTION
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-  If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
valve stem. could lead to an accident.
ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal- Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could  The warning light/display may not illuminate
function telltale after replacing one or more get into the valve, resulting in damage to the immediately in the event of a tire blowout or
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that tire inflation pressure sensor. rapid leak.
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
5 allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
 Do not use metal valve caps, which may
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
erly. and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen- NOTE
sors.
 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
If the warning light/display illu- ing light will go off after a few minutes of
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
minates while driving driving. Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
N00532801524
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is
1. If the tire pressure monitoring system not covered by your warranty.
warning light remains illuminated after
warning light illuminates, avoiding hard  Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
you have been driving for about 20 min-
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and on any tire.
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
high speeds. You should stop and adjust Such a spray could damage the tire inflation
sure, one or more of the tires may have a pressure sensors.
the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a Have any puncture repaired by an authorized
soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
puncture, have it repaired by an autho- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
9-14.
possible.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
NOTE work normally in the following circum-
 In addition, the warning display is displayed WARNING stances:
on the information screen in the multi-infor-  If the warning light/display illuminates
mation display. while you are driving, avoid hard braking,  A wireless facility or device using the
 When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- sharp steering maneuvers and high same frequency is near the vehicle.
sure, do not apply excessive force to the speeds.  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
valve stem to avoid breakage. Driving with an under-inflated tire and/or on the wheels.
adversely affects vehicle performance and  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery
can result in an accident.
is dead.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine wheel replacement is not done by an autho-
wheels are being used. rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not cov-
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- ered by your warranty.
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
tion pressure sensors are being used.
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- CAUTION ate the equipment.
rized by the vehicle are used.  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
 Compact spare tire is fitted on a road the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
wheel.
 A window tint that affects the radio wave
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors.
Rear-view camera (if so 5
signals is installed. equipped)
N00546201183
NOTE General information When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
 Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- N00533001246 is in the “R” position with the ignition switch
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view
large variations in ambient temperature, the ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal image will be displayed on the screen of the
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated Communications Commission (FCC) Rules Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System or
(causing the warning light/display to come the DISPLAY AUDIO in the center panel.
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
on) when the ambient temperature is rela- When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
tively low. If the warning light/display is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-
comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure. This device complies with part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt view image will go off.
RSS standard(s).
Whenever the tires and wheels Operation is subject to the following two con- WARNING
ditions.  Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
are replaced with new ones to clear the area behind your vehicle.
N00532901192  This device may not cause harmful inter- Always check visually behind and all
If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure ference. around your vehicle for persons, animals,
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be  This device must accept any interference obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to
received, including interference that may do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
cause undesired operation. injury or death.
system. Have the tire and wheel replacement
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for
performed by an authorized Mitsubishi
backing up, but it is not a substitute for
Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging your visual confirmation.
the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
WARNING CAUTION
 The view on the screen is limited, and • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
objects outside the view, such as under the • Do not spray the camera and its surround-
bumper or around either corner of the ings with high-pressure water.
bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen. • Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
Location of rear-view camera
5 Reference lines on the screen
The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at
the left side of the liftgate handle. Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
rear bumper
 Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
vehicle body.
CAUTION
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
tance from the rear bumper.
on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
CAUTION The reference lines for distance and vehicle
 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image width are based on a level, flat road surface.
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the In the following cases, objects shown on the
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a screen will appear to be farther off than they
clean, soft cloth. actually are.
 To avoid damaging the camera; • When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish down with the weight of passengers and
it by using an abrasive compound. luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)
• Do not disassemble the camera.

Instrument cluster
CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

• When there is an upward slope at the back.  The reference lines for distance and vehicle  On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
(Case 2) width are intended to indicate the distance to Communication System, it is possible to
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. change the display language of the screen.
Case 1 They may not indicate correct distance For details, please refer to the separated
depending on the shape of an obstacle. owner’s manual.
For example, when there is an object behind  Under certain circumstances, it may become
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
5
lines on the screen will indicate that point A • In a dark area, such as at night.
is the farthest point and point B is the closest • When water drops or condensation are on
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B the lens.
A- Actual objects are actually the same distance from the vehi-
• When sun light or headlights shine directly
B- Objects shown on the screen cle, and point C is farther off than point A
into the lens.
and B.
Case 2
Instrument cluster
N00519000388
A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
NOTE
1- Tachometer  P.5-84
 Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
2- Multi-information display  P.5-85
 Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
by sensors.
Information screen display list 
P.5-107

Instrument cluster
3- Speedometer  P.5-84
Tachometer Rheostat meter illumination
4- Rheostat meter illumination button 
P.5-84
N00519200289
button
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per N00554901251
minute. This allows the driver to determine Each time you press this button, there is a
Speedometer the most efficient selector position and engine
N00519100259
sound and the brightness of the instruments
speed combinations. changes.
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
5 miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour performance.
(km/h). NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
tively for when the front side-marker and
Type A parking lights are illuminated and when they
are not.
 If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the light switch is in a
position other than the “OFF” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to
the adjusted brightness, depending on the
brightness outside the vehicle.
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is
CAUTION put in OFF.
Type B  The red zone indicates an engine speed  If you press and hold the button for longer
beyond the range of safe operation. than about 1 second when the front side-
Select the correct shift position (manual marker lights are illuminated, the brightness
transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con- level changes to the maximum level. Press-
trol the engine speed so that the tachometer ing and holding the button for longer than
indicator does not enter the red zone. about 1 second again returns the brightness
level to the previous level.

Multi-information display
2- Rheostat illumination button
1- Brightness display
N00555000265
The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, selector lever position, all-wheel drive operation status, average and momentary fuel consumption, driving range, average
speed, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.

With ignition switch or operation With ignition switch or operation mode is in With ignition switch or operation mode is in
mode is in OFF ON (CVT) ON (Manual transaxle)
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2
1- 5- Warning display screen (With igni- 10- Fuel remaining display screen 
Warning display screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode in ON) P.5-96
tion switch or operation mode in OFF)
 P.5-91 11- Engine coolant temperature display (if
 P.5-87
6- Active stability control (ASC) OFF so equipped)
2- Information screen (With ignition
display screen (if so equipped)   P.5-91
switch or operation mode in OFF) 
P.5-91 12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
P.5-87
7- Information screen (With ignition  P.5-96
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)  13- Gearshift indicator display screen (if so
switch or operation mode in OFF) 
P.5-91 equipped)
P.5-89
Interrupt display screen (With ignition  P.5-49
3- Door ajar warning display screen (With
ignition switch or operation mode in switch or operation mode in ON) 
OFF)  P.5-90 P.5-95 NOTE
4- Drive mode indicator display screen (if 8- Selector lever position display screen  The fuel units, temperature units, display
so equipped) (if so equipped)  P.5-96 language, and other settings can be changed.
9- Outside temperature display screen  Refer to “Changing the function settings
 P.5-91
P.5-96 (With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-99.

momentary fuel consumption, driving range, This mark is also displayed if there is another
NOTE and average speed. warning other than the one displayed. When
 The display screen is different depending on
It is also possible to change elements such as the cause of the warning display is elimi-
whether the ignition switch or the operation
the language and units used on the multi- nated, the warning goes out automatically.
mode in OFF or ON.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition information display by operating the multi-
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page information meter switch.
5-87.
NOTE
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
5
5-107. information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch turned from the “OFF” position to the switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
“ON” position or operation mode changed 5-87.
from OFF to ON)” on page 5-90. Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page 5-91.
5-91.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
5-110.
Information screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode
Warning display screen
in OFF)
(With ignition switch or opera-
Multi-information meter switch N00555301180
N00555100149
tion mode in OFF) Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
N00555200179
The multi-information meter switch is a but- mation meter switch, the display screen
ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the If you press the multi-information meter switches in the following order.
dash. switch and return from the warning display
Each time the multi-information meter switch screen to the previous screen, the warning
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi- is displayed.
information display changes between infor- Refer to “Returning to the display screen
mation such as warnings, Odometer (Type1), from before the warning display” on page
trip odometer, service reminder, engine cool- 5-89.
ant temperature (Type 1), average and

seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
Type 1 Odometer/Trip odometer
played value will be reset.
N00555400113
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- Example

When there is no mation meter switch, the display screen If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
warning display switches.
odometer will be reset.
Odometer/trip odometer  Odome-
5 ter/trip odometer  Service reminder  Type 1
When there is a Redisplay of a warning display screen 
warning display
Odometer/trip odometer .
Type 2 Odometer
Shows the total distance traveled.
When there is no
Trip odometer
warning display Type 2
Shows the distance traveled between two
points.
When there is a Usage examples for trip odometer , trip

warning display odometer
It is possible to measure two currently
traveled distances, from home using trip
1- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer odometer and from a particular point
2- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer on the way using trip odometer .
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen
To reset the trip odometer
To return the display to 0, hold down the

multi-information meter switch for about 2

to the appropriate page and take the necessary screen display from before the warning and
NOTE measures.
 If there is no warning display, the switching the warning (A) is displayed.
When the cause of the warning display is
sequence is: odometer/trip odometer  eliminated, the warning display goes out
odometer/trip odometer  service automatically. Type 1
reminder  odometer/trip odometer . Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
 Both trip odometers and can count switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-107.
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
5
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo- Type 1
meters. Type 2
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memories of trip odometer displays and
are cleared, and their displays return to
“0.0 miles/kilometers”. Type 2
Service reminder
N00555500042
NOTE
Shows the distance and number of months 1- Information generated
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or
until the next periodic inspection. 2- Cause eliminated
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-97. “ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
Interrupt display screen (With Returning to the display screen the display, press the multi-information
meter switch as follows.
ignition switch or operation from before the warning display
“ ”: Press lightly.
mode in OFF) Even if the cause of the warning display is “ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
N00559600201
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
When there is information to be announced, that was displayed before the warning dis- Redisplay of a warning display screen
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and play.
switches to the warning display screen. Refer If you press the multi-information meter When the warning is displayed, if you
switch, the display screen switches to the lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the warning display
Information screen (With the System check screen
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition ignition switch is turned from
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page the “OFF” position to the “ON”
5-87. “ON” position or the operation mode is
position or the operation mode changed to ON, the system check screen is
is changed from OFF to ON) displayed for about 4 seconds. If there in no
Door ajar warning display N00555800191 fault, the information screen is displayed.
5 screen (With ignition switch or When the ignition switch is turned to the If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
operation mode in OFF) “ON” position or the operation mode changed ing display.
N00559700156 to ON, the display screen switches in the fol- Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
lowing order. switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com- 5-110.
pletely closed, this displays the open door or
liftgate. Type 1
Type 1 Type 2
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
1- Screen when the ignition switch or oper-

ation mode is OFF)
1- Doors and liftgate are closed 2- System check screen NOTE
2- Doors or liftgate is open 3- Screen when the ignition switch or oper-  The system check screen display varies
ation mode is ON) depending on your equipment.

Service reminder Warning display screen “Active stability control (ASC)

(With ignition switch or opera- OFF” display screen (if so
When the time for periodic inspection arrives, tion mode in ON) equipped)
the warning display is displayed for a few
N00555200182 N00556100117
seconds after the screen that is initially dis-
played when the ignition switch is turned This is displayed when you press the multi-
This is displayed when the Active stability
“ON” or the operation mode is changed to information meter switch and switch the
control (ASC) is turned “OFF” with the
ON. warning display screen.
“ASC OFF” switch. 5
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-97. This mark is also displayed if there is another
Also, if an abnormal condition is occurred in
Type 1 warning other than the one displayed.
the ASC while driving, the “ASC OFF” dis-
play illuminates.
eliminated, the warning goes out automat- Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 5-71.
ically.
Information screen (With igni-
NOTE tion switch or operation mode
Type 2  When the warning is displayed, the warn-
in ON)
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
N00556201245
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page mation meter switch, the display screen
5-87. switches in the following order.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
Drive mode indicator display 5-91.
screen (if so equipped)
N00555900020
Shows the 4WD drive status.

Refer to “Drive mode-selector” on page 5-58.

Type 1 1- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer NOTE

2- Odometer (Type1)/Trip odometer  When there is information to be announced,
3- Service reminder such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
Engine coolant temperature display the screen display is switched.
4- Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni-
(Type 1)
When there is no warning display 5- Driving range display (Type 1) tion switch or operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-95.
6- Average speed display, average fuel
5 consumption display, momentary fuel
consumption display (Type 1) Odometer/Trip odometer
7- Driving range display, momentary fuel
consumption display (Type 2) The operation method is the same as when
8- Average fuel consumption display, the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
When there is a
momentary fuel consumption display OFF.
warning display
(Type 2) For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip
9- Average speed display, momentary fuel odometer” on page 5-88.
consumption display (Type 2)
Type 2 10- Function setting screen
Service reminder
11- Redisplay of a warning display screen
Shows the distance and number of months

NOTE until the next periodic inspection.
When there is no warning display  While driving, the function setting screen is Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-97.
not displayed even if you operate the multi-
information meter switch. Always park the Engine coolant temperature dis-
vehicle in a safe place before operating.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
play
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-99. Shows the engine coolant temperature.
When there is a If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.
warning display
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
temperature display while you are driving.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
CAUTION NOTE key]
 The display setting can be changed to the
 If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. Change the operation mode to ON from
preferred units (miles or km).
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. ACC or OFF.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
and take the required measures. Refer to
ON)” on page 5-99. Auto reset mode
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
 When the average speed is being dis-
Average speed display
played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
5
Driving range display mation meter switch, these calculations
This displays the average speed from the last will be reset to zero.
Shows the approximate driving range (how reset to the present.  When the engine switch or the operation
many more miles or kilometers you can There are 2 types of mode settings as follows. mode is in the following conditions, the
drive). When this driving range falls below For details on how to change the average average speed display will automatically
30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. speed display setting, refer to “Changing the reset.
Refuel as soon as possible. function settings (With ignition switch or
operation mode in ON)” on page 5-99. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE The ignition switch has been set to the
 The driving range is determined based on the Manual reset mode
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4
fuel consumption data. This may vary
 When the average speed is being dis- hours or more.
depending on the driving conditions and hab-
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
rough guideline. mation meter switch, these calculations [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
 When you refuel, the driving range display is will be reset to zero. key]
updated.  When the following operation is per- The operation mode has been set to ACC
However, if you only add a small amount of formed, the mode setting changes auto- or OFF for about 4 hours or more.
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. matically from manual to auto.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
NOTE
 When your vehicle is stopped on an
 The average speed display and the average
extremely steep hill, the driving range value F.A.S.T.-key]
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
may, change. This is due to the movement of Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. reset mode.
breakdown.

The ignition switch has been set to the
NOTE Manual reset mode
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4
 “---” is displayed when the average speed
 When the average fuel consumption is hours or more.
cannot be measured.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset being displayed, if you hold down the
mode”. multi-information meter switch, these cal-
key]
 The display setting can be changed to the culations will be reset to zero.
The operation mode has been set to ACC
preferred units (mph or km/h).  When the following operation is per-
or OFF for about 4 hours or more.
5 Refer to “Changing the function settings
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.
ON)” on page 5-99. NOTE
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase [Except for vehicles equipped with the  The average speed display and the average
from memory the manual reset mode or auto F.A.S.T.-key] fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
reset mode setting for the average speed dis- Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- rately in both auto reset mode and manual
play. tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. reset mode.
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
Average fuel consumption display [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- sumption cannot be measured.
key]  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
Change the operation mode to ON from mode”.
This displays the average fuel consumption ACC or OFF.  Average fuel consumption may vary depend
from the last reset to the present. on the driving conditions (road conditions,
There are 2 types of mode settings as follows. how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con-
For details on how to change the average fuel Auto reset mode
sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
consumption display setting, refer to “Chang- tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
 When the average fuel consumption is
ing the function settings (With ignition switch displayed as just a rough guideline.
being displayed, if you hold down the
or operation mode in ON)” on page 5-99.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
multi-information meter switch, these cal-
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge culations will be reset to zero. reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
shows the average fuel consumption. (Type  When the engine switch or the operation sumption display.
2) mode is in the following conditions, the  The display setting can be changed to the
average fuel consumption display will preferred units {mpg(US), mpg(UK),
automatically reset. L/100km or km/L}.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the (With ignition switch or operation mode in
F.A.S.T.-key] ON)” on page 5-99.

Momentary fuel consumption dis- Function setting screen Returning to the display screen from
play before the warning display
The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
Even if the cause of the warning display is
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
tion is shown with a bar graph. consumption and speed reset method” set-
that was displayed before the warning dis-
When the momentary fuel consumption sur- tings can be modified as desired.
play.
passes the average fuel consumption, the For further details, refer to “Changing the
momentary fuel consumption is displayed function settings (With ignition switch or If you press the multi-information meter 5
with a green bar graph. (Type 2) operation mode in ON)” on page 5-99. switch, the display screen switches to the
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary screen display from before the warning and
fuel consumption above the average fuel con- Interrupt display screen (With the warning (A) is displayed.
sumption, it can help you drive with the better
fuel consumption.
ignition switch or operation
mode in ON) Type 1
NOTE N00556300180
 When the momentary fuel consumption can-

not be measured, a bar graph is not shown. Warning display
 The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units {mpg(US), mpg(UK), When there is information to be announced,
L/100km or km/L}. such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the Type 2
Refer to “Changing the function settings information screen is switched to the warning
(With ignition switch or operation mode in display screen.
Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
ON)” on page 5-99. ON)” on page 5-110.
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.

NOTE Selector lever position display Fuel remaining display screen

 Warning display screens with a “ ” or screen (if so equipped) N00556600170
N00556400064 Shows the amount of fuel remaining.

“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
screen can be switched. If you want to switch Shows the position of the selector lever.
the display, press the multi-information Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page Type 1 Type 2
meter switch as follows.
5-51.
5 “ ”: Press lightly.
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more. Outside temperature display
screen
N00556500065
Redisplay of a warning display
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
screen
NOTE
When the warning is displayed, if you  The display setting can be changed to the
lightly press the multi-information meter preferred units (°F or °C).
CAUTION
switch a few times, the warning display Refer to “Changing the function settings  Running out of gas could damage the cata-
screen you switched from is redisplayed. (With ignition switch or operation mode in lytic converter. If the warning display
ON)” on page 5-99. appears, refuel as soon as possible.
 Depending on factors such as the driving
Other interrupt displays
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature. NOTE
The operation status of each system is dis-  It may take several seconds to stabilize the
played on the information screen. display after refilling the tank.
For further details, refer to the appropriate ECO mode indicator (if so  If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
page in the warning display list. operation mode in ON, the remaining fuel
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page equipped) display may incorrectly indicate the fuel
5-117. N00568700019 level.
This indicator will be displayed when fuel-

efficient driving is achieved.

1. Shows the time until the next periodic
Fuel tank filler door mark NOTE inspection.
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
NOTE
filler door is located on the left side of the  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on km) and the time in units of 1 month.
page 3-3.) Service reminder
N00556700214
Fuel remaining warning display Displays the approximate time until the next
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- 5
tion is due. Contact an authorized
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
When the fuel level runs low, the information displayed when the inspection time has ity of your choice to have the system
screen switches to the interrupt display of the arrived. checked.
fuel remaining warning display and the mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If NOTE At that time, when the ignition switch is
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as  The service reminder time can be modified switched from the “OFF” position to the
possible. by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, “ON” position or the operation mode is
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to changed from OFF to ON, the warning
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- display is displayed for a few seconds on
Type 1 cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. the information screen.
For further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Type 1
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
Type 2

3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
Type 1 Type 1
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.
To reset
Type 2 Type 2
5 The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
When the display is reset, the time until the
next periodic inspection is displayed and the
warning display is no longer displayed when
the ignition switch is switched from the
“OFF” position to the “ON” position or the
operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
2. Press and hold the multi-information CAUTION
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- meter switch (for about 2 seconds or  The customer is responsible for making sure
tion meter switch, the information screen that regular inspections and maintenance and
more) to display “ ” and make it flash. periodic inspections and maintenance are
switches to the service reminder display
(If there is no operation for about 10 sec- performed.
screen.
onds with this indicator flashing, the dis- Inspections and maintenance must be per-
play returns to the previous screen.) formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
press the multi-information meter switch,
the screen switches from “---” to NOTE
“CLEAR”. After that, the time until the  The “---” display cannot be reset while the
next periodic inspection is shown. ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON.
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 If you accidentally reset the display, consult  Always make sure that the warning display  For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for goes out before beginning to drive. While driving, even if you operate the multi-
assistance. information meter switch, the function set-
ting screen is not displayed.
Door ajar warning display Changing the function settings

(With ignition switch or opera- 3. Press and hold the multi-information
screen (With ignition switch or meter switch (for about 2 seconds or 5
operation mode is in ON) tion mode is in ON) more) to switch from the setting mode
N00556801212
N00555700132 screen to the menu screen.
Type 1 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
Fully apply the parking brake and move Type 1
the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral)
position (Manual transaxle) or the selector
lever into the “P” (PARK) position
(CVT).
2. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
Type 2 Type 2
tion meter switch, the information screen
switches to the function setting screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-91.
Type 1 Type 2
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
pletely closed, this displays the open door or
liftgate. NOTE
If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
 To return the menu screen to the function
km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone will setting screen, press and hold the multi-
sound 4 times to inform you that a door is information meter switch (for about 2 sec-
ajar. onds or more).

3. Press and hold the multi-information
NOTE Changing the reset mode for aver-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 If no operations are made within about 15 age fuel consumption and average more) to switch in sequence from A or 1
seconds of the menu screen being displayed, speed (Auto reset)  M, 2 or P (Manual reset)
the display returns to the function setting
screen.
N00557000227  A or 1 (Auto reset).
You can change the mode condition for the The setting is changed to the selected
4. Select the item to change on the menu average fuel consumption and average speed reset condition.
screen and change to the desired setting. display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.”
5 For further details on the operation meth- Manual reset mode
ods, refer to the following sections. 1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or  If you press and hold the multi-informa-
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for more) to switch from the setting mode tion meter switch when the average fuel
average fuel consumption and average screen to the menu screen. consumption and average speed are dis-
speed” on page 5-100. Refer to “Changing the function settings played, these calculations will be reset to
Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption (With ignition switch or operation mode zero.
display unit” on page 5-101. is in ON)” on page 5-99.  When the following operation is per-
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter formed, the mode setting changes auto-
on page 5-102. switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con- matically from manual to auto.
Refer to “Changing the display language” sumption and average speed setting).
on page 5-102. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
Type 1
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on F.A.S.T.-key]
page 5-103. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
REMINDER” is displayed” on page
5-103.
key]
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” Type 2 Change the operation mode to ON from
on page 5-104.
ACC or OFF.
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
consumption display (Type 2)” on page
5-104.
Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
tings” on page 5-105.

Auto reset mode Changing the fuel consumption
display unit more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
 When the average fuel consumption and
N00557100143
average speed are being displayed, if you sumption display unit setting).
hold down the multi-information meter The fuel consumption display unit can be 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch, these calculations will be reset to changed. The distance, speed, and amount switch to switch in sequence from km/L
zero. units are also changed to match the selected  L/100 km  mpg (US)  mpg (UK)
fuel consumption unit.  RETURN  km/L.
 When the engine switch or the operation
mode is in the following conditions, the
5
average fuel consumption display and the
average speed display will automatically
more) to change from the setting mode Type 1 Type 2
reset.
screen to the menu screen.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Refer to “Changing the function settings
F.A.S.T.-key] (With ignition switch or operation mode
The ignition switch has been set to the is in ON)” on page 5-99.
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
hours or more. switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
sumption display unit setting).
Type 1
key]
The operation mode has been in ACC or
OFF for about 4 hours or more.
NOTE meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change the setting to the selected
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase Type 2
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
unit.
reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play and average fuel consumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.

NOTE meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
NOTE
 The display units for the driving range, the  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
more) to switch from the setting mode
average fuel consumption, the average speed the unit setting is erased and is automatically
and the momentary fuel consumption are set to °F (°C).
changed, but the units for the indicating nee- Refer to “Changing the function settings
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip (With ignition switch or operation mode
odometer will remain unchanged. is in ON)” on page 5-99.
Changing the display language
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
5  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
N00557300161
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}. The language of the multi-information dis-
setting). play can be changed.
Type 1
The distance and speed units are also changed 1. Press and hold the multi-information
in the following combinations to match the meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
selected fuel consumption unit. more) to change from the setting mode
Distance Speed Refer to “Changing the function settings
Fuel
(driving (average (With ignition switch or operation mode
economy Type 2
range) speed) is in ON)” on page 5-99.
mpg (US) mile (s) mph 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan-
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph guage setting).
km / L km km / h
L / 100 km km km / h
Changing the temperature unit 3. Press and hold the multi-information

N00557200115
more) to change in sequence from °F 
The temperature display unit can be switched. °C  °F.
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
perature unit.

Type 1 Operation sound setting
N00557400117
more) to switch in sequence from ON
You can turn off the operation sounds of the (operation sound on)  OFF (operation
multi-information meter switch and rheostat sound off)  ON (operation sound on).
meter illumination button. The setting is changed to the selected con-
dition.
Type 2 1. Press and hold the multi-information
NOTE 5
more) to switch from the setting mode
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the operation sound setting is erased and is
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
(With ignition switch or operation mode on).
is in ON)” on page 5-99.  The operation sound setting only deactivates
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter the operation sound of the multi-information
3. Press and hold the multi-information switch to select “ ” (operation sound meter switch and rheostat meter illumination
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or setting). button. The warning display and other
sounds cannot be deactivated.
more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
Type 1
guage setting).
switch to select the desired language. Changing the time until “REST
5. Press and hold the multi-information REMINDER” is displayed
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or N00557500134
more) to change the setting to the selected The time until the display appears can be
language. Type 2 changed.
NOTE 1. Press and hold the multi-information

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
the language setting is erased and is automat- more) to switch from the setting mode
ically set to ENGLISH. screen to the menu screen.
 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a Refer to “Changing the function settings
warning message is not displayed when there (With ignition switch or operation mode
is a warning display or interrupt display. is in ON)” on page 5-99.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
Type 1
switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set- switch to select the time until the display
ting). appears.
Type 1
more) to change the setting to the selected
time.
Type 2
5 NOTE
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
Type 2 the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to the “OFF”.
 The drive time is reset when the ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position or the opera-
tion mode is in OFF.
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
Changing the turn signal sound to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal
3. Press and hold the multi-information N00563500041 sound 1)  2 (turn signal sound 2)  1
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or It is possible to change the turn signal sound. (turn signal sound 1).
more) to display “ALARM” (rest time The setting changes to the selected turn-
setting). 1. Press and hold the multi-information signal sound.
to switch from the setting mode screen to Changing the momentary fuel con-
Type 1 Type 2 the menu screen.
sumption display (Type 2)
N00563600039
(With ignition switch or operation mode
is in ON)” on page 5-99. It is possible to change the bar graph setting
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter of the momentary fuel consumption display.
switch to select . (changing the turn
signal sound)

1. Press and hold the multi-information 3. Press and hold the multi-information
Returning to the factory settings
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more meter switch (for about 5 seconds or
N00557600151
to switch from the setting mode screen to more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
the menu screen. All of the function settings can be returned to function settings are returned to the fac-
Refer to “Changing the function settings their factory settings. tory settings.
is in ON)” on page 5-99.
NOTE
more) to switch from the setting mode  The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average
5
switch to select . (changing the screen to the menu screen.
momentary fuel consumption display) speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
or (L/100 km)
is in ON)” on page 5-99.
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or °C
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter (Celsius)
switch to select “RESET” (return to the • Display language: ENGLISH
factory settings). • Cooperative language setting: A
Type 1 • Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
green bar graph (Type 2): ON
Type 2
to switch in sequence from ON (with the
green bar graph)  OFF (without the
green bar graph)  ON (with the green
bar graph).
The setting changes to the selected bar
graph setting.

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557700048
Indicator and warning light list

N00557800267
Type A Type B
5
1- Position indicator  P.5-120 7- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
2- High beam indicator  P.5-120 ing light  P.5-78  P.5-120
3- Charging system warning light  8- Brake warning light  P.5-120 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
P.5-121 9- Cruise control indicator (if so VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
4- Turn signal indicator/hazard warning equipped)  P.5-74 engine light”)  P.5-120
light  P.5-119 10- Seat belt reminder/warning light  14- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Front fog light indicator (if so P.4-16 indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-71
equipped)  P.5-120 11- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 15- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
6- Anti-lock braking system warning light warning light  P.5-71
 P.5-67  P.4-32 16- Information screen display list 
P.5-107

Information screen display list

N00557900082
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in OFF)” on page 5-107.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)” on page 5-110.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-117. 5
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.
Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in OFF)

N00558000224
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key from  Remove the key.
the ignition switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on page
5-30.


 You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (head-
lights and other lights)” on page 5-125.
 The theft-alarm system is operating. Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page 5-34.

5
 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except

for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on
page 5-24.


 There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Trans-
mitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-12.
 There is a fault in the electronic immobi-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

lizer. (Anti-theft starting system). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
— have the system checked.


 The F. A. S. T. -key is not detected.  Insert the F. A. S. T. -key into the key slot
in the glove compartment. Refer to “If the
— F. A. S. T. -key is not operating properly”
on page 5-22.
 You have forgotten to remove the F. A. S.  Remove the F. A. S. T. -key from the key
5 T. -key from the key slot in the glove com- slot in the glove compartment.
— partment.
 The engine switch is pressed to stop the  On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
engine and the selector lever is in a posi- lever in the “P” (PARK) position to put the
— tion other than the “P” (PARK) position. operation mode in OFF.
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible and contact an authorized
— Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice to have the system
checked.
Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)

N00558101365

 The washer fluid is running low.  Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-10.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-5.


 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 5-69.
 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Trans-
mitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-12. 5


 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on
page 5-24.
 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect
5  There is a fault in the brake system. it.
 If the light still illuminates after the inspec-
tion, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
choice for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-121.
 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
system. ing, park the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures. Refer to “Anti-
lock braking system warning” on page
5-67.
 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
spare tire) is low. on page 5-78.
 There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Moni- Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
toring System. on page 5-78.


 One of the doors or the liftgate is not com-  Close the door or liftgate.
pletely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen
The open door is displayed. (With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-99.
 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.

Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3. 5
 There is a fault in the electronic immobi-  Put the operation mode in OFF, and then
lizer (Anti-theft starting system). start the engine again.
— If the warning is not cancelled, please con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 The driver’s door is open when the opera-  Put the operation mode in OFF.
tion mode is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Changing the operation mode”
— on page 5-17.
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
— Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
checked.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.


 The CVT fluid temperature is increased.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)” on page 5-51.
 The seat belt is not fastened when the igni-  Wear your seat belt properly.
5 tion switch or operation mode is in ON. Refer to “Seat belt warning” on page 4-16.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
 The vehicle is being driven with the park-  Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake
ing brake still applied. warning display” on page 5-121.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
system. possible and contact an authorized
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-123.


 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
ity of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning light”
on page 5-121.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors 5
pre-tensioner system. dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS airbag/Pre-tensioner system
warning” on page 4-32.
 There is a fault in the Active stability con-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
trol (ASC). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-70.
 There is a fault in the Hill start assist.  Have the vehicle checked at an authorized
ity of your choice.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 5-65.
 There is a fault in the electronically con-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
trolled 4WD system. dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
system” on page 5-58.


 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “Continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)” on page 5-51.
 The electronically controlled 4WD system Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
5 is hot. tem” on page 5-58.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.

Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen”
on page 5-96.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

less.  The ground may be frozen even when this
warning is not displayed, so drive care-
fully.

Other interrupt displays

N00558200242
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 System operation status Reference

 When starting the engine, you pressed the  On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
engine switch without depressing the the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
clutch pedal (manual transaxle). position, fully depress the clutch pedal,
—
depress and hold the brake pedal with the 5
right foot, and then press the engine switch
to start the engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 5-20.
 When starting the engine, the selector lever  On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) lever in the “P” (PARK) position, depress
or the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you and hold the brake pedal with the right
— pressed the engine switch without depress- foot, and then press the engine switch to
ing the brake pedal (CVT). start the engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 5-20.


The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 System operation status Reference

 When “2WD” drive mode is selected with Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
the drive mode selector. tem” on page 5-58.
5
 When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected
with the drive mode selector.
 When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.
 When the Active stability control (ASC) is Refer to “Active stability control (ASC) ” on
operating. page 5-70.

Indicators
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details, refer
to “Service reminder” on page 5-97.
5
The rest time can be set.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (With the ignition switch or operation mode is in
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer encour-
age you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).
signal lever is used.

Indicators Turn signal indicators/Hazard
N00519900127 warning lights Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
N00520000216 ing flasher switch is pressed.
The arrows will flash in time with the corre-
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn
Warning lights
NOTE Warning lights CAUTION

 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if N00520300147 • When the brake warning light does not go
the indicator stays on without flashing, check out even when the parking brake is
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or released.
turn signal connection.
Brake warning light • When the brake warning light stays on
N00520400470
while driving.
This light comes on when the ignition switch • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
5 High beam indicator is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
N00520100086
the operation mode is put in ON. a safe place, and contact an authorized
When the engine is started, the light should Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
A blue light comes on when the headlights of your choice as soon as possible.
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also
are on high beam.  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
displayed in the multi-information display.
The warning light also illuminates after start- following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.
Front fog light indicator (if so ing the engine under the following condi-
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
equipped) tions.
you press down on the brake pedal harder
N00520200175 than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
 When the parking brake is still applied.
may go all the way to the floor.
This indicator comes on while the front fog  When the brake fluid level is low.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
lights are on.  When the brake system circuit is not
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
working properly. parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
Position indicator Before driving, be sure that the parking brake stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
N00551301081 is fully released and brake warning light is
This indicator light illuminates while the off.
parking lights are on. Engine malfunction indicator
CAUTION (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
ECO mode indicator (if so  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock or “Check engine light”)
braking system warning light are illuminated N00520500804
equipped)
at the same time, the braking force distribu- This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
N00568800023
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
may be destabilized during sudden braking
This indicator will be displayed when fuel- emissions, engine control system or continu-
under the following conditions.
efficient driving is achieved. ously variable transmission (CVT) control

Information screen display

system. If a problem is detected in one of tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
CAUTION (engine off) or the operation mode is put in
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to ON. A warning is also displayed in the multi-
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
the “ON” position or the operation mode is information display. When the engine is
high speeds.
put in ON, this indicator normally comes on During vehicle operation with the indicator started, the light should go out. Check to
and goes off after the engine has started. on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you make sure that the light has gone out before
depress the accelerator pedal. driving.
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
5
indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
CAUTION
more firmly than usual since the engine
 If the warning light stays on while the engine
ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to
as soon as possible and contact an authorized
until you hear clicking sounds.) creep forward.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
If this indicator does not go off after several of your choice to have the system checked.
seconds or lights up while driving, have the
system checked as soon as possible at an NOTE
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the
repair facility of your choice. engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE Information screen display
ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is N00558300038
on.
CAUTION The engine electronic control module stores
Brake warning display
 Driving for a long time with the engine mal- critical OBD information (especially exhaust
N00558400143
function indicator on may cause more dam- emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
age to the emission control system. This tery cable is disconnected while the engine Type 1
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
ity. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If this indicator does not come on when the lems.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
the system checked at an authorized Charging system warning light
N00520600300
of your choice.
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
tion in the charging system or when the igni-

Information screen display

Type 2 When the ignition switch is turned to the
CAUTION
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
displayed.
parking brake.
The warning light in the instrument cluster Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
also illuminates. stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
5 being driven with the parking brake still CAUTION Charging system warning dis-
applied. The warning light in the instrument  If this warning stays on and does not go out
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective play
cluster only comes on when the parking brake
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a N00558600103
is applied. Type 1
safe place, and contact an authorized
CAUTION of your choice.
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the  If the brake warning display, brake warning
parking brake, the brakes will overheat, light, and the Anti-lock braking system
resulting in ineffective braking and possible warning light are illuminated at the same
brake failure. time, the braking force distribution function
If this warning is displayed, release the park- will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta- Type 2
ing brake. bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
braking and high-speed driving. Park the
Type 1 vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
facility of your choice.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance If there is a fault in the charging system, the
is deteriorated. warning display warning is displayed on the
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when information screen in the multi-information
Type 2 you press down on the brake pedal harder display. The warning light in the instrument
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
cluster also illuminates.
may go all the way to the floor.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 If warnings are displayed while the engine is  If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
running, park your vehicle in a safe place as low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
soon as possible and contact an authorized ing is displayed, the engine may overheat becomes foggy. This is the same as when
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility and damage may result. window glass mists up on a humid day, and
of your choice to have the system checked.  If the warning is displayed while the engine does not indicate a problem. When the light
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
as soon as possible and check the engine oil
level.
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
5
Oil pressure warning display Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
 If this warning display comes on when the
N00558700090
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle choice.
Type 1
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Type 1
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

NOTE
 The oil pressure warning display does not
Type 2 show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick.
Combination headlights and

dimmer switch
If the engine oil pressure drops while the N00522501863
engine is running, the warning display is dis-

played on the information screen in the multi- Headlights
information display.
The combinations of switch operations and
NOTE illuminated lights differ in accordance with
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights the following conditions.
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.

Except for vehicles equipped with day- NOTE Type 2

time running lights  Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
OFF All lights off turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
ACC.
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
5 Headlights and other lights on
[When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is started before the parking brake is
released]
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
lights OFF All lights off
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
[When the engine is started after the parking marker lights, license plate and
brake is released] instrument panel lights on
The combinations of switch operations and
The daytime running lights illumi- Headlights and other lights on illuminated lights differ in accordance with
OFF the following conditions.
nated
The daytime running lights illumi- NOTE Except for vehicles equipped with day-
nated time running lights
 Even if the daytime running lights are not on,
Parking, tail, front and rear side- they will come on once the vehicle starts
marker lights, license plate and moving. OFF All lights off
instrument panel lights on  Once the daytime running light come on,
Headlights and other lights turn on
Headlights and other lights on they do not go out until the ignition switch is
AUTO and off automatically in accordance
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or with outside light level.
ACC. Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on


[When the engine is not running, or when the
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
engine is started before the parking brake is
NOTE
lights  Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
released]
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
[When the engine is started after the parking the windshield.
brake is released] OFF All lights off
The daytime running lights illumi- AUTO and off automatically in accordance
OFF
nated with outside light level. 5
The daytime running lights illumi- Parking, tail, front and rear side-
nated (when it is light outside the marker lights, license plate and
vehicle) instrument panel lights on
AUTO
and off automatically in accordance  If the lights do not turn on or off with the
with outside light level. switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
operate the switch. Have the system checked
The daytime running lights illumi- NOTE by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
nated  Even if the daytime running lights are not on, a repair facility of your choice.
Parking, tail, front and rear side- they will come on once the vehicle starts
marker lights, license plate and moving.
instrument panel lights on  Once the daytime running light come on, Light auto-cutout function
they do not go out until the ignition switch is (headlights and other lights)
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or N00532601593
the operation mode is changed to OFF or  If the following operation is performed
ACC.
NOTE with the combination headlights and dim-
 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
 Once the daytime running light come on, trol can be adjusted. mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is For further information, please contact your the lights automatically turn off.
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
the operation mode is changed to OFF or repair facility of your choice. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
ACC. F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- [Except for vehicles equipped with the
key] F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE
 When the engine is started using the key, if
The operation mode is changed to OFF or The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
the driver’s door is opened and the key is
ACC and the driver’s door is opened. or “ACC” position or the key is removed
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer
from the ignition switch and the driver’s intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If
When using a key to start the engine door is not opened. the key is still in the ignition switch the key
• If the driver’s door is opened after the reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low-
key is removed from the ignition switch, [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
5 a high-pitched constant tone will sound key]
pitched sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
to remind you to turn off the lights. The operation mode is changed to OFF or closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
• If the driver’s door is opened with the ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. multi-information display.)
key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched  When the engine is started using the
beep will sound to remind you to remove F.A.S.T.-key, if the driver’s door is opened
NOTE and the operation mode is put in OFF, the
the key.  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti- headlight reminder buzzer intermittently
vated. emits a high-pitched sound. If the operation
When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors mode is in any mode other than OFF, the
the engine dealer for details. operation mode on reminder buzzer intermit-
• If the operation mode is put in OFF and tently emits a low-pitched sound.
the driver’s door is opened, a high- The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
pitched constant buzzer will sound to When you want to keep the lights closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
remind you to turn off the lights. multi-information display.)
on:
• If the operation mode is changed to any
mode other than OFF and the driver’s
If the combination headlights and dimmer
door is opened, a low-pitched constant Headlight reminder buzzer
buzzer will sound to remind you to put switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi- N00549800226
the operation mode in OFF. tion again after the engine is turned off, the
about 3-minute auto-cutout function [When using a key to start the engine]
 If the following operation is performed described above will not work. The lights (the If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
with the combination headlights and dim- parking lights, tail lights and license plate the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- from the ignition switch while the lights are
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
matically. on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
the lights automatically turn off after
off the lights.
about 3 minutes.


[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
engine]
Welcome light
N00563201247
If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the This function turns on the front side-marker
operation mode is changed to OFF while the and parking lights for about 30 seconds after
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con-
you to turn off the lights. trol transmitter is pressed when the combina-
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the
In either case, the lights will turn off automat- “OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles 5
ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn equipped with the automatic light control).
the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop On vehicles equipped with the automatic light
the tone. control, the welcome light function will oper-
ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle.
Headlight flasher
Dimmer (high/low beam N00550000185
change) You can flash the high beams by pulling the

N00549900142 lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
To change the headlights from high beam to go back to normal when you let go. While the
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low the instrument panel.
beam as a courtesy whenever there are
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic NOTE
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue  You can flash the high beams by pulling the
light in the instrument cluster indicates when lever toward you, even if the light switch is
the headlights are on high beam. off.
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights NOTE
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
 While the welcome light function is operat-
are automatically returned to their low-beam
ing, perform one of the following operations
setting when the light switch is next turned
to cancel the function.
to the “ ” position.


1. Turn the combination headlights and dim- 4. The headlights will come on in the low
NOTE mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO” beam setting for about 30 seconds. After
• Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote
position (for vehicles equipped with the the headlights go off, the headlights can
control transmitter.
automatic light control). be turned on again in the low beam setting
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
position or put the operation mode in signal lever toward you within 60 seconds
OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the of turning the ignition switch to the
engine, remove the key from the ignition “OFF” position or putting the operation
5 switch. mode in OFF. To turn on the headlights
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition again after 60 seconds of turning the igni-
switch to the “OFF” position or putting tion switch to the “OFF” position or put-
the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn ting the operation mode in OFF, repeat the
• Turn the combination headlights and dim- signal lever toward you. process from step 1.
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON. NOTE
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:  While the coming home light function is
• The headlights can be set to come on in the operating, perform one of the following
low beam setting. operations to cancel the function.
• The welcome light function can be deacti- • Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
vated. • Turn the combination headlights and dim-
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position
dealer. or put the operation mode in ON.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
Coming home light  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
N00547301123
• The time that the headlights remain on can
This function turns on the headlights in the be changed.
low beam setting for about 30 seconds after • The coming home light function can be
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” deactivated.
position or the operation mode is put in OFF. For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

indicator light in the instrument cluster will
Headlight leveling switch (if WARNING flash three times.
 To avoid distraction while driving, always
so equipped)
perform headlight adjustments before
N00537100105
vehicle operation.
The direction of the headlight beam (the
direction in which the light shines) alters
according to the number of people and the NOTE
load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle  Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0” 5
if it is too high due to the number of people position (when the beam is at its highest).
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-  Keep the knob in the “0” position except
when using the knob to lower the headlight
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
beam angle.
approaching vehicles. First set the light
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
switch to the “ ” position, then turn the when the load is removed and the people
headlight leveling switch knob to lower the have left the vehicle.
beam. The greater the number on the head-
NOTE
light leveling switch knob, the lower the  A light in the instrument panel flashes to
show when the front and rear turn signal
beam will point. Turn signal lever lights are working properly.
Set the switch to the appropriate position so If this light flashes faster than usual, check
N00522601532
that the headlight beam is level with the road. for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
functioning connection in the signal.
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
If the panel light does not come on when the
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
when you let go. Use the full position (2) burned out bulb in the panel.
when making a normal turn. The lever will Have the system inspected by your autho-
return to the neutral position when the turn is rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
complete. There may be times when the lever facility of your choice.
does not return to the neutral position. This  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
usually happens when the steering wheel is • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
turned only slightly. You can easily return the function for lane changes.
lever by hand.
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly
then release it, the turn signal lights and the

Hazard warning flasher switch
NOTE NOTE NOTE

• Adjust the time required to operate the  If the flashers are used for several hours, the  If the headlights are switched to high beam,
lever for the 3-flash function. battery will run down. This could make it the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. minate again when the headlights are
dealer for details. switched back to low beam.
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
Hazard warning flasher Front fog light switch (if so “ ” position while the front fog lights are
5 illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
switch equipped) They can be turned back on again by rotating
N00522700275 N00522800393 the combination headlights and dimmer
switch back to “ ” position, and turning
The front fog lights illuminate only when the the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
headlights are on low beam. tion.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
position turns on the front fog lights as well fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
the “OFF” position.
The knob will return to the neutral position Wiper and washer switch
when it is released.
N00523001764
If you press the flasher switch, the front and CAUTION

rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
emergency warning system and should not be freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for the glass with the defroster before using the
emergencies. washer.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
will keep working after the ignition switch is
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.

Wiper and washer switch
Windshield wipers
NOTE
 To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
window wiper will automatically perform
several continuous operations if the gearshift
lever or the selector lever is put in the “R”
position while the windshield wipers are
5
operating.
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-135. MIST- Misting function 1- Fast
The wipers will operate once. 2- Slow
OFF- Off
Except for vehicle with rain sensor INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
LO- Slow NOTE
HI- Fast  The speed-sensitive-operation function of
The windshield wiper and washer can be the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
operated with the ignition switch or the oper- For further information, please contact your
ation mode is in ON or ACC. To adjust intermittent intervals authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do repair facility of your choice.
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper intermittent operation) position, the intermit- Misting function
motor may be damaged. tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
knob (A). The misting function can be used when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
released. This operation is useful when it is
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
position.


Wiper operation under these conditions can
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
ers.
MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
Vehicle with rain sensor OFF- Off
INT- Auto-wiper control
The windshield wipers can be operated with Rain sensor
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in The wipers will automatically oper- CAUTION
ON or ACC. ate depending on the degree of wet-  With the ignition switch or the operation
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or ness on the windshield. mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO”
LO- Slow position, the wipers may automatically oper-
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
HI- Fast ate in the situations described below.
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
• When cleaning the outside surface of the
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor.
Rain sensor (if so equipped) • When cleaning the outside surface of the
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain
Can only be used when the ignition switch or sensor.
the operation mode is in ON. • When using an automatic car wash.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the • A physical shock is applied to the wind-
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain shield.
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the • A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
wipers will operate automatically. sor.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.

CAUTION NOTE
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer  The wipers may automatically operate when
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be things such as insects or foreign objects are
sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
position or put the operation mode in OFF, or sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
move the lever to the “OFF” position to Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
deactivate the rain sensor. the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
them. To operate the wipers again, move the
lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
5
NOTE Also, the wipers may operate automatically
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
operation of the wipers does not take place
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- lever to the “OFF” position. “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
ent temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
lower, even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” dealer or a repair facility of your choice
position. when replacing the windshield glass. NOTE
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker  Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sen- can be changed to intermittent operation,
any water-repellent coating on the wind- sor either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to speed sensitive.
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) For further information, please contact your
might stop working normally. position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
 In the following cases, the rain sensor may of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B). repair facility of your choice.
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or Misting function
• When the wipers operate at a constant inter- Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
val despite changes in the extent of rain. and release, to operate the wipers once.
• When the wipers do not operate even Use this function when you are driving in
though it is raining. mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-

tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
“MIST” position.
Windshield washer NOTE
N00504601383 These functions are not activated when the
The windshield washer can be operated with vehicle is shipped from the factory.
To activate or deactivate these functions,
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
please contact your authorized Mitsubishi
ON or ACC.
Motors dealer.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
5 When the wipers are not in operation or in Intelligent washer
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
toward you, the wipers will operate several By releasing the lever soon after pulling it
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed. toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed
several times while the wipers are operating
several times.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is Intelligent washer will stop operating with
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob any operation of the lever.
(C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON.
NOTE
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• Intelligent washer can be activated.
Refer to “Intelligent washer” on page
5-134.
• The wipers can be set to operate again after
about 6 seconds.

Rear window wiper and washer NOTE NOTE

N00523201421  The rear window wiper will automatically  The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
The rear window wiper and washer can be perform several continuous operations if the engine compartment.
operated when the ignition switch or the gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
operation mode is in ON or ACC. the “R” position while the windshield wipers necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page
or the rear window wiper is operating.(auto- 9-10.)
Turn the knob to operate the rear window matic operation mode)
wiper. After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is Precautions to observe when 5
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the using wipers and washers
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will N00523501307
return to the intermittent operation.
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to CAUTION
perform the automatic operation only if the  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might
the “R” position while the rear window freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass
wiper is operating with the knob in the with the defroster before using the washer.
“INT” position.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
NOTE
OFF- Off knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to  Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
INT- The wiper operates continuously for operate the rear window wiper continuously. dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
several seconds then operates inter- (continuous operation mode) wiper blades prematurely.
mittently at intervals of about 8 sec- Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop  Before using the wipers in cold weather,
onds. the rear window wiper continuous operation. check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
 The wiper intermittent operation time can be frozen to the windshield or rear window.
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
rear window glass while the knob is adjusted.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
turned fully in either direction.
dealer for details.
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the
wiper will automatically operate 2 or
3 times.

Electric rear window defogger switch

The indicator light (A) will come on when
NOTE you press the electric rear window defogger
CAUTION
 If the moving wipers become blocked part-  Use the rear window defogger only after the
switch. Electric current will flow through the
way through a sweep by ice or other deposits engine has started and is running. Be sure to
heating wires on the rear window to help
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop turn the defogger switch off immediately
operating to prevent the motor from over- clear away moisture or frost. after the window is clear to save on battery
heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a power.
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the  Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
5 “OFF” position or put the operation mode in
OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-
that are attached with adhesive over the grid
wires on the rear window.
its.  When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
Because the wipers will start operating again soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid
after the wiper motor cools down, check that wires.
the wipers operate before using them.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer NOTE
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
 As your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
the pump may fail.
rors, mist can also be removed from the out-
 During cold weather, add a recommended side rearview mirrors when the rear window
washer solution that will not freeze in the After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer tem will shut off automatically.
mirror heater” on page 5-46.)
may not work or may be damaged. To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
 Replace the wiper blades when they are utes have passed, press the switch again. The
worn. Use the proper size replacement indicator light will go out and the defogger
blades. For further information, please con- will turn off. Horn switch
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors If you need the defogger for more than 20 N00523801209
dealer. minutes, press the switch again. This will add To honk the horn, press around the “ ”
20 more minutes. mark on the steering wheel.
Electric rear window defog-
ger switch CAUTION
N00523700373
 The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
The rear window defogger can be used when before using the rear window defogger.
the engine is running.

Link System (if so equipped)

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of hands-free calls with simple switch opera-
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. tions and voice command operations using a
defined voice tree.
Link System End User License The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
Agreement when the ignition switch or the operation
N00563801067 mode is set to ON or ACC.
You have acquired a device that includes
software licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Cor- Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- 5
poration from Visteon Corporation, and their face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a com- and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-
plete list of these 3rd party products and their
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
end user license agreements, please go to the
Link System (if so equipped)
following website. Bluetooth® device” on page 5-144.
N00563701141
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
closure.pdf Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
The Link System takes overall control of the BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
devices connected via the USB input terminal
or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so WARNING
connected devices to be operated by using the equipped)
switches in the vehicle or voice commands.  Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
N00563901332 allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
See the following section for details on how
choose to use the cellular phone while
to operate. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak- driving, you must not allow yourself to be
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle distracted from the safe operation of your
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page vehicle. Anything, including cellular
5-137. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
phone usage, that distracts you from the
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-160. based on the wireless communication tech-
safe operation of your vehicle increases
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It your risk of an accident.
Device” on page 7-46. also allows the user to play music, saved in a  Refer to and comply with all state and
Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s local laws in your area regarding cellular
tracks via voice operation” on page 7-49. speakers. phone usage while driving.
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
7-52. tion function, which allows you to make
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Steering control switch and

 If the ignition switch or the operation mode  For details of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, microphone
is left in ACC, the accessory power will refer to the following web site: N00564001167
automatically turn off after a certain period [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
of time and you will no longer be able to use You can see to access the Mitsubishi Motors
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory North America website.
power comes on again if the ignition switch [For vehicles sold in Canada and MEXICO]
5 or the engine switch is operated. Refer to
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page
You can see to access via the Mitsubishi
Motors website.
5-47. Please read and agree to the “Warning about
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”.
The websites mentioned above may connect
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
or the device power is turned off.
Motors website.
 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
phone does not have service available. ucts/index.html
 If you place the Bluetooth® device in the  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
luggage compartment, you may not be able audio device manufacturers may
to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. change/alter device connectivity.
1- Volume up button
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
Steering control switch and microphone  2- Volume down button
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 3- SPEECH button
P.5-138
 You can confirm the Link System software 4- PICK-UP button
Voice recognition function  P.5-140
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
Useful voice commands  P.5-140 5- HANG-UP button
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
Speaker enrollment function  P.5-142 6- Microphone
briefly) within 10 seconds.
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
the Bluetooth® device  P.5-144
Volume up button
Operating a music player connected via Blue-
tooth®  P.5-150
Press this button to increase the volume.
How to make or receive hands-free calls 
P.5-150
Phonebook function  P.5-153


 If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
Volume down button PICK-UP button
nition mode, the voice recognition mode
 Press this button when an incoming call is will be deactivated.
Press this button to decrease the volume.
received to answer the telephone.
NOTE
SPEECH button NOTE  When you press the SPEECH button (except
 When not receiving incoming calls, pressing for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
 Press this button to activate voice recogni-
tion mode.
the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for 5
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
While the system is in voice recognition System, will activate the voice recognition of tion System) to enter voice recognition mode
mode, “Listening” will appear on the the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. with a cellular phone paired to the system,
audio display. current information on the cellular phone,
such as “remaining battery life,” “signal
 When another call is received during a
NOTE strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on
call, press this button to put the first caller the audio display.*
 On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
Multi-Communication System, pressing the
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec- • In such circumstances, you can press the information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc- button briefly to switch between callers.  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
cessfully activated). To use the voice You will switch to the first caller and the
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, other caller will be put on hold. possible to use those services with your cel-
press the PICK-UP button. • To establish a three-way call in such sit- lular phone.
uations, press the SPEECH button to
enter voice recognition mode and then
 If you press the button briefly while in
say “Join calls.” Microphone
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt
prompting and allow voice command
input. HANG-UP button Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
Pressing the button longer will deactivate phone in the overhead console, allowing you
the voice recognition mode.  Press this button when an incoming call is
to make hands-free calls with voice com-
 Pressing this button briefly during a call received to refuse the call.
mands.
will enable voice recognition and allow  Press this button during a call to end the
voice command input. current call.
When another call is on hold, you will
switch to that call.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If a cellular phone is within close proximity  For best performance and further reduction  The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
of the microphone, it may distort the sound of ambient noise, the vehicle windows sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone should be closed before pressing the rent language, and the second message is in
as far as possible from the microphone. SPEECH button (except for vehicles with the selected language.
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System)  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
or PICK-UP button (for vehicles with Mit- phonebook, changing the language will take
5 Voice recognition function subishi Multi-Communication System) while
engaging the voice recognition function.
a longer time.
 Changing the language deletes the mobile
N00564101155
 Some voice commands have alternative phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
® commands.
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
with a voice recognition function.  Depending on the selected language, some to import it again.
Simply say voice commands and you can per- functions may not be available.
form various operations and make or receive
6. When the voice guide says “English
hands-free calls. Selecting the language (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
the language change process will be com-
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- pleted and the system will return to the
ognition is possible for US English, North
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for main menu.
American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-
anese. The factory setting is “English.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System). Useful voice commands
2. Say “Setup.”
NOTE N00564200016
3. Say “Language.”
 If the voice command that you say differs
from the predefined command or cannot be
4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan- Help function
recognized due to ambient noise or some guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa- N00564301030
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface

nese.” Say the desired language.
(Example: “English”) The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
will ask you for the voice command again up
5. The voice guide will say “English (Span- with a help function.
to 3 times.
ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this If you say “Help” when the system is waiting
correct?” Say “Yes.” for a voice command input, the system will
If you say “No,” the system will return to tell you a list of the commands that can be
Step 4. used under the existing circumstances.


2. Say “Setup.” 2. Say “Setup.”
Canceling
3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” 3. Say “Passcode.”
N00564401057
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
There are 2 cancel functions. prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to abled. Would you like to enable it?”
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.” Answer “Yes.”
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Answer “Yes” to change the setting or Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
If you are anywhere else within the system, answer “No” to keep the current setting. passcode and return to the main menu.
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
5
NOTE tem will return to the main menu. It will be required to use this system.”
 You can return to the previous menu by say- Say a 4-digit number which you want to
ing “Go Back.” (if so equipped) Security function set as a passcode.
N00564601150
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
It is possible to use a passcode as a security code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
Confirmation function setting function by setting a passcode of your choice
N00564501045
Answer “No” to return to the passcode
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. input in Step 5.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped When the security function is turned on, it is 7. When the registration of the passcode is
with a confirmation function. necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
With the confirmation function activated, you passcode in order to use all functions of the code is enabled” and the system will
are given more opportunities than normal to Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except when receiv- return to the main menu.
confirm a command when making various ing calls.
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This
allows you to decrease the possibility that a Setting the passcode NOTE
 Passcode will be required to access the sys-
setting is accidentally changed.
Use the following procedure to turn on the tem after the next ignition cycle.
The confirmation function can be turned on
security function by setting a passcode.
or off by following the steps below.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
nication System).
nication System).
NOTE NOTE Speaker enrollment function

 It is required for a little time after engine  If you have forgotten your passcode, say N00564701021
stop that the entered passcode is actually “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
recorded in the system. then check with an authorized Mitsubishi
If the ignition switch or the operation mode Motors dealer. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is model for one person per language.
started immediately after engine stop, there Disabling the passcode This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0
5 is a case when the entered passcode is not
recorded in the system. At this time, please Use the following procedure to turn off the
interface to recognize voice commands said
by you.
try to enter the passcode again. security function by disabling the passcode. You can turn a voice model registered with
the speaker enrollment function on and off
Entering the passcode
NOTE whenever you want.
If a passcode has been set and the security  System must be unlocked to disable the pass-
function is enabled, the voice guide will say code. Speaker enrollment
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- N00564801123
code to continue” when the SPEECH button 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
(except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- speaker enrollment process.
Communication System) or PICK-UP button nication System) or PICK-UP button (for To ensure the best results, run through the
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- nication System). ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 2. Say “Setup.” there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
number to enter the passcode. 3. Say “Passcode.” cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect enabled. Would you like to disable it?” interruption of the process.
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct Answer “Yes.” Use the following procedure for speaker
passcode. Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of enrollment.
the passcode and return to the main menu.
NOTE 5. When the disabling of the passcode is
 You can reenter the passcode as many times completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
as you want. code is disabled” and the system will
return to the main menu.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the 6. When all enrollment commands have
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
NOTE been read out, the voice guide will say
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment
tion (manual transaxle), or the selector “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The
process within 3 minutes after pressing the
lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin- system will then end the speaker enroll-
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment
uously variable transmission (CVT)), and function will time out. ment process and return to the main
pull the parking brake lever. The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll- menu.
ment has timed out.” The system will then
NOTE NOTE
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.  Completing the speaker enrollment process
5
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the will turn on the voice model automatically.
vehicle in a safe area before attempting  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
speaker enrollment. 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
work in this mode.
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
table “Enrollment commands” on page
2. Press the SPEECH button (except for 5-160.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Enabling and disabling the voice
The system will register your voice and
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for then move on to the registration of the model and retraining
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- next command. Continue the process until N00564901081
nication System). all phrases have been registered. You can turn a voice model registered with
3. Say “Voice training.” the speaker enrollment function on and off
4. The voice guide will say “This operation NOTE whenever you want.
must be performed in a quiet environment  To repeat the most recent voice training You can also retrain the system.
while the vehicle is stopped. See the command, press and release the SPEECH Use the following procedure to perform these
owner’s manual for the list of required button. actions.
training phrases. Press and release the  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
SPEECH button when you are ready to during the process, the system will beep and 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- stop the speaker enrollment process. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
cel at any time.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
Press the SPEECH button to start the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
speaker enrollment process. nication System).
2. Say “Voice training.”


3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-  Pairing procedure- Type 1 (if so
ment process once already, the voice
NOTE
 Pairing is required only when the device is equipped)
guide will say either “Enrollment is
used for the first time. Once the device has
enabled. Would you like to disable or 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled. been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
face, all you need is to bring the device into gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
Would you like to enable or retrain?” tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
the vehicle next time and the device will
4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
model is on; when enrollment is “dis-
5 abled,” the voice model is off. Say the
matically (if supported by the device). The uously variable transmission (CVT)), and
pull the parking brake lever.
device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to
command that fits your needs.
connect.
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll- NOTE
ment process and recreate a new voice
 You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
page 5-142.) with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
interface and Bluetooth® device music player most recently connected is auto- location.
N00565001311 matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
Before you can make or receive hands-free interface. 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
interface function, you must pair the Blue- You can also change a Bluetooth® device to nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
be connected. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
nication System).
To pair 3. Say “Setup.”
4. Say “Pairing Options.”
5. The voice guide will say “Select one of
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
tooth® 2.0 interface, use either one of the fol- Say “Pair.”
lowing 2 methods (Type 1 or Type 2).

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If 7 devices have already been paired, the  The pairing code entered here is only used  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
voice guide will say “Maximum devices for the Bluetooth® connection certification. guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
paired” and then the system will end the It is any 4-digit number the user would like ing process will be cancelled.
pairing process. To register a new device, to select. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
delete one device and then repeat the pairing Remember the pairing code as it needs to be it again.
process.
keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the
8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
device” on page 5-147.)
pairing process.
name of the device after the beep.” You
5
Depending on the connection settings of the
can assign a desired name for the Blue-
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- entered each time you connect the Blue- tooth® device and register it as a device
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- tag. Say the name you want to register
When the confirmation function is on, the face. For the default connection settings, after the beep.
system will confirm whether the number refer to the instructions for the device.
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” NOTE
Answer “No” to return to the pairing code 7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing  When the confirmation function is on, after
selection. procedure on the device. See the device repeating the device tag you have said, the
manual for instructions.” Enter in the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”
NOTE Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you Answer “Yes.”
have registered in Step 6. To change the device tag, answer “No” and
 Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific then say the device tag again.
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
ual for pairing code requirements. NOTE
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- plete,” and the pairing process will end.
tooth® 2.0 interface.
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-
ing process will be cancelled.
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.

 Pairing procedure- Type 2 (if so NOTE NOTE

equipped)  The pairing code entered here is only used
 The following procedure ( to ) can also
be used instead of saying “Pair Device.” for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
Replace this step 3 with the following proce- Depending on the connection settings of the
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi- dure if you prefer. Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
Say “Setup.” entered each time you connect the Blue-
lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
Say “Pairing Options.” tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
5 uously variable transmission (CVT)), and
pull the parking brake lever. The voice guide will say “Select one of face. For the default connection settings,
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” refer to the instructions for the device.
Say “Pair.”
NOTE  If 7 devices have already been paired, the 5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit
 You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with voice guide will say “Maximum devices number that has been read out in Step 4.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi- paired” and then the system will end the
cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® pairing process. To register a new device, NOTE
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,  Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may
process.
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
location. tooth® 2.0 interface.
device” on page 5-147.)
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
2. Press the SPEECH button (except for 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- procedure on the device. See the device will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ing process will be cancelled.
manual for instructions.” and then will
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
say “The pairing code is <pairing code>.”
nication System). ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
3. Say “Pair Device.” NOTE
 Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
ual for pairing code requirements and read
the next section “If your device requires a
specific pairing code” on page 5-147 to set
the pairing code.


7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com- Answer “No,” the system will return to
NOTE plete. Would you like to import the con- Step 6.
 If you enter the wrong number, the voice
tacts from your mobile device now?” 8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to
guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the
ing process will be cancelled.
Confirm the number is right, and try pairing say “Please wait while the contacts are system will proceed to Step 3 in the pair-
it again. imported. This may take several minutes.” ing process. Refer to the “Pairing proce-
If your device requires a specific pairing Answer “No” to end the pairing process. dure- Type 2.”
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
to the device manual for pairing code
5
If your device requires a specific pairing Selecting a device
requirements and read the next section “If
code N00565101110
your device requires a specific pairing code”
on page 5-147. ®
If your device requires a specific pairing If multiple paired Bluetooth devices are
code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
6. The voice guide will say “Please say the music player most recently connected is auto-
name of the device after the beep.” You the procedures below.
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
can assign a desired name for the Blue- 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for interface.
tooth® device and register it as a device vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- You can connect to the other paired cellular
tag. Say the name you want to register nication System) or PICK-UP button (for phone or music player by following the set-
after the beep. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- ting change procedures.
nication System).
NOTE 2. Say “Setup.” To select a cellular phone
 When the confirmation function is on, after 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
repeating the device tag you have said, the 4. Say “Set Code.” 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” 5. The voice guide will say “Do you want vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Answer “Yes.”
the pairing code to be random or fixed?” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
Say “Fixed.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
then say the device tag again.
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- nication System).
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. 2. Say “Setup.”
7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set 3. Say “Select phone.”
to <pairing code>.”
When the confirmation function is on, the
system will confirm whether the number
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”

4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
the numbers of the cellular phones and
To select a music player NOTE
 You can connect to a music player at any
device tags of corresponding cellular 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for time by pressing the SPEECH button and
phones will be read out in order, starting vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- saying the number, even before all of the
with the cellular phone that has been most nication System) or PICK-UP button (for paired numbers and device tags of corre-
recently connected. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- sponding music players are read out by the
Say the number of the cellular phone that nication System). system.
you want to connect to.
5 When the confirmation function is on, the
2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Select music player.”
system will ask you again whether the 5. The selected music player will be con-
phone that you want to connect to is cor- the numbers of the music players and nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con- device tags of corresponding music play- The voice guide will say “<device tag>
nect to the cellular phone. ers will be read out in order, starting with selected” and then the system will return
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will the music player that has been most to the main menu.
say “Please say.” Say the number of the recently connected.
phone that you want to connect to. Say the number of the music player that Deleting a device
you want to connect to.
NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the Use the following procedure to delete a
 You can connect to a phone at any time by system will ask you again whether the paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue-
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the music player that you want to connect to tooth® 2.0 interface.
number, even before all of the paired num- is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
connect to the music player.
lar phones are read out by the system.
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
say “Please say.” Say the number of the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
5. The selected phone will be connected to music player that you want to connect to. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice nication System).
guide will say “<device tag> selected” 2. Say “Setup.”
and then the system will return to the 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
main menu. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
Say “Delete.”


To check a paired Bluetooth® NOTE
the numbers of the devices and device
tags of corresponding devices will be read device  If you press and release the SPEECH button
N00565201049 and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
out in order, starting with the device that
list is being read, the system will advance or
has been most recently connected. After it You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by rewind the list.
completes reading all pairs, the voice following the steps below. Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with
guide will say “or all.” the next highest number or “Previous” to
Say the number of the device that you 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
want to delete from the system. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
return to the phone with the previous num-
ber.
5
If you want to delete all paired phones nication System) or PICK-UP button (for  You can change the device tag by pressing
from the system, say “All.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- and releasing the SPEECH button and then
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice nication System). saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
guide will say “Deleting <device tag> 2. Say “Setup.”  You can change the phone to be connected
<number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting 3. Say “Pairing Options.” by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of ton and then saying “Select phone” while the
all devices. Is this correct?”
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” list is being read.
Answer “Yes” to delete the device(s).
Say “List.”  You can change the music player to be con-
Answer “No,” the system will return to
nected by pressing and releasing the
Step 4. 5. The voice guide will read out device tags
SPEECH button and then saying “Select
7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and of corresponding devices in order, starting
music player” while the list is being read.
then the system will end the device dele- with the Bluetooth® device that has been
tion process. most recently connected.
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue- Changing a device tag
NOTE tooth® devices have been read, the system N00565301040
 If the device deletion process fails for some will say “End of list, would you like to You can change the device tag of a paired
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete start from the beginning?”
failed” and then the system will cancel delet- cellular phone or music player.
To hear the list again from the beginning, Follow the steps below to change a device
ing the device.
answer “Yes.” tag.
When you are done, answer “No” to


1. Press the SPEECH button (except for When the confirmation function is on, the
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
AUDIO
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer “No,” you can say the new device Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
nication System). tag you want to register again.
2. Say “Setup.” 7. The device tag is changed.
3. Say “Pairing Options.” When the change is complete, the voice How to make or receive hands-
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “New name saved” and free calls
5 the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” then the system will return to the main N00565500087
Say “Edit.” menu. You can make or receive hands-free calls

5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth® Operating a music player con- connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
devices and device tags of corresponding
devices in order, starting with the Blue-
nected via Bluetooth® You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-
N00565401126 tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without
tooth® that has been most recently con- dialing telephone numbers.
For the operation of a music player connected
nected.
After all paired device tags have been via Bluetooth®, refer to the following sec- To make a call P.5-151
read, the voice guide will say “Which tions. Send function P.5-152
device, please?” Say the number of the Receiving calls P.5-152
For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM
device tag you want to change. Mute function P.5-153
radio/CD player
Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
NOTE Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so vate mode P.5-153
 You can press and release the SPEECH but- equipped)” on page 7-52.
ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
ately say the number of the device tag you
NOTE
want to change. For vehicles equipped with the  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- when you place or receive the call directly
tem (MMCS) from your cellular phone, instead of using
6. The voice guide will say “New name, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
please.” Say the name you want to regis- Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
ter as a new device tag.


To change the telephone number, answer
To make a call NOTE
“No.” The system will say “Number
N00565601128  If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone-
please” then say the telephone number
You can make a call in the following 3 ways book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
again.
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:
book is empty. Would you like to add a new
- By saying a telephone number
NOTE entry now?”
- By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
 In the case of English, the system will recog-
phonebook
- By redialing a telephone number
nize both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for “Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle
5
the number “0.”
phonebook.
Making a call by using the telephone  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- Answer “No,” the system will return to the
bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *). main menu.
number
 The maximum supported telephone number
You can make a call by saying the telephone length is as follows:
number. • International telephone number: + and tele- 3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”
phone numbers (to 18 digits). say the name you want to call, from those
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for • Except for international telephone number: registered in the phonebook.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- telephone numbers (to 19 digits). 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for proceed to Step 5.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Making a call using a phonebook If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
nication System). guide will say “More than one match was
2. Say “Dial.” You can make calls using the vehicle phone- found, would you like to call <returned
3. After the voice guide says “Number book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® name>.” If that person is the one you want
please,” say the telephone number. 2.0 interface. to call, answer “Yes.”
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num- For details on the phonebooks, refer to Answer “No,” the name of the next
ber recognized>.” “Phonebook function” on page 5-153. matching person will be uttered by the
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then voice guide.
make the call.
When the confirmation function is on, the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for  If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-
system will confirm the telephone number vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
again. To continue with that number, nication System). found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
answer “Yes.” 2. Say “Call.” tem will return to the main menu.


5. If only 1 telephone number is registered 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF
under the name you just said, the voice <location>” and then the system will dial tones.
guide will proceed to Step 6. the telephone number. For example, if during a call you need to sim-
If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- ulate the pressing of a phone button as a
tered that match the name you just said, NOTE response to an automated system, press the
the voice guide will say “Would you like  When the confirmation function is on, the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound
to call <name> at [home], [work], system will check if the name and location of send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel-
[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- lular phone.
5 to call. rect, answer “Yes.”
To change the name or location to call,
answer “No.” The system will return to Step Receiving calls
NOTE 3. N00565801058
 If the name you selected has matching data
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
If an incoming phone call is received while
number is registered under the selected loca- the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
Redialing position, the audio system will be automati-
tion, the voice guide will say
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for You can redial the last number called, based cally turned on and switched to the incoming
<name>. Would you like to add location or on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- call, even when the audio system was origi-
try again?”
lular phone. nally off.
Say “Try again,” and the system will return The voice guide announcement for the
to Step 3.
Use the following procedure to redial.
incoming call will be emitted from the front
Say “Add location” and you can register an passenger’s seat speaker.
additional telephone number under the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If the CD player or radio was playing when
selected location.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for the incoming call was received, the audio sys-
 If the name you selected has matching data
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tem will mute the sound from the CD player
number is registered under the selected loca- nication System). or radio and emit only the incoming call.
tion, the voice guide will say 2. Say “Redial.” To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for on the steering wheel control switch.
<name>. Would you like to try again?” When the call is over, the audio system will
Send function
Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to return to its previous state.
N00565700018
Step 3.
Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled. During a call, press the SPEECH button to
Start over again from Step 1. enter voice recognition mode, then say


are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile  To register a telephone number in
Mute function
phonebook.
N00565900010 the vehicle phonebook
These phonebooks are used to register tele- N00580500062
At any time during a call, you can mute the phone numbers and make calls to desired
vehicle microphone. You can register a telephone number in the
numbers via voice recognition function.
Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:
“Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute Reading out a telephone number, and select-
function and mute the microphone. NOTE ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from
Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn  Disconnecting the battery cable will not the phonebook of the cellular phone. 5
delete information registered in the phone-
off the mute function and cancel the mute on
book.
the microphone.  To register by reading out a tele-
phone number
Switching between hands-free Vehicle phonebook
N00580600092

mode and private mode N00566101146
N00566600014
This phonebook is used when making calls nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System).
and private mode (calls using cellular phone). cle phonebook per language. 2. Say “Phonebook.”
If you press the SPEECH button and say Also, each entry has 4 locations associated 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
“Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you with: home, work, mobile and other. You can the following: new entry, edit number,
can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri- register one telephone number for each loca- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
vate mode. tion. import contact.” Say “New entry.”
To return to hands-free mode, press the 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
SPEECH button again and say “Transfer You can register a desired name as a name for Say your preferred name to register it.
call.” any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle
phonebook.
Names and telephone numbers can be
Phonebook function changed later on.
N00566000018
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all
The Bluetooth®2.0 interface has 2 types of
paired cellular phones.
unique phonebooks that are different from the
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They

NOTE NOTE  To select and transfer one phone-

 If the maximum number of entries are  In the case of English, the system will recog- book entry from the phonebook of
already registered, the voice guide will say nize both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the cellular phone
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to the number “0.” N00580700077
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
delete a registered name. phonebook of the cellular phone and register
If you say “No,” the system will return to the 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
number you have just read, and then reg- it in the vehicle phonebook.
5 main menu.
ister the number.
5. When the name has been registered, the
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE
istered, the voice guide will say “Number  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle
voice guide will say “home, work,
saved. Would you like to add another is parked. Before transferring, make sure that
mobile, or other?” Say the location for
number for this entry?” the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
which you want to register a telephone
To add another telephone number for a  All or part of data may not be transferred,
number. even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
new location for the current entry, answer
“Yes.” The system will return to location tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
NOTE the device.
selection in Step 5.
 When the confirmation function is on, the  The maximum supported telephone number
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
Answer “No” to end the registration pro-
cess and return to the main menu. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
rect?” Answer “Yes.” 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
If a telephone number has been registered for 19 digits.
the selected location, the voice guide will say NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters
“The current number is <telephone number>,  When the confirmation function is on, after other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
number please.” repeating the telephone number you have are deleted before the transfer.
If you do not want to change the telephone read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
 For the connection settings on the cellular
number, say “cancel” or say the original rect?” Answer “Yes.”
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
number to keep it registered. Answer “No” to return to telephone number
cellular phone.
registration in step 6.
6. The voice guide will say “Number

please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
ister it.
nication System).


2. Say “Phonebook.” 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.”
the following: new entry, edit number, book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct.
import contact.” Say “Import contact.” Answer “Yes.”
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like Answer “No,” the voice guide will say
to import a single entry or all contacts?” “Name please.” Register a different name.
NOTE
Say “Single entry.” 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved.”
5
®
nize the Bluetooth compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like
ready to receive transferred phonebook
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact?”
data.
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
tact has timed out” and then the system will
NOTE cancel the registration. In such case, start
with the registration. You can continue to
 If the maximum number of entries are over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step
already registered, the voice guide will say  Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
5.
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer “No,” the system will return to
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to the registration. the main menu.
delete a registered name.
If you say “No,” the system will return to the
7. When the reception is complete, the voice  To change the content registered in
main menu.
guide will say “<Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800052
5. After the voice guide says “Ready to import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or tele-
receive a contact from the phone. Only a imported. What name would you like to phone number registered in the vehicle
home, a work, and a mobile number can use for these numbers?” phonebook.
be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- Say the name you want to register for this You can also listen to the list of names regis-
face will receive the phonebook data from phonebook entry. tered in the vehicle phonebook.
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
NOTE NOTE
 If the entered name is already used for  The system must have at least one entry.
another phonebook entry or similar to a
name used for another phonebook entry, that
name cannot be registered.


 Editing a telephone number Answer “No,” the system will return to  Editing a name
N00579900066 Step 3. N00580100068
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 6. The voice guide will say “Number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- please.” Say the telephone number you vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for want to register. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System). NOTE nication System).
2. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Phonebook.”
5 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
 If the telephone number is already registered
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, say “The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact”. Say “Edit number.” phone number to change the current number. import contact.” Say “Edit name.”
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
name of the entry you would like to edit, 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit,
or say list names.” Say the name of the number. or say list names.” Say the name you want
phonebook entry you want to edit. When the confirmation function is on, the to edit.
system will ask if the number is correct.
NOTE Answer “Yes.” NOTE
 Say “List names,” and the names registered Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order. the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
Refer to “Listening to the list of registered 8. Once the telephone number is registered, to “Listening to the list of registered names”
names” on page 5-157. on page 5-157.
the voice guide will say “Number saved”
and then the system will return to the
5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing
mobile or other?” Select and say the loca- <name>.”
tion where the telephone number you NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the
want to change or add is registered.  If the location where a telephone number system will check if the name is correct.
When the confirmation function is on, the was already registered has been overwritten Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
system will check the target name and with a new number, the voice guide will say with the editing based on this information.
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want “Number changed” and then the system will Answer “No,” the system will return to
to continue with the editing. Step 4.


6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
Say the new name you want to register.
NOTE name of the entry you would like to
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is
7. The registered name will be changed. delete, or say list names.” Say the name of
being read out.
When the change is complete, the system the phonebook entry in which the tele-
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
will return to the main menu. call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or phone number you want to delete is regis-
“Delete” to delete it. tered.
 Listening to the list of registered names The system will beep and then execute your
NOTE
command.
5
N00580200056
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for  If you press the SPEECH button and say  Say “List names,” and the names registered
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for being read, the system will advance or to “Listening to the list of registered names”
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to on page 5-157.
nication System). the next entry or “Previous” to return to the
2. Say “Phonebook.” previous entry.
5. If only one telephone number is registered
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of in the selected phonebook entry, the voice
the following: new entry, edit number, guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or  Deleting a telephone number
N00580300086 tion>.”
import contact.” Say “List names.” 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
entries in the phonebook in order. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for voice guide will say “Would you like to
5. When the voice guide is done reading the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],
list, it will say “End of list, would you like nication System). or all?”
to start from the beginning?” When you 2. Say “Phonebook.” Select the location to delete, and the voice
want to check the list again from the 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
beginning, answer “Yes.” the following: new entry, edit number, tion>.”
When you are done, answer “No” to edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
return to the previous or main menu. import contact.” Say “Delete.” NOTE
 To delete the telephone numbers from all
locations, say “All.”


6. The system will ask if you really want to 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing
delete the selected telephone number(s). the following: new entry, edit number, up to 1,000 names, can be registered.
To go ahead with the deletion, answer edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
“Yes.” import contact.” Say “Erase all.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
Answer “No,” the system will cancel 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice converts from text to voice the names regis-
deleting the telephone number(s) and then guide will ask “Are you sure you want to tered in the transferred phonebook entries,
return to Step 4. erase everything from your hands-free and creates names.
7. When the telephone number deletion is system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”
5 complete, the voice guide will say Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all NOTE
“<name> <location> deleted” and then registered information in the phonebook  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from
the system will return to the main menu. and return to the main menu. the connected cellular phone can be used
If all locations are deleted, the system will 5. The voice guide will say “You are about with that cellular phone.
say “<name> and all locations deleted” to delete everything from your hands-free  You cannot change the names and telephone
and the name will be removed from the system phonebook. Do you want to con- numbers in the phonebook entries registered
phonebook. If numbers still remain under tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select
the entry, the name will retain the other Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all and delete specific phonebook entries, either.
associated numbers. registered information in the phonebook To change or delete any of the above, change
and return to the main menu. the applicable information in the source
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, phonebook of the cellular phone and then
 Erasing the phonebook transfer the phonebook again.
N00580400058 erasing the hands-free system phone-
You can delete all registered information book” and then the system will delete all
data in the phonebook. To import a devices phonebook
from the vehicle phonebook.
When the deletion is complete, the voice Follow the steps below to transfer to the
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for guide will say “Hands-free system phone- mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- book erased” and then the system will the cellular phone.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for return to the main menu.
nication System). NOTE
Mobile phonebook  Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
2. Say “Phonebook.” N00566201091
cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and
registered in the mobile phonebook.


4. The voice guide will say “Would you like 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
NOTE to import a single entry or all contacts?” guide will say “Import complete” and
 The already stored phonebook in the mobile
Say “All contacts.” then the system will return to the main
phonebook is overwritten by the stored
5. The voice guide will say “Importing the menu.
phonebook in the cellular phone.
contact list from the mobile phonebook.
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
This may take several minutes to com-
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
plete. Would you like to continue?”
General information
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of N00566301135
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
the device.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the Model name: MMC or MDGMY10 5
 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or
can be imported. cellular phone will start.
Answer “No,” the system will return to NT8MDGMY10
 The maximum supported telephone number
the main menu. IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-MDGMY10
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a
19 digits. NOTE radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
 If telephone numbers contain characters  The transfer may take some time to complete cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters depending on the number of contacts. cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
are deleted before the transfer. Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
 For the connection settings on the cellular device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
phone side, refer to the instructions for the Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable
cellular phone. Rules. Operation is subject to the following
to transfer contact list from phone” and then
the system will return to the main menu. two conditions:
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  This device may not cause harmful inter-
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ference.
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the system will return to the main menu.  This device must accept any interference
nication System).  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all received, including interference that may
2. Say “Phonebook.” transfers will be cancelled and the voice cause undesired operation.
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Unable to complete the
the following: new entry, edit number, phonebook import” and then the system will
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or return to the main menu.
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”  If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the
voice guide will say “There are no contacts
on the connected phone.”

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
CAUTION correct the interference by one or more of the USB input terminal (if so
 Changes or modifications made to this
following measures: equipped)
equipment not expressly approved by the
N00566701139
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
tion to operate this equipment.
 Increase the separation between the You can connect your USB memory device
equipment and receiver. or iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
The term “IC:” before the radio certification  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a memory device or iPod.
5 number only signifies that Industry Canada circuit different from that to which the This section explains how to connect and
technical specifications were met. receiver is connected. remove a USB memory device or iPod.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not  Consult the dealer or an experienced See the following section for details on how
be co-located or operating in conjunction radio/TV technician for help. to play music files.
with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
users and installers must be provided with ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-44.
installation instructions and transmitter oper- complies with Canadian ICES-003. Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure Device” on page 7-46.
compliance. Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device
FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
Enrollment Commands tracks via voice operation” on page 7-49.
N00566401123
and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to Inc. in the United States and other countries.
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. How to connect a USB memory
This equipment generates, uses and can radi-
device
ate radio frequency energy and, if not
N00566800090
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
to radio communications. the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
However, there is no guarantee that interfer- or put the operation mode in OFF.
ence will not occur in a particular installation. 2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- the floor console box.
ence to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment

How to connect an iPod

N00566901160
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
the floor console box.
5
3. Connect a commercially available USB

connector cable (C) to the USB memory
CAUTION
 Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
device (B).
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other-
wise cause injuries.
NOTE
 Do not connect the USB memory device to 3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged. NOTE
 When closing the floor console box, be care-  Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
ful not to trap the USB connector cable. Inc.
4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to 5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn 4. Connect the connector cable (B) to the
the USB input terminal (D). the ignition switch to the “OFF” position USB input terminal (C).
or put the operation mode in OFF first and
perform the installation steps in reverse.

Types of connectable devices For vehicles equipped with the

and supported file specifica- Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
tions N00583300032
N00567000015
For details about the types of connectable
devices and supported file specifications,
Except for vehicles equipped with refer to the following sections.
5 the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface

N00583200060
 Device types
N00583400046
For details about the types of connectable
Devices of the following types can be con-
devices and supported file specifications,
nected.
CAUTION refer to the following pages and manuals.
 Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM Model name Condition
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other- radio/CD player Storage capacity of
USB memory device
wise cause injuries. 256 Mbytes or more
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-44,
“Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on Models other than Digital audio player
page 7-46 and “Audio Files USB memory supporting mass
NOTE devices and iPods storage class
(MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-31.
 When closing the floor console box, be care-
ful not to trap the connector cable.
For vehicles equipped with the For these connectable device types, “iPod*,”
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- “iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*”
5. To remove the connector cable, turn the tem (MMCS) and “iPhone*,” refer to the following web-
ignition switch to the “OFF” position or site:
put the operation mode in OFF first and Refer to the separate owner’s manual. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
perform the installation steps in reverse. You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY America website.
AUDIO [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. site.

Sun visors
Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”.
NOTE Sun visors
 Do not connect to the USB input terminal
The websites mentioned above may connect N00524601392
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
reader, etc.) other than the connectable front glare while driving. To reduce side
Motors website. devices specified in the previous section.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
The device and/or data may be damaged. If
ucts/index.html any of these devices was connected by mis-
*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod

take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position or putting the
5
touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade- operation mode in OFF.
marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and
other countries.  File specifications
N00583500034
NOTE You can play music files of the following

 Depending on the type of the USB memory specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
device or other device connected, the con- ory device or other device supporting mass
nected device may not function properly or storage class. When you connect your iPod,
the available functions may be limited. playable file specifications depend on the
 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm- connected iPod.
ware updated to the latest version.
 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
Item Condition
the USB input terminal when the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON or MP3, WMA, AAC,
File format
ACC. WAV
 Do not keep your USB memory device or Maximum number of
iPod in your vehicle.
levels Level 8
 It is recommended that you back up the files
(including the root)
in case of data damage.
Number of folders 700
Number of files 65,535

12 V power outlets
Vanity mirror Type 2 12 V power outlets

N00525000598
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
visor. CAUTION
Type 1
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
visor. When using more than one socket at the
5 Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will same time, make sure the total power con-
sumption of the electrical accessories does
automatically turn on the mirror light (A).
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover or replace the
cap. This will prevent the power outlet from
becoming clogged and short circuiting.
Card holder
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the
Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug
the sun visor. in the power outlet.
CAUTION NOTE
 If the lid of vanity mirror with light is kept  If your vehicle is equipped with two 12V
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi- power outlets, they can be used simultane-
cle’s battery will be discharged. ously.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
Type 1 Floor console box WARNING

 Do not use HomeLink® with any garage
Accessories can be operated while the igni- door opener that lacks safety stop and
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-
ACC. eral Regulations. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the path
of a closing garage door and then auto-
Floor console matically stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a
5
garage door opener without these features
increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
 During programming, your garage door
HomeLink® Wireless Con- or gate may open or close. Make sure that
trol System (if so equipped) people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate that you are programming.
N00554301053
HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a

NOTE
WARNING registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
 Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the
 The hole next to the power outlet in the HomeLink® provides a convenient way to
original transmitter for future programming
floor console is not a cup holder. This hole replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency procedures (for example, new vehicle pur-
can be used as a personal compartment, (RF) transmitters used to activate devices chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro-
but should never be used as a cup holder. such as gate operators, garage door openers,
Spilling beverages onto the power outlet grammed HomeLink® buttons should be
entry door locks, security systems, even home erased for security purposes. Refer to
could cause a short-circuit or an electric
shock. lighting. Additional HomeLink® information “Cleaning the programmed information” on
can be found at www.homelink.com, page 5-169.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
Type 2 calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1-
800-355-3515.
Accessories can be operated in all ignition
switch positions or all operation modes.

NOTE Before programming Home-

 You can program a maximum of 3 devices. Link®
To change or replace any of the 3 devices N00584600032
after it has been initially programmed, you
 Some garage door openers manufactured
must first erase the current settings.
after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.
See “Cleaning the programmed information”
on page 5-169 or “Reprogramming a single To program a garage door opener
equipped with “rolling code protection”;
5 HomeLink® button” on page 5-170.
you will need to access the garage door
opener motor to press the motor’s
“Learn” or “Smart” buttons. For conve-
nience, use a ladder and another person to
assist you. NOTE
 It is recommended that a new battery be  You do not need to continue holding the
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the HomeLink® button.
device being programmed to HomeLink®  If the indicator light does not flash, refer to
for quicker training and accurate trans- “Cleaning the programmed information” on
mission of the radio-frequency signal. page 5-169.
2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

1- HomeLink® button 1 Programming a new Home- mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away
2- HomeLink® button 2 Link® from the HomeLink® button while keep-
3- HomeLink® button 3 N00584700033
ing the indicator light in view.
To program HomeLink® to operate a garage
door, gate, or entry door opener, home or
office lighting, you need to be at the same
location as the device.
1. Press the HomeLink® button that you

would like to program. The indicator light
(A) will flash orange slowly.


• If the device does not operate, continue
NOTE
with “Programming a new HomeLink®”
 Some devices may require you to replace this
steps 5 to 7 to complete the program-
“Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3
ming of a rolling code equipped device.
with procedures noted in the “Gate operator /
Canadian programming” section. If the indi- 5. At the garage door opener receiver
cator light does not change to rapidly flash- (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the
ing green or continuously lit green after “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu-
performing these steps, contact HomeLink® ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
5
at www.homelink.com
(see the garage door opener manual to
identify the “Learn” button.)
4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
NOTE programmed and observe the indicator “Smart” button. (The name and color of
 Some hand-held transmitters may actually light. the button may vary by manufacturer.)
train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches • If the indicator light continuously illumi- There are typically 30 seconds to initiate
(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have nates green, programming is complete
difficulty with the programming process. step 7.
and your device should operate when the 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
HomeLink® button is pressed and hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter released.
button while watching the indicator light grammed HomeLink® button. Repeat the
• If the indicator light rapidly flashes “press/hold/release” sequence a second
(A). Continue pressing the button until the green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds
indicator light (A) changes from slowly time, and, depending on the brand of the
and release the programmed HomeLink® garage door opener (or other rolling code
flashing orange to either rapidly flashing
button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” equipped device), repeat this sequence a
green (rolling code) or continuously lit
sequence a second time, and, depending third time to complete the programming
green (fixed code). Now you may release
on the brand of the garage door opener process.
the hand-held transmitter button.
(or other rolling code equipped device), HomeLink® should now activate your
repeat this sequence a third time to com- rolling code equipped device.
plete the programming process. At this
point if your device operates, program-
ming is complete.

NOTE NOTE
 In the event that there are still programming  If programming a garage door opener or gate
difficulties or questions, additional Home- operator, it is advised to unplug the device
Link® information and programming videos during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
can be found online at www.homelink.com, sible overheating.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the HomeLink® Hotline. 3. Press and release - every 2 seconds
5 (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes from
Gate operator/Canadian pro- slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
gramming ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-
N00584800034 green (fixed code). Now you may release the gramming the garage door opener (refer
hand-held transmitter button.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
Proceed with “Programming a new Home- to “Programming a new HomeLink®”
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after section), both garage door operation indi-
several seconds of transmission - which may Link®” step 4 to complete. cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat-
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick ing that the garage door feedback has
up the signal during programming. Similar to Additional steps for program- been enabled.
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators ming a door system with feed- If the indicators do not flash, perform
are designed to “time-out” in the same man- steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-
back
ner. Link® button up to the first 10 times after
N00584900035
The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit- successful programming.
ter will go off when the device times out indi- The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- 2. Press and release the programmed Home-
cating that it has finished transmitting. ing garage door status from compatible Link® button to activate the door. You
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- garage door opener systems. Check your now have 1 minute in which to complete
culties programming a gate operator or garage door opener manual for the available step 3.
garage door opener by using the “Program- feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also
ming” procedures, replace “Programming a for a listing of compatible systems contact
new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following: HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com


3. Once the door has stopped, press and The HomeLink® has the capability of listen-
release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2
the garage door opener (refer to your feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range
garage door opener owner’s manual for may be reduced by obstacles such as houses
the location of the “Learn” button). Both or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle
the HomeLink® garage door operation speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED
indicators will flash rapidly green upon message feedback from the garage door
successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
5
from the door opener, both the UP and
Operating HomeLink® The indicators will illuminate/blink in
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
N00585000033
response to the following conditions: tion the door was last moving.
To operate, simply press and release the pro- Recall of the door state after initial feedback
grammed HomeLink® button. Activation will : Blinking : Illuminates is possible by simultaneously pressing either
now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and
door opener, gate operator, security system, Garage door opener closing 3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). (orange)
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow-
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of ing the garage door status indication of the
the device may also be used at any time. Garage door opener closed
(green) figure above.
Garage door feedback Out of range

(red) Clearing the programmed
N00585200035
information
The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- Garage door opener opening
(orange) N00585300036
ing garage door status from compatible
To erase programming from the 3 buttons
garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi- Garage door opener opened (individual buttons cannot be erased but can
tional steps for programming a door system (green)
be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol-
with feedback” on page 5-168.
Out of range low the steps noted:
Garage door status is then displayed with
(red)
indicators (A).

Interior lights
1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® NOTE CAUTION
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-  If you do not complete the programming of a  The transmitter has been tested and complies
cator will change from continuous yellow new device to the button, it will revert to the with FCC and IC rules.
to rapidly flashing green. previously stored programming. Changes or modifications not expressly
2. Release both buttons. For questions or comments, visit approved by the party responsible for com-
www.homelink.com, pliance could void the user’s authority to
NOTE www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by operate the device.
5  Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. calling the HomeLink® Hotline.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
3. HomeLink® is now in the train (or learn- exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
ing) mode and can be programmed at any General information environment. End Users must follow the spe-
time beginning with “Programming a new N00585600039 cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
HomeLink®” step 1. Your HomeLink® system operates on a radio
be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
and must not be co-located or operating in
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
Reprogramming a single sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
conjunction with any other antenna or trans-
HomeLink® button (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
mitter.
The term “IC:” before the certification/regis-
N00585400037 complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
tration number only signifies that Industry
To reprogram a HomeLink® button, complete RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules.
Canada technical specifications were met.
the following. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® Interior lights
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
button. Do not release the button. N00525300562
ference.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
 This device must accept any interference NOTE
that may be received, including interfer-  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
Link® button can be released at this point. ence that may cause undesired operation. with the engine off may run the battery
Proceed with “Programming a new down.
HomeLink®” step 2. Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off.

Interior lights
• When the remote control transmitter of
Dome light (front)/Reading the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
lights key is used to lock the vehicle.
N00525401472 • If the vehicle is equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
Dome light (front) used to lock the vehicle.
NOTE
 When the doors other than the driver’s door
5
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
1- Cargo room light  P.5-172 tion, the light goes off immediately.
2- Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)   When the key was used to start the engine, if
P.5-172 the key is removed while the doors and lift-
3- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights  gate are closed, the light is illuminated and
P.5-171 after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
Sunshade illumination dimming control  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
switch engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF
(if so equipped)  P.5-173 while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
1- (DOOR) light illuminates and after approximately 30
The light illuminates when a door or the seconds it goes off.
liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-  The time until the light goes off can be
mately 30 seconds after the door or lift- adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
gate is closed. Motors dealer for details.
However, the light goes off immediately
in the following cases:
2-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
The light goes off regardless of whether a
“ON” position or the operation mode is
door or the liftgate is open or closed.
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
used to lock the vehicle.

Interior lights
Reading lights 1- ( ) NOTE

The light illuminates regardless of
N00537600155  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
whether a door or the liftgate is open or engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF
Regardless of the position of the dome light
closed. while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
switch, when the lens is pressed, the light on
2- () light illuminates and after approximately 30
the side that was pressed will illuminate.
The light illuminates when a door or the seconds it goes off.
Press the lens again to turn off the light.
liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-  The time until the light goes off can be
5 mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-
gate is closed.
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
However, the light goes off immediately
in the following cases: 3- ( )
• When the ignition switch is turned to the The light goes off regardless of whether a
“ON” position or the operation mode is door or the liftgate is open or closed.
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
Cargo room light
used to lock the vehicle.
N00526100163
• When the remote control transmitter of
key is used to lock the vehicle.
• If the vehicle is equipped with the
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped) F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
N00525801258 used to lock the vehicle.
NOTE
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
tion, the light goes off immediately.
 When the key was used to start the engine, if The light illuminates when the liftgate is
the key is removed while the doors and lift- opened, and goes out when the liftgate is
gate are closed, the light is illuminated and closed.
after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.

Interior lights
 When the key was used to start the
Sunshade illumination dim- Sunshade illumination (if so engine, the key is removed while all doors
ming control switch (if so equipped) equipped) and the liftgate remain closed.
N00568500020 N00568601031  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, the operation mode is put in OFF
while the engine is running and the doors
and the liftgate are closed.
5
NOTE
 The time until the sunshade illumination
goes off can be adjusted. If it is adjusted, the
time until the dome light go off is also
adjusted automatically at the same time.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
The brightness of the sunshade illumination The sunshade illumination turns on when the
can be adjusted to 3 different levels when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in The sunshade illumination also turns on when
ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. a door or the liftgate is opened, and goes off
ON or ACC. 30 seconds after the door or the liftgate is
Each time you press the switch, the bright- NOTE closed, even when the engine switch is in the
ness switches in sequence from high  mid-  The sunshade illumination does not turn on if “OFF” position or the operation mode is in
dle  low  off  high. the sunshade illumination dimming control OFF.
switch is off. However, the sunshade illumination immedi-
NOTE Refer to “Sunshade illumination dimming ately goes off in the following cases.
control switch” on page 5-173.
 The brightness can be adjusted even when
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position  When the power door lock function is
or the operation mode is in OFF, provided used to lock the vehicle.
When the sunshade illumination is turned on,
that the sunshade illumination is turned on.  When the remote control transmitter of
it will go off approximately 30 seconds after
the following operation is performed.
key is used to lock the vehicle.

Storage spaces
 If the vehicle is equipped with the  The lights will illuminate again after they
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is automatically go off if the ignition switch
NOTE
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
used to lock the vehicle. or the engine switch is operated, or if the
when leaving the vehicle.
keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
is operated.
NOTE
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is NOTE
5 closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-  The interior light auto-cutout function can be
tion, the light goes off immediately. deactivated.
 The sunshade illumination does not turn on if The time until the lights automatically go off
the sunshade illumination dimming control can be adjusted. See your authorized
switch is off. Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
 The time until the sunshade illumination
goes off can be adjusted. If it is adjusted, the
time until the dome light go off is also
adjusted automatically at the same time. See
Storage spaces
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for N00526400469 1- Floor console box
details. 2- Glove compartment
CAUTION
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
Interior light auto-cutout func- or spectacles in the cabin when parking the Glove compartment
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will N00551500204
tion (dome light and other become extremely hot, so lighters and other
lights) flammable items may catch fire and WARNING
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
N00526301452  An open glove compartment door can
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
 If any of the interior lights are left crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
cause a serious injury or death to the front
switched on with the ignition switch is in passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
the “OFF” position or the operation mode senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while keep the glove compartment door closed
is in OFF, it goes off automatically after driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a when driving.
approximately 30 minutes. storage space could otherwise cause injuries
during a sudden stop.
To open, pull the lever (A).

Storage spaces
NOTE NOTE
 When the lights are illuminated with the  There is a limit to the size of pens that can be Floor console box
light switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” stored in the holder. Forcing large pens into N00551601257
position (vehicles with automatic light con- the holder could cause damage.
trol), the glove conpartment light illumi- Type1
nates.
Card holder To open the console box, lift the release lever
(A) and raise the lid.
Pen holder There is a card holder inside the glove com-
partment.
There is a pen holder inside the glove com-
partment.

Cup holders
Type2 Upper box Tissue holder

To open the upper box, lift the right release The tissue holder (D) is located on the under-
Upper and lower boxes are located inside the
lever (B) and raise the lid. side of the floor console box lid.
floor console box.
Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
5  The floor console box can also be used as an
arm rest.
Refer to the “Arm rest” section on page 4-6.
1 2
Lower box
Cup holders
To open the lower box, lift the left release N00527300322
lever (C) and raise the lid. The cup holder is designed for holding cups
or drink-cans securely in its holes.
1- Upper box
2- Lower box WARNING
 The hole next to the power outlet in the
floor console is not and should not be used
NOTE as a cup holder. Spilling beverages onto
 The USB input terminal is located in the the adjacent power outlet could cause a
floor console box (if so equipped). For short-circuit or electrical failure.
details, refer to “USB input terminal” on
page 5-160.

Bottle holders
For the rear seat (if so equipped)

N00537001198
In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm

rest (A) to drop down.
NOTE
For the front seat  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
The cup holder is located in front of the floor etc.
console.  Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
Bottle holders
N00527300377
Cargo area cover (if so
CAUTION equipped)
 Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
N00528300130
is distracting and can cause an accident.
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as CAUTION
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.  Do not place luggage or other items on the
cargo area cover. Any items on the cargo
area cover would obstruct your rearward
There are bottle holders located on the front
view, and they could fly forward and cause
doors. injuries or other mishap in the event of hard
braking.

Assist grips
To install
1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the
underside of the cargo area cover into the
inside protruding portion (B) of the lift-
gate.
CAUTION
To remove  Do not use the assist grips when getting into
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
Follow this procedure in reverse to remove. detach causing you to fall.
Assist grips Coat hook

CAUTION N00559000061
 Lightly push the cargo area cover to make N00553600153
sure that the concave portion (A) is set The assist grips (located above the doors on
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist
firmly in the protruding portion (B) of the the headliner) are not designed to support
grip of the driver’s side.
liftgate. If the cargo area cover is not body weight. They are intended for use only
securely locked in place, it could unhook while seated in the vehicle.
while driving and cause injuries.
2. Hang the strap (C) of the cargo area cover

on the hook (D).

Luggage hooks
Luggage hooks
N00528500259
There are hooks on the sides of the luggage

compartment for use in securing luggage.
WARNING
 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
tain airbag was activated, any such item
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly CAUTION
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).  Do not load the luggage higher than the top
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp of the seatback.
objects in the pockets of clothes that you Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
hang on the coat hook. Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious
accident.

Driving safety
Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4 6
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-7
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-12
Driving precaution
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi-  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
Driving precaution tions. mended pressures.
N00629301106
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle  When you drive on highways or dry
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a improved roads, set the drive mode-selec-
WARNING manner that might require sharp turns or tor “2WD” or “4WD AUTO” position (if
 Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of so equipped).
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-  For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
speed. Always buckle up. rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
rollover. traffic, roadway and weather conditions
6 Your vehicle has been designed for both nor-
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig- safely permit.
nificantly more likely to die than a person  Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
mal and occasional off-road use. However,
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi- lubricated according to the recommenda-
avoid driving the vehicle through areas where
cle, always make certain that you and all your tions in this manual.
the tires may get stuck in deep sand or mud as
passengers are properly wearing their seat  Always keep your vehicle well main-
your vehicle is designed primarily for use on
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro- tained. A poorly maintained engine
pavement, unlike a conventional off-road
priate restraints). wastes fuel and costs money.
vehicle.
 Never overload your vehicle.
Keep in mind that 2-wheel drive vehicles are
less capable than 4-wheel drive vehicles for Fuel economy
driving on muddy, slippery, wet or snow-cov- N00628800152 Driving, alcohol and drugs
ered roads. Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. N00628900049
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance Your personal driving habits can have a sig- Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
and a narrower track, which enables them to nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec- causes of accidents.
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa- ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel Your driving ability can be seriously
tions. Because of the higher ground clear- economy are listed below. impaired even with blood alcohol levels far
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of below the legal minimum. If you have been
gravity, which makes them handle differently  Whenever accelerating from a stop, drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave- always accelerate slowly and smoothly. non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or  When parked for even a short period, do use public transportation. Drinking coffee or
corner at the same speed on pavement as con- not idle the engine. Shut it off. taking a cold shower will not make you sober.
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any  Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
more than low-slung sports cars are designed stops. drugs affect your alertness, perception and
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
6-2 Driving safety
Floor mat
pharmacist before driving while under the 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
influence of any of these medications. holes over the retaining clips.
WARNING
 Always install the mat with the correct
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
side facing down.
WARNING  Never install a second mat over or under
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. an existing floor mat.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your  Do not use a floor mat designed for
reflexes are slower and your judgment is another model vehicle even if it is a
impaired. Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
lowing: 6
Floor mat • Periodically check that the floor mat is
properly secured with the retaining clips.
N00628600046
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
The original equipment floor mat provided ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
with your vehicle was specifically designed other reason, always check the condition
for your vehicle. Always properly position of the floor mat after it has been rein-
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere
NOTE stalled.
 The shape of the mat and the number of
with operation of the pedals. Always use the • While the vehicle is stopped with the
retaining clips may vary depending on the engine off, check that the floor mat is not
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
vehicle model. interfering with the pedals by depressing
secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
help prevent the floor mat from moving for- the pedals fully.
ward and possibly interfering with the opera- WARNING
tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
from moving forward and possibly interfering properly installed, it can interfere with the
with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi operation of the pedals. Interference with
genuine floor mats are recommended. the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
tion and/or increased stopping distances
resulting in a crash and injury. Always
To install the floor mat make sure the floor mat does not interfere
N00628700047
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the  Always use the retaining clip on the
floorboard. driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
mat.
Driving safety 6-3

Vehicle preparation before driving
Vehicle preparation before Defrosters Lights

driving
N00629000669
Check these by selecting the defroster mode, Have someone watch while you turn all the
and set the blower switch on high. You exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
should be able to feel the air blowing against signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
check for the following:
the windshield. the instrument panel.
Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
Seat belts and seats shield, door windows)” on page 7-8, 7-13,
Fluid leaks
7-18, 7-24.
6  Before starting the vehicle, make certain
that you and all passengers are seated and Check the ground under the vehicle after
wearing their seat belts properly (with Tires parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
children in the rear seat, in appropriate other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
restraints), and that all the doors and lift- Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
gate are locked. uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, to find out why immediately and have it
 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look fixed.
possible, while still keeping good visibil- for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
ity, and good control of the steering the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. (including spare tire) for proper pressure.
Safe driving techniques
N00629200094
Check the instrument panel indicators and Replace your tires before they are heavily
multi-information display for any possible worn out. Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
problem. As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
 In the same way, the front passenger seat sure monitoring system, there is a risk of can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
should also be moved as far back as possi- damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors you give extra attention to the following
ble. when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire areas, you can better protect yourself and
 Make sure that infants and small children replacement should, therefore, be performed your passengers:
are properly restrained in accordance with only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
all laws and regulations. dealer.  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,
road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
of stopping distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead.
6-4 Driving safety

Driving during cold weather

 Before changing lanes, check your mir-
rors and use your turn-signal light.
WARNING WARNING
 The battery gives off explosive hydrogen  Never open the radiator cap when the
 While driving, watch the behavior of
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat- radiator is hot. You could be seriously
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
tery to explode, which could cause serious burned.
 Always obey applicable laws and regula- injury or death.
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always Always wear protective clothes and a face
leave room for unexpected events, such as mask when working with your battery, or
sudden braking. let a skilled mechanic do it.
Braking
 If you plan to drive in another country, N00629500491
obey their vehicle registration laws and  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start- All the parts of the brake system are critical 6
make sure you will be able to get the right ing the engine, allow a short warm-up to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
fuel. time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
drive your vehicle slowly. repair facility of your choice at regular inter-
vals according to the “WARRANTY AND
Driving during cold weather  Stay at low speeds at first so that the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
N00629400461
transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil
 Check the battery. At the same time, have time to spread to all the lubrication
check the terminals and wiring. During points. When brakes are wet
extremely cold weather, the battery will  Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
not be as strong. Also, the battery power cold weather conditions. This is normal
Check the brake system while driving at a
level may drop because more power is and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
low speed immediately after starting, espe-
used for cold starting and driving. warms up.
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if  Check the engine antifreeze.
they work normally.
the engine runs at the proper speed and if If there is not enough coolant because of a
A film of water can be formed on the brake
the headlights are as bright as normally. leak or from engine overheating, add
discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
Charge or replace the battery if necessary. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
During extreme cold weather, it is possi- Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
ble that a very low battery could freeze. Please read this section in conjunction
the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
depressing the brake pedal.
Driving safety 6-5

Parking
When driving in cold weather For vehicles equipped with man- WARNING
ual transaxle  Leaving the engine running risks injury or
On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking death from accidentally moving the gear-
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec-
system, making the brakes less effective. Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation
While driving in such conditions, pay close (Reverse) position when parking on a down- of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger
attention to preceding and following vehicles hill slope, into the 1st position when parking compartment.
and to the condition of the road surface. From on an uphill slope.
time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
and check how effective the brakes are.
6 For vehicles equipped with contin- Where you park
uously variable transmission
When driving downhill (CVT) Your front bumper can be damaged if you
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.
It is important to take advantage of the engine Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set Be careful when traveling up or down steep
braking by downshifting while driving on when parked and that the selector lever is in slopes where your bumper can scrape the
steep downhill roads in order to prevent the the “P” (PARK) position. road.
brakes from overheating. When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector WARNING
Parking lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-  Do not park your vehicle in areas where
N00629600304
vents loading the parking brake against the combustible materials such as dry grass or
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to leaves can come in contact with a hot
move the selector lever out of the “P” exhaust, since a fire could occur.
Parking on a hill (PARK) position.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

Parking with the engine run- Do not keep the steering wheel
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. ning fully turned for a long time
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
Never leave the engine running while you More effort could be required to turn the
take a short sleep or rest. Also, never leave steering wheel.
the engine running in a closed or poorly ven- Refer to “Electric power steering system
tilated place. (EPS)” on page 5-69.
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load  Production options weight: the combined
When leaving the vehicle on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
Always remove the key from the ignition maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
switch and lock all doors and the liftgate dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
when leaving the vehicle unattended.  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit an individual tire that is determined by ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
area. distributing to each axle its share of the rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
curb weight, accessory weight, and nor-  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs
Loading information mal occupant weight and dividing by two. (68 kg) * times the number of specified 6
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum occupants. (In your vehicle the number is
N00629900408
of - 3)
It is very important to know how much (a) Curb weight;  Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu-
weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is (b) Accessory weight; tion within the passenger compartment (In
called the vehicle capacity weight and (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front,
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo (d) Production options weight. 1 in second row seat)
(including the roof load), non-factory-  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-
installed options, if any, being towed. The tire *:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
cle with standard equipment including the
and loading information placard located on son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-
the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will regulations.
ant.
show how much weight it may properly carry.  Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
WARNING may be replaced) of automatic transmis- Tire and loading information
 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading sion, power steering, power brakes, power placard
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect windows, power seats, radio, and heater, N00630100383
vehicle performance, including handling to the extent that these items are available
and braking, cause tire failure, and result as factory- installed equipment (whether The tire and loading information placard is
in an accident. installed or not). located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
It is important to familiarize yourself with the and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) *
following terms before loading your vehicle: times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
6 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650
This placard shows the maximum number of
lbs.)
occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as 5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct of luggage and cargo being loaded
well as “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle Load Limit on the vehicle. That weight may
capacity weight. The weight of roof load is N00630201251
not safely exceed the available
included in the definition of “cargo” when 1. Locate the statement “The com-
cargo and luggage load capacity
determining the vehicle capacity weight. This bined weight of occupants and
placard also tells you the size and recom- calculated in Step 4.
cargo should never exceed XXX
mended inflation pressure for the original 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
equipment tires on your vehicle. For more trailer, load from your trailer will
information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-14.
placard.
be transferred to your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight
Consult this manual to determine
of the driver and passengers that
how this reduces the available
will be riding in your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The above steps for determining
correct load limit were written in
accordance with U.S.A. regula-
tions.
Your vehicle cannot tow a
trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
6
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
To determine the cargo load capacity for your
Cargo loads Cargo load precautions vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle
N00629700435 N00630300040
6-10 Driving safety

Cargo loads
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight.
For additional information, if needed, refer to
WARNING WARNING
 Do not load cargo or luggage higher than  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”
the top of the seatback. Be sure that your gage, including your roof load, must not
on page 6-8.
cargo or luggage cannot move when your exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight vehicle is in motion. more information, refer to “Tire and load-
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating num- Having either the rear view blocked, or ing information placard” on page 11-2
bers listed on the safety certification label (A) your cargo being thrown inside the cabin  Roof load is determined by adding the
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door if you suddenly have to brake can cause a weight of the roof carrier and the weight
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo serious accident or injury or death. of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
weight.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
 For additional information, refer to 6
“Maximum roof load” on page 11-3.
evenly.
Loading cargo on the roof CAUTION

N00630400100
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
WARNING vehicle.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle
ual provided with the roof carrier.
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
 Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
and adversely affect its handling charac-
weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
items on the bottom. Do not load items that
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
are wider than the roof carrier.
of control and result in an accident. Drive
WARNING slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers  When attaching/removing the roof carrier
such as sudden braking or quick turning. and loading/removing luggage, do not apply
excessive pressure on a single point.
death, the combined weights of the driver,  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
Depending on how and where the force is
passengers and cargo and must never the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
applied, this may cause dents on the vehicle
exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load, 176 lb (80 kg). If the maxi-
roof.
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will mum roof load is exceeded, this could
adversely affect vehicle performance, cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
including handling and braking, and may accident.
cause an accident.
Driving safety 6-11

Trailer towing
CAUTION Refitting the covers

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-
tance, always check the load to make sure it 1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the
is securely fastened to the roof carrier. cover in the holes (D) in the roof.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that 2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the
the load remains secure. If the load is not vehicle to install it.
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in Attaching the roof carrier
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the
with the attendant to determine if the roof vehicle to remove it.
carrier should be removed.
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the liftgate when installing
a roof carrier.
Trailer towing
N00629800306
Roof carrier mounting brackets

(if so equipped)
N00630600085
When installing the roof carrier, use the

brackets (A).
The brackets (A) are located under each cover
(B).
6-12 Driving safety

Trailer towing
WARNING
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
It may not be possible to maintain control
or adequate braking.
Driving safety 6-13

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped) ............................7-4
Manual air conditioning-Type 2 (if so equipped) ............................7-9
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped) ......................7-14
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped) ......................7-19
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-24
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-25
7
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-25
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-29
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-31
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-35
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-35
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-38
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-40
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-42
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-43
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-44
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-46
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-49
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-52
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-54
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-55
System Settings ..............................................................................7-56
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-60
Clock (if so equipped) ....................................................................7-62
General information about your radio ...........................................7-63
Vents
2- Open
Vents
NOTE
N00729900249
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an

air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
1- Close
7 2- Open
Changing the mode selection
A- Center vents N00736400552
B- Side vents Side vents To change the position and amount of air
flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
Air flow and direction adjust- To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
page7-5, 7-10, 7-16, 7-21.
ments These symbols are used in the next several
outside as far as possible.
N00730200327
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
Left Right : Small amount of air from the vents
Center vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. : Large amount of air from the vents
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
inside as far as possible. Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

ger compartment.
1- Close
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
7
Air flows mainly to the leg area. NOTE
Foot/Face position  With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger to the leg area. With the mode selection dial
compartment, and flows to the leg area. between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air
flows mainly to the windshield and the door
windows.
Defroster position
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the

door windows.
Foot/Defroster position
Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and

the door windows.
Comfort controls 7-3

Manual air conditioning-Type 1 (if so equipped)
Control panel
N00730500258
7
Manual air conditioning- Temperature control dial
A- Temperature control dial
Type 1 (if so equipped) B- Air selection switch
N00736600222
C- Blower speed selection dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
N00730301370
D- Air conditioning switch to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
E- Mode selection dial wise to make the air cooler.
CAUTION
 The engine speed may increase when the air
Electric rear window defogger
F-
conditioning is operating. switch P.5-136
With an increased engine speed, a continu-
ously variable transmission (CVT) vehicle
will creep to a greater degree than with a Blower speed selection dial
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake N00736500175
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.

NOTE Air selection switch NOTE

 While the engine coolant temperature is low, N00736800383  When the air conditioning operates with the
the temperature of the air from the heater Normally, use the outside air position to keep air selection switch in the outside air posi-
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, the windshield and side windows clear and to tion, the system automatically determines
even if you have selected warm air with the quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- whether to continue using outside air or to
dial. perform recirculation.
shield.
 For instructions on how to use the “MAX If the outside temperature is high, the system
A/C” position (A), refer to “For quick cool- selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
To change the air selection, simply press the
ing” on page7-7. and causes the air selection indicator in the
air selection switch. A sound will be made
switch to illuminate. When the air condition-
every time you push the switch. ing turns off or the blower speed selection
Mode selection dial  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
dial is set to the “OFF” position, the air
selection automatically goes back to the out-
7
N00736700151  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} side air position.
To change the amount of air flowing from the
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
CAUTION
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air

selection is controlled automatically.
When the air conditioning turns off, the air
selection automatically goes back to the out-
side air position.
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the
selected position.


When the air conditioning operates, the
NOTE Air conditioning switch
air selection switch will be automatically
 While the mode selection dial is set between N00731001491
controlled.
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition- Push the switch, and the air conditioning
ing compressor will run automatically. The  Disable automatic air control: compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
outside air position will also be selected Even when the air conditioning operates, indicator light (A) will come on.
automatically. (In this case, the air condition- the air selection switch will not be auto- A sound will be made every time you push
ing indicator will not change.) the switch.
matically controlled.
 When the temperature control dial is set to
the “MAX A/C” position, the air selection  Changing the settings
will be automatically set to the recirculation Press the air selection switch for about 10
position.
seconds or longer.
7  When the temperature control dial is in the
When the setting has changed, the system
“MAX A/C” position, if it is set to a position
other than “MAX A/C”, the setting for the
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
air selection switch is selected as described • When the setting has changed from
below. The selection of recirculated air or enabled to disabled, the system will beep
outside air depends on the setting before three times and the indicator will flash
“MAX A/C” was used. three times.
• If automatic control was set: • When the setting has changed from dis-
Automatic control is continued abled to enabled, the system will beep
• If recirculated air was selected: two times and the indicator light will Push the switch again and the air condition-
Recirculated air is selected flash three times. ing compressor will stop and the indicator
• If outside air was selected: light (A) goes off.
Outside air is continued
NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
Personalizing the air selection control”.
 While the mode selection dial is set between
(Changing the function setting)
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
N00702101067
will automatically change to the outside air
You can change the following functions to position, even if the system is set to “Disable
match your preference. automatic air control”, in order to prevent
windows from fogging up.
 Enable automatic air control:

NOTE Cooling
 If a problem is detected in the air condition- N00731201350
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica- For ordinary cooling

tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, 7
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
NOTE
the air conditioning switch once to turn the  For quick heating, set the blower speed
system off, then once more to turn it back on. selection dial to the position shown in the
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will illustration. 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
stop. position.
2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it
to the outside air position.
Operating the air conditioning 3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
4. Change the temperature by turning the
system control dial clockwise or counterclock-
N00731101287
wise.
5. Set the desired blower speed.
Heating
NOTE
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the some way, push the air selection switch (A)
outside air position. to set it to the recirculation position. Let in
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise some outside air from time to time for good
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera- ventilation.
ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.

NOTE NOTE
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection  When the temperature control dial is set to a
dial to the “ ” position. position other than “MAX A/C”, the air
selection will automatically change to out-
For quick cooling side air. The air conditioning will revert to
the previous condition in which the “MAX
A/C” position was not selected.
Combination of unheated air and

heated air
7 N00731300253
Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec- Defrosting or defogging (wind-
tion switch (A) to the outside air position. shield, door windows)
N00731401570
The air flow will be directed to the leg area

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” and the upper part of the passenger compart- CAUTION
position. ment. Set the desired blower speed.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
2. Set the temperature control dial to the Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated through all the windows.
“MAX A/C” position. or slightly warm air (depending upon the
3. Set the blower speed to the highest posi- position of the temperature control dial) flows Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
tion. to the upper part of the passenger compart-
and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
ment.
windshield and door window.
NOTE
 When the temperature control dial is set to  For ordinary defrosting
the “MAX A/C” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically and Use this setting to keep the windshield and
the light will come on. The recirculation door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
position will be selected automatically. In leg area heated (when driving in rain or
this case, you cannot turn the air condition- snow).
ing off or select the outside air position.


1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
Manual air conditioning-
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. Type 2 (if so equipped)
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- N00730301383
tion.
CAUTION
NOTE  The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioning is operating.
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition- ously variable transmission (CVT) vehicle
ing compressor will run automatically. The will creep to a greater degree than with a
outside air position will also be automati-
cally selected. (In this case, the air condition-
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake 7
position. ing indicator will not change.)
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-  While the between “ ” and “ ” position
ing the blower speed selection dial. is selected, you cannot turn the air condition-
3. Select your desired temperature by turning off or select the recirculation position.
Control panel
N00730500261
ing the temperature control dial. This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
 For quick defrosting side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial near the “MAX A/C” cool posi-
tion. This would blow cool air on the win-
dow glass and fog it up.

B- Air selection switch
C- Blower speed selection dial
D- Air conditioning switch
E- Mode selection dial


F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-136
Blower speed selection dial

N00736500188
When the ignition switch or the operation

7 wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow NOTE
will stop.  While the engine coolant temperature is low, Air selection switch
the temperature of the air from the heater N00736800396
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Normally, use the outside air position to keep
even if you have selected warm air with the the windshield and side windows clear and to
dial. quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
Mode selection dial To change the air selection, simply press the
N00736700207 air selection switch. A sound will be made
To change the amount of air flowing from the every time you push the switch.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Temperature control dial

N00736600176
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise

to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
wise to make the air cooler.


and then to keep the windows from fogging  Changing the settings
up. Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
CAUTION When the setting has changed, the system
cause the windows to fog up. • When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
NOTE indicator will flash three times.
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
When the air conditioning turns on, the air pressor will run automatically. The outside
the system will beep two times and the 7
selection is controlled automatically. air position will also be selected automati- indicator light will flash three times.
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the cally.
selected position. NOTE
NOTE Personalizing the air selection control”.
 When the air conditioning operates with the (Changing the function setting)  While the mode selection dial is set to the
air selection switch in the outside air posi- N00702100044 “ ” position, the air selection will auto-
tion, the system automatically determines You can change the following functions to matically change to the outside air position,
whether to continue using outside air or to match your preference. even if the system is set to “Disable auto-
perform recirculation. matic air control”, in order to prevent win-
If the outside temperature is high, the system  Enable automatic air control: dows from fogging up.
selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
When the air conditioning operates, the
and causes the air selection indicator in the
air selection switch will be automatically
switch to illuminate. Press the air selection
controlled. Air conditioning switch
switch to return to outside air.
N00731001505
 Disable automatic air control: Push the switch, and the air conditioning
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in Even when the air conditioning operates, compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
some way, use the recirculation position. the air selection switch will not be auto- indicator light (A) will come on.
Switch to the outside air position every now matically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.

Operating the air conditioning NOTE

system  For quick heating, set the blower speed
N00731101274
selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration.
Heating
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-

tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
outside air position.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
7 Push the switch again and the air condition- or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
ing compressor will stop and the indicator ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.
light (A) goes off.
Cooling
NOTE N00731200311
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-

ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
position.
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will 2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it
stop. to the outside air position.


3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
Combination of unheated air and Defrosting or defogging (wind-
4. Change the temperature by turning the
control dial clockwise or counterclock- heated air shield, door windows)
N00731300266 N00731401583
wise.
5. Set the desired blower speed. Set the mode selection dial to the positions
shown in the illustration and set the air selec- CAUTION
tion switch (A) to the outside air position.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
NOTE through all the windows.
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in The air flow will be directed to the leg area
some way, push the air selection switch (A) and the upper part of the passenger compart-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in ment. Set the desired blower speed.
some outside air from time to time for good Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
ventilation. or slightly warm air (depending upon the windshield and door window. 7
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection position of the temperature control dial) flows
dial to the “ ” position. to the upper part of the passenger compart-  For ordinary defrosting
ment.
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).

Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” NOTE Control panel
position.
 While the mode selection dial is set to the N00711801608
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
ing the blower speed selection dial.
pressor will run automatically. The outside
3. Select your desired temperature by turn- air position will also be automatically
ing the temperature control dial. selected.
 While the “ ” position is selected, you
 For quick defrosting cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
the recirculation position.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
7 side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial near the maximum cool position. A- Temperature control dial
This would blow cool air on the window B- Air selection switch
glass and fog it up. C- Blower speed selection dial
D- Air conditioning switch
E- Mode selection dial
Automatic air conditioning- F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-136
Type1 (if so equipped)
N00731501366
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
CAUTION
tion.  The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioning is operating.
will creep to a greater degree than with a
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake

NOTE NOTE
 There is an interior air temperature sensor  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(G) in the illustrated position. the temperature of the air from the heater
Never place anything over the sensor, since will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
doing so will prevent it from functioning even if you have selected warm air with the
properly. dial.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting) 7
Outside air will be introduced and the air
Temperature control dial conditioning will stop. In this case, manual
N00737001347 operation is possible.
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
passenger compartment. Turn the tempera- to the lowest setting)
Blower speed selection dial ture control dial clockwise to make the air Inside air will be recirculated and the air
N00736900153 conditioning will operate. In this case, you
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
cannot select outside air and turn the air
When the ignition switch or the operation air cooler. conditioning off.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the The above indicates the factory settings. You
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock- can personalize the air selection switch and
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to air conditioning switch to match your per-
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow sonal preferences.
will stop. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page7-17.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on


page7-16. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
NOTE
 If the mode selection dial is set between
Mode selection dial  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger “ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con-
N00737100093
compartment. ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
To change the amount of air flowing from the tion.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to This prevents the windows from fogging up.
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.  When the mode selection dial or the blower
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
position again after manual operation, the air
selection switch will also be automatically
controlled.
7
Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)
N00760001103
You can change the following functions to

When the air conditioning turns on, the air
match your preference.
selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection  Enable automatic air control:
automatically goes back to the outside air When the mode selection dial or the
Air selection switch position. blower speed selection dial is set to the
N00737200339 If high cooling performance is desired, or if “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air is dusty or contaminated in will also be automatically controlled.
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now  Disable automatic air control:
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging Even when the mode selection dial or the
up. blower speed selection dial is set to the
To change the air selection, simply press the “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
air selection switch. A sound will be made will not be automatically controlled.
every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
 Changing the settings
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.


Press the air selection switch for about 10
Personalizing the air conditioning
seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system switch (Changing the function set-
will beep and the indicator light will flash. ting)
• When the setting has changed from N00759800045
enabled to disabled, the system will beep You can change the following functions to
three times and the indicator will flash match your preference.
three times.
• When the setting has changed from dis-  Enable automatic air conditioning control:
abled to enabled, the system will beep When the mode selection dial or blower
two times and the indicator light will speed selection dial has been set to the
flash three times. Push the switch again and the air condition- “AUTO” position or when the tempera- 7
ing compressor will stop and the indicator ture control dial has been set to the mini-
light (A) goes off. mum temperature, the air conditioning
NOTE switch is automatically controlled.
control”. NOTE  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
 While the mode selection dial is set between  If a problem is detected in the air condition- trol:
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection ing compressor, the air conditioning indica- The air conditioning switch is not auto-
will automatically change to the outside air tor light (A) blinks. Press the air matically controlled, unless the air condi-
position, even if the system is set to “Disable conditioning switch once to turn it off, then tioning switch is used.
automatic air control”, in order to prevent once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
windows from fogging up. tioning indicator light does not blink there is  Changing the settings
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked Press the air conditioning switch for about
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
10 seconds or longer.
Air conditioning switch When the setting has changed, the system
N00737301412 will beep and the indicator light will flash.
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
Push the switch, and the air conditioning and the air conditioning indicator light (A) • When the setting has changed from
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press enabled to disabled,
indicator light (A) will come on. the air conditioning switch once to turn the the system will beep three times and the
A sound will be made every time you push system off, then once more to turn it back on. indicator will flash three times.
the switch. Once the water evaporates, the blinking will • When the setting has changed from dis-
stop. abled to enabled,


the system will beep two times and the 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the selection dial and the mode selection dial to
indicator light will flash three times. “AUTO” position. the desired positions. To return to automatic
2. Select the temperature control dial to the operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
desired temperature. The temperature can tion.
NOTE be set within a range of around 61 to 89.
The temperature will increase as the dial Defrosting or defogging (wind-
conditioning control”.
is turned to the right.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
shield, door windows)
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition- N00732401492
“AUTO” position.
ing will run automatically, even if the system
is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning CAUTION
control”, in order to prevent windows from
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
7 fogging up. speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will through all the windows.
be controlled automatically.
To remove frost or mist from the windshield

Operating the air conditioning NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at about 75 under normal
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
conditions.
N00731701456
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
Operating the air conditioning

system (manual mode)
In normal conditions, use the system in the
N00731800072
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
trolled manually by setting the blower speed

 For ordinary defrosting  For quick defrosting NOTE

Use this setting to keep the windshield and  When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
and fog it up.
snow).
Automatic air conditioning-

Type2 (if so equipped)
N00731501379
CAUTION 7
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”  The engine speed may increase when the air
position. conditioning is operating.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
will creep to a greater degree than with a
tion. lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
position.
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn- NOTE
ing the blower speed selection dial.  While the mode selection dial is set between
3. Select your desired temperature by turn- “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing the temperature control dial. ing compressor will run automatically. The
outside air position will also be selected
automatically.
 If the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con-
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
tion. This prevents the windows from
fogging up.
side vents toward the door windows.

Control panel NOTE

N00711801611  There is an interior air temperature sensor
(G) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly.
7
Temperature control dial
N00737000308
B- Air selection switch
C- Blower speed selection dial Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the
D- Air conditioning switch passenger compartment. Turn the tempera-
Blower speed selection dial ture control dial clockwise to make the air
E- Mode selection dial N00736900166
F- Electric rear window defogger switch warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
When the ignition switch or the operation air cooler.
P.5-136
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.


page7-22. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
NOTE ger compartment.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
Mode selection dial  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, N00737100136
even if you have selected warm air with the compartment.

To change the amount of air flowing from the
dial. vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
 When the temperature is set to the highest or “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper- 7
ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting) When the air conditioning turns on, the air
Inside air will be recirculated and the air selection is controlled automatically. When
conditioning will operate. the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air
Air selection switch position.
The above indicates the factory settings. You N00737200342 If high cooling performance is desired, or if
can personalize the air selection switch and
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air air is dusty or contaminated in
air conditioning switch to match your per-
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position.
sonal preferences.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning To change the air selection, simply press the
switch (Changing the function setting)” on air selection switch. A sound will be made
page7-22. every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection  Using recirculated air for a long time may
(Changing the function setting)” on  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.


Push the switch again and the air condition-
Personalizing the air selection NOTE ing compressor will stop and the indicator
(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
light (A) goes off.
N00760000021 control”.
You can change the following functions to  While the mode selection dial is set to the
match your preference. “ ” position, the air selection will auto- NOTE
matically change to the outside air position,  If a problem is detected in the air condition-
 Enable automatic air control: even if the system is set to “Disable auto- ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
matic air control”, in order to prevent win- tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
When the mode selection dial or the
dows from fogging up. conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
blower speed selection dial is set to the once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch tioning indicator light does not blink there is
7 will also be automatically controlled.
Air conditioning switch no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
 Disable automatic air control: N00737301425
Even when the mode selection dial or the Push the switch, and the air conditioning  Sometimes, for example after using a high-
blower speed selection dial is set to the compressor will turn on. The air conditioning pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch indicator light (A) will come on. and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
will not be automatically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the switch. the air conditioning switch once to turn the
 Changing the settings system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Press the air selection switch for about 10 Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
seconds or longer. stop.
When the setting has changed, the system
• When the setting has changed from Personalizing the air conditioning
enabled to disabled, switch (Changing the function set-
the system will beep three times and the ting)
indicator will flash three times. N00759800029
• When the setting has changed from dis-
You can change the following functions to
abled to enabled,
match your preference.
the system will beep two times and the
indicator light will flash three times.  Enable automatic air conditioning control:


When the mode selection dial or blower 2. Select the temperature control dial to the
speed selection dial has been set to the
NOTE desired temperature. The temperature can
“AUTO” position or when the tempera- be set within a range of around 18 to 32.
ture control dial has been set to the mini- “ ” position, the air conditioning will run The temperature will increase as the dial
mum temperature, the air conditioning automatically, even if the system is set to is turned to the right.
“Disable automatic air conditioning control”,
switch is automatically controlled. 3. Set the mode selection dial to the
in order to prevent windows from fogging
up.
“AUTO” position.
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol: The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
The air conditioning switch is not auto- Operating the air conditioning speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
matically controlled, unless the air condi- system (automatic mode) be controlled automatically.
tioning switch is used. N00731701469 7
 Changing the settings NOTE
Press the air conditioning switch for about  Set the temperature at about 25 under normal
10 seconds or longer. conditions.
When the setting has changed, the system  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
• When the setting has changed from even if you have selected warm air with the
enabled to disabled, dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
the system will beep three times and the from fogging up, the vent mode will be
indicator will flash three times. changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
• When the setting has changed from dis- speed will be reduced.
abled to enabled,
the system will beep two times and the In normal conditions, use the system in the
indicator light will flash three times. AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Operating the air conditioning
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the system (manual mode)
NOTE “AUTO” position. N00731800098
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
conditioning control”.
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
the desired positions. To return to automatic

Important air conditioning operating tips

operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi- 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
tion.
NOTE
position.
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-  While the “ ” position is selected, you
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
Defrosting or defogging (winding the blower speed selection dial.
the recirculation position. This prevents the
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired temperature by turn- windows from fogging up.
N00732401489
ing the temperature control dial.  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
CAUTION  For quick defrosting  When defrosting, do not set the temperature
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view control dial to the maximum cool position.
through all the windows. This will blow cool air on the window glass
and fog it up.
7 To remove frost or mist from the windshield
and door windows, use the mode selection Important air conditioning
dial (“ ” or “ ”). operating tips
N00733700280
 For ordinary defrosting 1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
leg area heated (when driving in rain or 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” sary to park in the sun, open the windows
snow). position. for the first few minutes of air condition-
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. ing to expel the hot air.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
tion. when the air conditioning is in use. The
entry of outside air through open windows
NOTE will reduce cooling efficiency.
pressor will run automatically. The outside
air position will also be selected automati-
cally.

Air purifier
3. When running the air conditioning, make The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
sure the air intake, which is located in
CAUTION dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56.
the air-intake chamber may reduce air Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will NANCE MANUAL”.
flow and plug the water drains. cause severe damage and may require replac-
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning NOTE
system.
Air conditioning system refrig- The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
 Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
erant and lubricant recommen- sphere is not recommended. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
dations The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
air flow is lower than normal or when the 7
If the air conditioning seems less effective windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
global warming. replace the air filter.
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant It is recommended that the old refrigerant be Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
leak. saved and recycled for future use. repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Have the system inspected by your authorized
of your choice. During a long period of disuse AM/FM radio/CD player (if
so equipped)
The air conditioning should be operated for at
N00734302115
least five minutes each week, even in cold
weather. This includes the quick defrosting The audio system can only be used when the
mode. Operating the air condition system ignition switch or the operation mode is in
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres- ON or ACC.
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
in the best operating condition.
Air purifier
N00733800151
The air conditioning system is equipped with

an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Trademarks

 To listen to the audio system while the  The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is N00715300082
engine is not running, turn the ignition located under the front right seat.  Product names and other proper names
switch to the “ACC” position or put the oper- Do not subject the amplifier to a strong are the trademarks or registered trade-
ation mode in ACC. impact. marks of their respective owners.
If the ignition switch or the operation mode It could damage the amplifier or malfunc-  Furthermore, even if there is no specific
is left in ACC, the accessory power will tioning could result.
denotation of trademarks or registered
automatically turn off after a certain period
trademarks, these are to be observed in
of time and you will no longer be able to use
the audio system. The accessory power Important Points on Usage their entirety.
comes on again if the ignition switch or the N00715000021
7 engine switch is operated with it in the

“ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto- iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if
cutout function” on page 5-18 and 5-47.
so equipped) “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
 If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
it may create noise in the audio equipment.
mean that an electronic accessory has
 This product supports audio playback been designed to connect specifically to
This does not mean that anything is wrong
with your audio equipment. In such a case, from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif- iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
use the cellular phone at a place as far away fering versions mean that playback cannot certified by the developer to meet Apple
as possible from the audio equipment. be guaranteed. performance standards.
 If foreign objects or water get into the audio  Please be aware that depending on the iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor iPod/iPhone model or version, operation iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
comes from it, immediately turn off the may differ. registered in the U.S. and other countries.
audio system and have it checked at an Apple is not responsible for the operation
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a of this device or its compliance with
repair facility of your choice. Never try to How to Clean
safety and regulatory standards.
repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys- N00715200023
tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-  If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
son. soft cloth. NOTE
 If the audio system is damaged by foreign  If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in  iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
objects, water, or fire, have the system neutral detergent diluted in water, and users to privately reproduce and play back
checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin- non- copyrighted material as well as material
technician. ners, or other chemical wipes. This may that may be legally copied and reproduced.
harm the surface. Infringement of copyright is prohibited.

NOTE
 For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
the types of devices that can be connected
may vary.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
North America website.
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
website. Please read and agree to the “Warn-
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other
Companies”. The websites mentioned above 7
may connect you to websites other than the
Mitsubishi Motors website.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html

5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

Handling of Discs
4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB
N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes —
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
 Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes —
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
7 already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches — •Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
 New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center.  Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back” is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back  3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500039  Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
 When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

 Discs that have not been finalized cannot  When playing back non standard CDs, the
be played back. following may occur.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
 Even if recorded using the correct format • There may be noise during playback.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application • There may be skipping in the audio.
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc • The disc may not be recognized.
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities such as damage or marking, • The first track may not be played back. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or dirt or condensation on the lens inside • It may take longer than usual to start net or other means to servers is an infringe-
the product may render the disc unplay- playback of tracks. ment of the law.
able. • Playback may start from any point  Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
 Depending on the disc, some functions within the track. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Some parts may not be played back. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
back. • Tracks may freeze during playback. discs with these types of files recorded upon 7
 Do not use discs with cracks or warps. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. them may cause the files to be incorrectly
 If the disc has stickers affixed, residue identified for playback, which may lead to
loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
sive, then do not use the disc.
Audio Files accident.
 Discs that have decorative labels or stick- (MP3/WMA/AAC)

ers may not be used. N00715600027
NOTE
This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC  Depending on the condition of the disc
Nonstandard CDs format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, recorder or recording software used, correct
CD-R/RW, and USB devices. playback may not be possible. In these cases,
This product will play back audio CDs, how- refer to the user manual for your product or
ever please be aware of the following points There are limitations on the files and media software.
regarding CD standards. that can be used, therefore read the following  Depending on your computer’s operating
prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format system, version, software, or settings, files
 Ensure that you use discs with on the audio files on discs or USB devices. may not have a file extension appended. In
label surface. Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- these cases, append the file extensions
 Playback of other than standard CDs is als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing “.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
software, and ensure these are used correctly. the files.
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be
If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files  Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
played back, the audio quality cannot be
includes title information or other data, then played back.
guaranteed.
this can be displayed.

Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700031
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric
7 WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, “_”
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
=Compatible exten- 64 characters
X =Non-compatible sion can be used.
Multises- Not supported (only first session
sion supported)
Folder Structure Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
N00715800045 mum level)
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. number
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - of levels
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum
folder
number


Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900033 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
“Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate) 7
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Mono
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*1:Do not include other than
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
 The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent than how they are displayed on a com- played are as below.
puter.

What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000031 Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
 AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Mono
Be Played Back
7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
 WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
 WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100032
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Mono

Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a  The driver should not perform compli-  During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations.  Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display  Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the 7
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or  Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
 In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
 The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi Operation Keys
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your N00716300021
This may prevent the driver looking choice.

where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result Turn the Power ON/ OFF
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
N00716400035
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

Operation Keys
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
AFA109400 AFA109413
7 Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the
from the previous status. increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power OFF. 2. Press the key.
NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
NOTE  The maximum value for volume is 45, and
so remove the disc.
 Hold down the steering MODE key to also
the minimum is 0.
turn the audio function ON/OFF.
 The initial setting for volume is “17”. CAUTION
 When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs ping is permitted.
N00716500036
N00716600024  Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. injury, smoking, or fire.
label surface up.
 3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700100
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- CAT key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. CAT (category content) searches and
6- PWR/VOL key scans can be performed while receiving
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power radio RBDS broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
Hold down the key to switch to AUX. radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
8- INFO key 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
Switch the content of the display. 12- PAGE key
For audio, play repeat playback; for
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

Listen to Radio
13- 5 key Steering wheel audio remote
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use control switch CD or MP3
as preset key 5 for radio. N00716800068 iPod*1 or USB device
14- 6 key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Return during audio track search, and
AM
stop Bluetooth Audio*2.
For radio, use as preset key 6. FM1, 2
15- key/ key SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
7 tion. *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
required.
Select channels in the satellite radio*1.
* : Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
2
16- MENU key tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
Switch to Menu mode. 1- Vol + key, - key with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
17- /SEL key Adjust audio functions and the mobile
phone function volume. *3: Requires a satellite tuner connection.
Adjust audio quality and select items.
For radio, manually select stations. 2- CH key, key
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
1 and radio stations.
Listen to Radio
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection. N00716900098
Hold down to skip up and down through
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- This explains how to listen to AM and FM
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio radio broadcasts.
ment by type (vehicles with a
band during satellite radio reception.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
3- MODE key To Listen to the Radio
Hold down to turn the audio function
ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
pressed, this switches the audio source.
The order of switching is as shown Switch between AM and FM bands.
below. The selected band is indicated on the display.
If devices are not connected, then these
are skipped, and the next source selected.
Listen to Radio
Press the SCAN key.
NOTE CAT Search
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2, When a station is received, this is played for 5
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. seconds, then the product searches for the During RBDS broadcast reception, select
 If no signal is received, bands will not be next station. CAT (category content), and automatically
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4.
scan for stations.
NOTE 1. During FM reception, press the CAT key.
*: When a satellite tuner is connected  Press this button again while receiving the
This switches to the CAT selection mode.
station to cancel scan searching.
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT.
3. Press the key or key.
Manual/Seek Station Selection
Preset Memory The CAT (category content) indicator will 7
flash, and station selection will automati-
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis- cally start.
ten to. Register the broadcast station in advance, and When a station is received, the frequency
select this at a later time. is displayed.
/SEL key Reduces the frequency 1. Tune in to the frequency to register.
(counter- being received. NOTE
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
clockwise) key to the 6 key.  This receives the station detected first.
/SEL key Increases the frequency  10 seconds after reception, CAT search mode
(clockwise) being received. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is will be cancelled.
registered.  To receive a different station, press the
key Release the button to start
key or key again.
(hold down) seek station selection, and
when a station is received, NOTE
key scanning stops.  The preset memory can register a maximum
(hold down) of 6 stations for each band. CAT Scan
 If a preset key that already has a station reg-
istered is selected, the new station will be
During RBDS broadcast reception, select
Scan Station Selection registered.
CAT (category content) to perform a collec-
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
tive search for stations.
Collective search for stations that can be ously registered frequency.
received. 1. During FM reception, press the CAT key.
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

This switches to the CAT selection mode. While the key is held down,
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT.
To listen to Satellite Radio key it will cycle down through
3. Press the SCAN key. (Hold down)
the channels being received.
When a broadcast station is received, this Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
is played for 5 seconds, then the product While the key is held down,
key
searches for the next station. Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and it will cycle up through the
(Hold down) channels being received.
SIR4 bands.
The selected band is indicated on the display.
NOTE
 Press the SCAN key again while receiving
NOTE
the station to cancel scan searching.
NOTE  When cycling up/down through channels, the
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2, channel number display in the upper level of
7 SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. the display changes.
 Switch satellite radio bands by holding down  When channel number “000” is selected, the
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so the key or key on the steering remote SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
equipped) control switch.
N00717000083
*:If no signal is received, bands will not be Scan Station Selection

This section explains how to listen to satellite
radio. switched.
Channels are received in order and take 10
seconds each.
NOTE
 A subscription is required to listen to satel- Select a Station
lite radio. Once the free trial period has
Scan All Channels
expired, satellite radio can only be received
Press the key or key to select the sta-
with a valid subscription. Press the SCAN key.
tion.
 If no subscription has been made when the
free trial period expires, the display will All of the channels are scanned.
alternate between “CALL” and “888-539- Go down one step from the
key
SIRI”. channel being received.
NOTE
Go up one step from the  Press this key again while receiving the
key
channel being received. channel to cancel scan searching.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
NOTE
key to the 6 key. nel.
 Selecting a channel will also cancel scan
searching. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is 5. Press the /SEL key.
registered. A “Beep” sounds, and the selected chan-
nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
Scan Category Channels
NOTE ting mode)
1. Press the CAT key.  The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
Switches to the category search mode, of 6 stations per band. flashes.
and the category name is indicated on the  If a preset key that already has a channel reg- Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
display. istered is selected, the new channel will be search mode and return to normal recep-
registered.
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
tion.
7
gory. 6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
ously registered channel.
3. Press the SCAN key. The preset channels on the display are shown
key to select the channel.
The channels in the selected category are as “P1” though “P6”. The selected channel is received.
scanned. 7. Press the /SEL key.
Cancels the search mode and returns to
NOTE Channel Search normal reception.
 Press the SCAN key or CAT key again while
receiving the channel to return to cancel scan Other channels can be selected while listen- NOTE
searching.
ing to a channel.  After making preliminary settings in the
 Turning the /SET key will also cancel channel search mode, this will switch to the
scan searching. 1. Press the CAT key. channel being received.
Switches to the category search mode,  Channel number “000” is for the SIRUS ID
and the category name is indicated on the display, so it cannot be searched.
Preset Memory display.  If the “CAT ALL” category is selected, all
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- channels can be searched in the channel
search mode.
Register the channel in advance, and select gory.
 In the category mode, press the CAT key to
this at a later time. 3. Press the /SEL key. cancel search mode.
Switches to channel search mode.
1. Tune in to the channel to register.  In the channel search mode, press the 6
key to return to the category search mode.

Listen to CDs
If a disc is already within the product, press
NOTE the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
NOTE
 In the channel preliminary setting mode,  Pressing again will cancel.
source.
press the 6 key to return to the category  Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
search mode without returning to the previ- or rewinding will cancel.
ous channel search mode. Select the Track
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Initialize the CODE (Passcode) Press the 2RDM key.
This enables selection of the next or previous
7 The CODE required for changing the LOCK
track. Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
settings in the satellite settings is initialized.
(The factory setting is “1111”.) Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel.
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL  Ejecting will cancel this.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
 “Turn the Power ON/OFF” (P7-35) Fast forward/rewind is possible.
Scan Playback (SCAN)
Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode Press the SCAN key.
N00717100039
This explains how to listen to audio CDs Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Play the first 10 seconds of each track on the
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible. disc in order.
Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE

 Press this button again during playback if
Press the 1RPT key. you wish to hear that track, and that track
Insert the disc.
will play normally.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback. Repeat playback of the track currently being
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36) played.

Listen to MP3s
This enables selection of the next or previous Repeat playback of the tracks within the
Listen to MP3s track. folder currently being played.
N00717200030
This explains how to listen to audio files on a NOTE

disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
CAUTION Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. playback will not be cancelled.
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Fast forward/rewind is possible.
play back MP3 format audio files.
Random Playback (RDM)
Switch Playback Mode
To Listen to MP3s Press the 2RDM key.
7
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Insert the disc. playback are possible. Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback. Repeat Playback (RPT)
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36) NOTE
If a disc is already within the product, press  Pressing again will cancel.
Press the 1RPT key.
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source. Repeat playback of the track currently being
played. Folder Random Playback
NOTE
 Depending on the file structure, it may take NOTE Hold down the 2RDM key.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
 Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran-
rewinding will cancel. dom order.
Select the Track (File)
NOTE
Press the key or key to select the Folder Repeat Playback  Pressing again will cancel.
track.
Hold down the 1RPT key.

Listen to an iPod
Scan Playback (SCAN) NOTE CAUTION

 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after  Depending on how the devices are handled,
Press the SCAN key. selecting the folder, then track search mode audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
will be cancelled. it is recommended that data be backed up.
Play the first 10 seconds of each track in the  Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
folder currently being played in order. key to start playback from the first track in
that folder. NOTE
 Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
NOTE  While the file is selected, press the 6 key
ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
 Press this button again during playback if to return to the previous operation.
on this product may not be possible.
you wish to hear that track, and that track  While the file is selected, hold down the
(P.7-26) Additionally, playback as
7 will play normally. 6 key to cancel track search mode. explained in this document may not be possi-
 If there is no operation for five seconds after ble.
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
Search Tracks  Disc operations such as selecting a track will
the types of devices that can be connected
cancel track search mode.
may vary.
Search folders and files, and select a track. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Listen to an iPod For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
North America website.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. N00717300073
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
2. Press the /SEL key. By connecting commercially-available For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can website. Please read and agree to the “Warn-
Files within the selected folder are display back tracks on these through the product. ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other
played. Companies”. The websites mentioned above
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. may connect you to websites other than the
CAUTION Mitsubishi Motors website.
4. Press the /SEL key.  Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
the vehicle. ucts/index.html
This plays the selected file (track).
 Never hold these devices in your hand to  Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone,
operate while driving, as this is dangerous. refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page
NOTE  No indemnification for data loss resulting 5-161.
when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the  When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a
 While the folder is selected, press the 6
product will be possible. commercially-available iPod connection
key to cancel track search mode.
cable.

Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Switch Playback Mode

 Set up the device in order that no unsafe  If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
actions, such as plugging in the connection then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
cable are taken while driving. uct, reset, then reconnect.
possible.
 When inserting and removing the
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the
vehicle.
Play iPod Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone,
it may take some time until the device is rec- Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the Press the 1RPT key.
ognized, or playback starts. source.
 Buttons on the product will not operate while Repeat playback of the track currently being
the iPod/iPhone is connected. The selected source is indicated on the displayed. 7
 iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may play.
mean that a connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display. NOTE
 Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone,
Select the Track (File)  Pressing again will cancel.
track information may not be displayed cor-
rectly. Press the key or key to select the
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and track. Shuffle Playback (RDM)
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
after starting the engine. This enables selection of the next or previous Press the 2RDM key.
 Data containing copyright information may track.
not play back. Play tracks in the category currently being
 It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone played in a random order.
equalizer settings be set to flat. Fast Forward or Rewind
 Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
this product. Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
NOTE
 If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth  Pressing again will cancel.
as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do Fast forward/rewind is possible.
not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
cable. Connection using both methods will Album Shuffle Playback
result in erroneous operation.
Hold down the 2RDM key.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device

Play back the album in a random order
(tracks in any order on the album).
NOTE CAUTION
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after  Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
selecting the category, then track search ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
NOTE mode will be cancelled. to the data contained therein. If these are
 Pressing again will cancel.  Select the category, and hold down the erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
/SEL key to start playback from the first switch to the “LOCK” position or put the
track in that category. operation mode in OFF, then remove.
 Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
Search Tracks  While the track is selected, press the 6 mended that files be backed up.
key to return to the previous operation.
 No guarantee is made as regards damage to
Search categories or track names, and select a  While the track is selected, hold down the the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
7 track. 6 key to cancel track search mode. age to data contained therein.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after  Depending on how the devices are handled,
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- selecting the track, that file is played back. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
gory.  iPod operations such as selecting a track will it is recommended that data be backed up.
cancel track search mode.
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or
tracks within the selected category are
displayed. Listen to Audio Files on a NOTE
 Digital audio players that support the mass
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- USB Device storage class specifications can be con-
gory or track. N00717400087 nected.
4. Press the /SEL key. By connecting commercially-available USB  For details regarding the types of USB
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. devices such as USB memory to this product, devices that can be connected and the types
of files that can be played back in vehicles
Select the track, and press the /SEL you can play back audio files through the
key to play. product. with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to
“Types of connectable devices and supported
file specifications” on page 5-162.
NOTE CAUTION  Regarding how to connect USB devices,
 While the category (1st level) is selected,  Do not leave the USB device unattended in refer to “How to connect a USB memory
press the 6 key to cancel track search the vehicle. device” on page 5-160.
mode.  Never hold these devices in your hand to
operate while driving, as this is dangerous.

NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

 When connecting a USB device, use a con-  Depending on the type of USB device, usage
nection cable. Failure to use a connection may not be possible, or functions that can be
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
cable when connecting may place undue load used may be restricted.
on, or damage the USB connector.  The recommended file system for USB Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe memory is FAT32.
actions, such as plugging in the connection  The maximum supported capacity for USB
cable are taken while driving. memory is 32GB. Switch Playback Mode
 When inserting and removing the USB  Operate the USB device containing recorded
device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi- audio files while connected to this product. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
cle.
playback are possible.
 Do not insert non audio devices into the USB
Play Back of Audio Files on a 7
port. Damage to the device or equipment
may result. USB Device Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Depending on the status of the USB device,
it may take some time until the device is rec-
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the Press the 1RPT key.
ognized, or playback starts.
source.
 Depending on USB devices, buttons on the Repeat playback of the track currently being
product will not operate while the USB played.
The selected source is indicated on the dis-
device is connected.
play.
 USB device specifications and settings may
mean that connection is not possible, or NOTE
result in differences in operation or display. Select the Track (File)  Pressing again will cancel.
 Depending on the audio data in the USB  Selecting a file will cancel this.
device, track information may not be dis- However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles
played correctly. Press the key or key to select the
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and track.
after starting the engine. This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Folder Repeat Playback
 Data containing copyright information may
not play back.
 This product can play back MP3, WMA, and Hold down the 1RPT key.
AAC format audio files.


Repeat playback of the tracks within the Play the tracks in all folders in a random
folder currently being played. order.
NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE NOTE will play normally.
 Pressing again will cancel.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.  Selecting a folder will cancel this.
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Cycling up/down through files will cancel Search Tracks
this. this.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat  Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. playback will not be cancelled. Search folders and files, and select a track.
7 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.

Folder Random Playback (RDM) Scan Playback (SCAN) 2. Press the /SEL key.
Files within the selected folder are dis-

Press the 2RDM key. Press the SCAN key. played.
Play tracks in the folder currently being Play the first 10 seconds of each track on the 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
played in a random order. USB device in order. 4. Press the /SEL key.
This plays the selected file (track).

NOTE NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel.  Press this button again during playback if
 Selecting a folder will cancel this. you wish to hear that track, and that track NOTE
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel will play normally.  While the folder is selected, press the 6
this. key to cancel track search mode.
 Even if the file is selected, folder random  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
playback will not be cancelled. Folder Scan Playback selecting the folder, then track search mode
will be cancelled.
Hold down the SCAN key.  Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
All Folder Random Playback key to start playback from the first track in
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in that folder.
Hold down the 2RDM key. each folder on the USB device in order.  While the file is selected, press the 6 key
to return to the previous operation.

To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PICK-UP button (for vehicles with Mitsubi- 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
NOTE shi Multi-Communication System) first. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
 While the file is selected, hold down the
Genre?,” say “Artist”.
6 key to cancel track search mode.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after NOTE
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip
 Operations such as selecting a track will can- step 3.
cel track search mode.
3. After the voice guide says “What Artist

To play iPod/USB memory would you like to play?,” say the artist
device tracks via voice oper- name.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- 7
ation (vehicles with Blue-
ceeds to step 6.
tooth® 2.0 interface) 1- SPEECH button 5. If there are two or more matches, the
N00772001067 2- PICK-UP button voice guide will say “More than one
When connected to the USB input terminal match was found, would you like to play
desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory <artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
device can be selected and played via voice To search by artist name tem proceeds to step 6.
operation. N00772200017 If you say “No,” the next matching artist
For information concerning the voice recog- 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. is uttered by the system.
nition function or speaker registration func-
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on NOTE NOTE
page 5-137.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  If you say “No” to three or all artist names
The following explains how to prepare for ing the connected device. uttered by the system, the voice guide will
voice operation and play the tracks. If the connected device cannot be recognized say “Artist not found, please try again” and
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® the system returns to step 2.
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice  Search time depends on the number of songs
Preparation for voice operation guide. Follow the voice guide. on your connected device. Devices contain-
N00772101068 ing a large number of songs may take longer
to return search results.
To use the voice operation, press the
SPEECH button (except for vehicles with
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System) or

6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
name>,” the system creates a playlist
NOTE NOTE
 If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip  If the confirmation function is active, the
index for the artist.
step 3. voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.
NOTE If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says
 If the confirmation function is active, the 3. After the voice guide says “What Album “Album not found, please try again,” the sys-
voice guide confirms if the artist name is would you like to play?” say the album tem returns to step 2.
correct. If the artist name is correct, say title.
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
guide says “Artist not found, please try ceeds to step 6. 7. The system exits the voice recognition
again,” the system returns to step 2.
5. If there are two or more matches, the mode and starts playback.
7 voice guide will say “More than one
7. The system exits the voice recognition match was found, would you like to play To search by playlist
mode and starts playback. <album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys- N00772400019
tem proceeds to step 6. 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
If you say “No,” the name of the next
To search by album title
N00772300018
matching album is uttered by the system. NOTE
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
NOTE ing the connected device.
 If you say “No” to three or all album titles If the connected device cannot be recognized
NOTE uttered by the system, the voice guide will or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- say “Album not found, please try again” and 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
ing the connected device. the system returns to step 2. guide. Follow the voice guide.
If the connected device cannot be recognized
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
6. After the voice guide says “Playing 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
guide. Follow the voice guide. <album title>,” the system creates a playl- like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
ist index for the album title. Genre?,” say “Playlist”.
2. After the voice guide says “Would you
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Genre?,” say “Album”.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip  If the confirmation function is active, the  If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step
step 3. voice guide confirms if the playlist name is 3.
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
will say “There are no playlists stored on “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice
device” and the system returns to step 2. guide says “Playlist not found, please try 3. After the voice guide says “What Genre
again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to would you like to play?,” say the music
“Confirmation function setting” on page type.
3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist 5-141. 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
would you like to play?,” say the playlist ceeds to step 6.
name. 5. If there are two or more matches, the
7. The system exits the voice recognition
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
mode and starts playback.
voice guide will say “More than one 7
ceeds to step 6. match was found, would you like to play
5. If there are two or more matches, the <genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system
voice guide will say “More than one To search by genre proceeds to step 6.
match was found, would you like to play N00772500010 If you say “No,” the next matching genre
<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. is uttered by the system.
proceeds to step 6.
If you say “No,” the next matching playl- NOTE NOTE
ist name is uttered by the system.
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered
ing the connected device. by the system, the voice guide will say
NOTE If the connected device cannot be recognized “Genre not found, please try again” and the
 If you say “No” to three or all playlist names or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® system returns to step 2.
uttered by the system, the voice guide will 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
say “Playlist not found, please try again” and guide. Follow the voice guide. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
the system returns to step 2.
<genre>,” the system creates an index for
2. After the voice guide says “Would you the genre.
6. After the voice guide says “Playing like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
<playlist>,” the system creates an index Genre?,” say “Genre”.
for the playlist.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
NOTE NOTE 5-144.
 If the confirmation function is active, the  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable
Operation methods below describe situations
voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
once connection has been completed.
If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say functions that can be used may be restricted.
“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not  Confirm together with the user manuals for
found, please try again,” the system returns the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa- NOTE
to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function ble audio devices.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
setting” on page 5-141.  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
audio devices, volume levels may differ. not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior cable. Connection using both methods will
7. The system exits the voice recognition
to use, it is recommended that you turn the result in erroneous operation.
mode and starts playback.
7 volume down.
 “Adjust Volume” (P.7-36)
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if  Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
Play Bluetooth Audio
audio device, it may take some time until the
so equipped) device is recognized, or playback starts.
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
N00717500033  Bluetooth audio device specifications and
Audio as the source.
settings may mean that connection is not
This product can play back tracks on com- possible, or result in differences in operation The selected source is indicated on the
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio or display.
display.
devices.  Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
audio device, track information may not be
2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play-
displayed correctly.
CAUTION back starts.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and
 Never hold these devices in your hand to
operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
 Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device
after starting the engine. NOTE
unattended in the vehicle.  Hold down the 5 key to pause.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,  Press the 6 key to stop.
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore Connect a Bluetooth-capable
it is recommended that data be backed up. Audio Device
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth

device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)
Select the Track (File) NOTE

 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
Press the key or key to select the
repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
track.
This enables selection of the next or previous

track. Random Playback (RDM)
Press the 2RDM key.

Fast Forward or Rewind
Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. in a random order.
7
Fast forward/rewind is possible. NOTE
Switch Playback Mode
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Scan Playback (SCAN)

playback are possible.
Press the SCAN key.
Repeat Playback (RPT) Play the first 10 seconds of each track on the
Bluetooth Audio device in order.
Press the 1RPT key.
Repeat playback of the track currently being NOTE

played.  Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800081  The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order “Frequency”, “Sta-
safety before operation. tion name”, and “Radio text”.
indicator.
Press the INFO key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
 Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the INFO key is pressed, the dis-  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. “NO MESSAGE” is displayed.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped)  If there is no text information to display, then  If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed.
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type
This switches in the order “Channel name”,
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
“Category name”, “Artist name”, “Track
name”, and “Composer name”.
Display the ID3tag  The genre name display may not be possible.
Hold down the INFO key.

NOTE During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
 The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display.
display of 8 characters. The other items have
back (if so equipped)
a maximum display of 36 characters.
Each time INFO key is pressed, this switches
in the order “Album name”, “Track name”,
N00718300025 7
“Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and “Operat- Operating details are the same as in “During
ing status”. iPod Playback” (P.7-55).
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track files on a USB device (vehicles with a Audio Quality and Volume
title”, and “Operating status”. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). Balance Adjustment
N00718400068
NOTE Change audio quality settings.

 If there is no text information to display, then NOTE
“NO TITLE” is displayed.  During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
INFO key to switch to the folder title display.
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
 The genre name display may not be possible. ume Balance
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
back items.
During iPod Playback
N00718200024
This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
title”, and “Operating status”. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”, and
FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel.
“Operating status”.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
System Settings
Adjust- Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise switches in the order Satellite radio set-
clockwise
items tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
(low low-pass (high low-pass 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
volume) volume) 4. Press the /SEL key to input changes
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6 and proceed to the next setting.
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass
volume) volume) *1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to nected.
7 REAR 11 CENTER *2:Displayed when playing back audio files
(emphasize (emphasize (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
REAR) FRONT)
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11
(emphasize (emphasize
LEFT) RIGHT)
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
(Low speed (High speed
compensated compensated
volume effect) volume effect)
System Settings
N00718500102
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
items.

System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID — — This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
7
SKIP SETTING — When “YES” is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, “CH LCKED” is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING — When “YES” is selected and the CODE for settings is entered, the LOCK set-
ALL RESET tings for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING — The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE “1111”.)
If the input code is incorrect, “LOCK SETTING WRG LC” is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel SKIP setting”, press the 6 key.

System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel LOCK setting”, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
This completes the adjustment.

Time Setting NOTE
 Depending on the distance between the prod-
Set the time manually. NOTE uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold within the vehicle, and types of screening,
down the /SEL key until the seconds are connection may not be possible. In these
reset to “00”. cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
7  The time can also be set using another proce-
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
H M dure.
Refer to “CLOCK” on page 7-62. phone, characteristics and specifications may
/SEL mean that correct operation may not be pos-
sible.
 For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile
PHONE Settings phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- location.
 Even though a mobile phone is Bluetooth
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen, capable, phone specifications and settings
guage. may result in differences in display, or pre-
and press the /SEL key. Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings vent correct operation.
2. Press the various keys to adjust. may not be possible.  Some models may not be confirmed as con-
H - “Hour” setting nected, or may not connect.
Press this key to fast-forward the NOTE Supported profiles
“hours”.  Cancel functions such as the mobile phone
“dial lock”, and connect while on the Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
M - “Minutes” setting
Press this key to fast-forward the standby screen. Phonebook
OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
“minutes”.  While connected, mobile phone (receiving transfer
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
rectly.
3. Press the /SEL key.

System Settings
Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Inter- Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface
face
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
A hands-free kit (available separately) is default settings.)
required.
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory Settings Settings
Settings content
default settings.) name value
HFM ENG- Change the hands
Settings voice lan- LISH free module voice
Settings content
value guage set- FRENCH language.
PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice tings
SPANISH 7
OFF cut-in.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- JAPA-
MUTE in, mute the audio. NESE
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-

ATT in, output audio from all speak- Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
ers.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
IN-L in, output sound from the left The version number can be confirmed.
front speaker.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
front speaker. 2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver-
During mobile phone voice cut- sion”.
PHONE
in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
IN-LR
and right front speakers. The DB Version is displayed.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
N00718600057
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.
Mode Message Cause Response

7 CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-31)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-31)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
7
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-36)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-55)

Clock (if so equipped)

Symptoms Cause Response
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
7 same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
H - “Hour” setting
Clock (if so equipped) Time Setting Press this key to fast-forward the
N00755001192
“hours”.
The time is displayed when the ignition M - “Minutes” setting
switch or the operation mode is in ON or Press this key to fast-forward the
ACC. H M PAGE “minutes”.
3. Press the PAGE key to finish adjusting the

NOTE time. When the adjustment is complete,
 Reset the time after the battery terminals are
the clock display stops flashing.
disconnected and reconnected.
AFA109918 NOTE
 If the PAGE key is pressed and held when
1. Press and hold the PAGE key until the the time adjustment is finished, the seconds
clock display flashes. will be reset to “00”.
2. Press the various keys to adjust.

General information about your radio
NOTE Signal transmission Reflection

 The time can also be set using another proce-
dure. FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
Refer to “System Settings” on page 7-56.
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
General information about be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
your radio the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
N00733901511
broadcasts can be received over longer disturbances.
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by
reaches the antenna slightly before the 7
FM AM
reflected signal. This time difference may
distance, obstacles, and signal interference. cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
 The device may not cause harmful inter- 25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
ference. (40 to 64 km) (160 km)
 This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.
Weak reception (fading)
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly Because of the limited range of FM signals
approved by the party meeting the above and the way FM waves transmit, you may
conditions could void the user’s authority to experience weak or fading FM reception.
operate the equipment. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

General information about your radio
Cross modulation Causes of disturbances
If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
vicinity of another strong station, both sta- tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
tions might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
7 lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-14
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300187 N00836401824  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until move. Set the parking brake firmly on
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the each vehicle. Put an automatic transaxle
WARNING or CVT in “P” (PARK) or a manual trans-
flashers flashing.  When using jumper cables to start a vehi- axle in “N” (Neutral).
cle, follow the procedures and be very cau-
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
If the engine stops/fails tious.
position or put the operation mode in
8 OFF.
If the engine stops, there will be no power
CAUTION
assist to the steering and brakes, making these
 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
WARNING
difficult to use.  Perform step 4 on both vehicles before-
towing. Vehicles with automatic transaxles
hand. Make sure that the cables or your
cannot be started this way. Also, there is
 The brake booster will not work, so the clothes cannot be caught by the fan or
more risk of an accident when a vehicle is
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal drive belt. Personal injury could result.
being pushed or towed.
will be harder to press than usual.
 Since there is no power steering assist, the
steering wheel will be hard to turn. 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch NOTE
bands or bracelets that might make an
 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
accidental electrical contact. loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
When the engine fails at the 2. Position the vehicles close enough both batteries.
intersection together so that the jumper cables can
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, touching each other.
the proper level.
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe (Refer to “Battery” on page 9-11.)
zone.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine
WARNING NOTE CAUTION

 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery  Make sure that the jumper cable will not be
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP size. caught in the cooling fan or other moving
STARTING!! Otherwise heat damage to the cables could parts in the engine compartment.
The battery might split open or explode if result.
the temperature is below the freezing  Check the jumper cables for damage and cor- 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
point or if it is not filled to the proper rosion before use.
level.
the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
to the negative (-) terminal of the booster with the low battery.
6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
battery (B), and the other end to the
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged cables in the reverse order from the way
engine block of the vehicle with the low
battery (A), and the other end to the posi- you connected them.
battery (A) at the point farthest from the
tive (+) terminal of the booster battery
(B).
battery. 8
WARNING
WARNING  Charging your battery while it is still in
 Be sure to follow the proper order when your vehicle might cause the battery to
connecting the batteries, of: catch fire and explode. If you have to
charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect
  
the negative (-) terminal.
 Make sure that the connection is made  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
to the engine properly. If the connection is from the battery because the battery could
directly made to the negative terminal of explode.
the battery, the flammable gases from
 Keep your work area well vented when
inside the battery might catch fire and
charging or using the battery in an
explode, causing personal injury.
enclosed space.
 When connecting the jumper cable, do not
 Remove all the caps before charging the
connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
NOTE tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can
battery.
 Open the terminal cover before connecting make the battery explode.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the battery.
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-11.)
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
will be interrupted and the engine coolant
WARNING temperature warning display will appear.
WARNING
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-  Before raising the engine hood, check to
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte Also “ ” blink. If this happens: see if there is steam or spray coming from
comes in contact with your hands, eyes, under the hood. Steam or spray coming
clothes, or the painted surface of your 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on from an overheated engine could seriously
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If the hazard warning flashers. scald you.
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them 2. With the engine still running, carefully Do not open the hood until there is no
immediately and thoroughly with water, raise the engine hood to vent the engine steam or spray.
and get prompt medical attention. compartment.
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If 6. When you do not see any more steam or
gles when working near the battery. the fan is not turning, stop the engine spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- immediately and contact an authorized leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
dren. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
8 ity of your choice for assistance.
careful as components will be hot. Any
leak source must be repaired.
As your vehicle has anti-lock 7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
brakes WARNING the coolant level in the engine coolant
 To avoid personal injury, keep hands, reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too
hair, jewelry and clothes away from the low, slowly add coolant.
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery cooling fan. The cooling fan can start at 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs
charge after the engine has been started by any time.
coolant, you will probably also need to
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
This can cause the anti-lock braking system 4. If you see steam or spray coming from or remove the radiator cap until the engine
warning light to blink on and off. This is only under the hood, turn off the engine. has cooled down.
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
problem with the brake system. If this hap- from under the hood, leave the engine on
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the until the bar graph for the engine coolant
charging system is operating properly. temperature warning display on the multi-
information display goes down. When it
Engine overheating is in the middle of the normal zone, you
N00836500352
can start driving again. If the bar graph
stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.
When the engine is overheating, the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools
WARNING Jack and tools Tools

 Removing the radiator cap could scald N00836600337
you with escaping hot water or steam.
When checking the radiator level, cover
the cap with a cloth before trying to
Storage
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
wise, without pressing down, to the first The tools and jack are stowed in the luggage
notch. The pressure in the system will then compartment.
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
until it comes off.
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 1- Bar 8

up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use 2- Wheel nut wrench
plain water if you have to (and replace it
with the right coolant as soon as possible).
10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it Jack
fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
ture display on the multi-information dis- 1- Tools
Before removing the jack, lift up the luggage
play. You can start driving again when 2- Jack
floor board.
the bar graph for the engine coolant tem-
perature display returns to the normal
zone.
11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
facility of your choice.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when 6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench
How to change a tire it is raised on the jack, place chocks or ready.
N00836901832
blocks (A) in front of and behind the tire (Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)
that is diagonally opposite from the tire
WARNING (B) you are changing.
 The jack should not be used for any pur- Spare tire information
pose other than to change a tire. N00849600331
 Never get under the vehicle or put any

portion of your body under the vehicle Compact spare tire
while it is supported by the jack.
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle luggage floor board of the luggage compart-
in a safe, flat location. ment. It is designed to save space in the lug-
8 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
gage compartment. Its lighter weight makes it
easier to use if a flat tire occurs.
ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- WARNING
WARNING
axle, stop the engine and move the gear-  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the time with age even when they are not
shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If being used. It is recommended that tires
On vehicles equipped with continuously the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
variable transmission (CVT), move the over 6 years generally be replaced even if
jack could slip out of position, leading to damage is not obvious.
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, an accident.
and stop the engine.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
CAUTION
warning triangle, flashing signal light, NOTE  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the
etc., at an adequate distance from the  The chocks shown in the illustration do not inflation pressure should be checked at least
vehicle, and have all your passengers come with your vehicle. It is recommended once a month to assure that it remains at the
leave the vehicle. that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep recommended inflation pressure. See the tire
them in the vehicle for use if needed. and loading information placard attached to
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and
stones or any other objects that are large loading information placard” on page 11-2.
enough to hold the wheel in position.
8-6 For emergencies

CAUTION CAUTION To change a tire

 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can  Do not use tire chains with your compact N00849801503
cause an accident. If you have no choice but spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage 1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep to your vehicle and loss of the chains. remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
your speed down and avoid sudden steering ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to To remove the spare tire
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18. N00849701355
 The compact spare tire should be used only 1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is 2. To remove the spare tire, remove the
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-
tem will not function properly. Have the tire terclockwise.
replaced or repaired at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility 8
of your choice as soon as possible.
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
ing with the compact spare tire.
 Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
 Do not drive through automatic car washes
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
age the underside of your vehicle. Because
the compact spare tire is smaller than the the jacking point closest to the tire you
original tire, there is less clearance between wish to change.
the ground and your vehicle.
 Because the compact spare tire is designed NOTE
only for your vehicle, do not use it on any  The clamp cannot be used for a normal size
other vehicle. tire. Store a normal size tire under the lug-
 Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ- gage floor board.
ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
damage these parts or other parts on your
vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7


Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
the tire is raised slightly off the ground
surface.
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

WARNING portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
8  Set the jack only at the positions shown
of the jack.
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack WARNING
might fall over and cause personal injury.  Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
face. ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause  Do not get under your vehicle while using
personal injury. Always use the jack on a the jack.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
make sure there are no sand or pebbles sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
under the jack base. are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
NOTE 4. Make sure that the flange portion at the  The jack should not be used for any pur-
 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body jacking point fits in the groove at the top pose other than to change a tire.
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack  No one should be in your vehicle when
of the jack. Insert the bar (D) into the
slips out of position. using the jack.
wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of
the bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown  Do not start or run the engine while your
vehicle is on the jack.
in the illustration.
8-8 For emergencies

WARNING WARNING
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
that are still on the ground could turn and (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
make your vehicle fall off the jack. valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
wrench, then take the wheel off. installed backwards can cause vehicle
damage and result in an accident.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face. [Vehicle with the flange nuts]
• Aluminium wheel
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur- Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts until 8
face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa- their flange section comes in contact
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then with the wheel and it is no longer loose.
mount the spare tire.
7. [Vehicle with the tapered nuts]

Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
• Steel wheel
Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
For emergencies 8-9


10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
is listed on the tire and loading informa-
tion placard attached to the driver’s door
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

CAUTION illustration until each nut has been tight-
8  Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
ened to the torque listed here.
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
NOTE
 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare or steel wheel, but return CAUTION
them to the original wheel and tire as soon as  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
possible. cause an accident. If you have no choice but
 If all 4 wheels are changed to steel wheels, to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
use tapered nuts. your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-18.
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
nut wrench counterclockwise. CAUTION cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench come loose.
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.
8-10 For emergencies

CAUTION Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving N00849400195  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
after changing the tire, have the tire checked your bare hands can seriously injure your
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi fingers.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your To remove
choice.
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
deeply into the notch provided in the wheel
To install
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling. cover, and pry the cover away from the
wheel. CAUTION
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
To store the flat tire or spare cover notches, work the wheel cover away
 Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
tire, jack, bar and wheel nut from the wheel to remove it completely. back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
wrench ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from 8
N00850000162 coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page
8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
NOTE
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel
cover notch (D).
For emergencies 8-11

Towing
NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.
Obey the regulations of the area where you
are driving your vehicle.
NOTE
8  Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) Towing
provided on the reverse side to show the air N00837001986
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
If your vehicle needs to be
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air towed
valve.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
into the wheel. vice.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cover and hold them in place with both cle using a tow truck.
knees. Incorrect towing equipment could damage
4. Gently tap around the circumference of your vehicle.
the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
the wheel cover into place. CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
cle with a rope.

Towing
Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION

truck  [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)]
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
CAUTION switch in the “ON” position or the operation
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
only the rear wheels raised off the ground
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
(Type B or C), the ASC may operate, result-
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle
age the bumper and front end.
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles or CVT with the rear wheels raised, turn the ignition
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
vehicles with this style. switch to “OFF” or “ACC” position or put
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B the operation mode in OFF or ACC. When
or Type C) as illustrated. This could result in
towing the vehicle with the front wheels
the driving system damage or vehicle may
jump at the carriage.
raised, keep the ignition switch or the opera- 8
tion mode as follows.
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only
Type D or E equipment.
F.A.S.T.-key]
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with this style. All-wheel-drive vehicles cannot be towed The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC”
with only the front or rear tires on the ground
position.
even if it is in “2WD” drive mode.
 Do not tow continuously variable transmis- The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously Towing with rear wheels off the
variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not ground (Type B)
reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam-
aging it.
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
equipment. position.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv- position with a rope or tie-down strap.
ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as
illustrated.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
Towing a front-wheel drive vehicle WARNING On snowy or icy roads

with front wheels off the ground  When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
stuck position, make sure that there are no  When driving on a road covered with
(Type C)
people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There
Release the parking brake. or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) using snow tires. Always check the regu-
position (manual transaxle) or the selector lations in your local area before using
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position On wet roads them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-20
(CVT). and “Tire chains” on page 9-21.
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
Operation under adverse CAUTION or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
8 driving conditions
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
brakes.
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-
N00837200675 by driving into flood water. cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
 When driving in rain, on water-covered avoid sudden braking.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in roads, or through a car wash, water could get  If a skid occurs when the accelerator
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
sand, mud or snow porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly skid.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
several times while driving to dry the brake  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-
or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
pads or linings, then check them again. lock braking system (ABS). Hold the
motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may brake pedal down firmly and keep it
free it.
form between the tires and the road surface depressed. Do not pump the brake pedal
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip which will result in reduced braking per-
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
on the road, making it difficult to steer or formance.
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy road, it
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due
transaxle before trying again. • Do not drive on worn tires. to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock- • Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move
ing attempts, call for help. tion pressures. the vehicle after confirming safety of the
vehicle.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
CAUTION bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
 Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
The vehicle could start moving when it
engine.
breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
an accident.
On a bumpy or rutted road

 Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
CAUTION 8
 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
holes can damage the tires and wheels.
Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
age.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

N00860600028
WARNING
 Before attempting to restart the engine
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
If a fuel leak is found or a fuel odor is
detected, do not restart the engine.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-41

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ..............................................9-9
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 9
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) .............................................9-9
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) .........................................9-10
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-10
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped).......................................9-10
Battery ............................................................................................9-11
Tires ...............................................................................................9-14
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)..........................................9-21
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-21
Parking brake .................................................................................9-21
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-22
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-22
General maintenance .....................................................................9-23
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-24
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-25
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-25
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-29
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-40
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-40
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301427  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
behind in the engine compartment.
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
sible. the vehicle may occur.
 The fan can turn on automatically even if
You can do some of the maintenance work
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the operation mode in OFF to be safe
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. while you work in the engine compart-
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- ment.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized  Do not smoke or allow open flames around Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma- Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
of your choice. ble.
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance  Be extremely careful when working
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so around the battery. It contains poisonous
for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau- and corrosive sulfuric acid.
tions for each procedure.  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
a jack. Catalytic converter
Always use properly rated automotive
WARNING jack stands.
N00937400447
 When checking or servicing the inside of  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi- The catalytic converter requires you to use
the engine compartment, be sure the als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
engine is stopped and has had a chance to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
cool down. or a repair facility of your choice if you the converter.
 If you need to work in the engine compart- have questions.
ment with the engine running, be espe- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. require maintenance. However, it is important
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or other moving parts. verter to continue to work properly.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937501618
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, is idling roughly or otherwise obviously To open
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from Use the engine hood release lever (located
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not under the instrument panel near the driver’s
race the engine when stopping the engine. door) to unlock the engine hood.
 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
WARNING performance is noticeably low, or the Pull the lever toward you to release the
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas engine has a malfunction such as with the engine hood latch.
where combustible materials such as dry ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
grass or leaves can come in contact with a driving immediately, slow down and drive
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. for only a short time. Have your vehicle
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
9
lytic converter. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-  In unusual situations involving major
verter damage: engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec- in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
tion”. the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
level. Running out of gas could damage or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
WARNING
the catalytic converter.  Never use the release lever to unlatch the
vice.
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is  Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Always insert the support prop into the hole  Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
specially made for it. Propping the engine before driving.
hood at any other place could cause the prop If you drive without the engine hood com-
to slip out and lead to an accident. pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is ing.
lifted by a strong wind.
NOTE
To close  If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and position.
put it back in its retainer.  Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
NOTE you push down, you could create a dent in
9  To prevent damage to the engine hood and the vehicle body.
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  If you drive with the engine hood left open,
position when you open the engine hood. warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
Type 1
Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
Type 2
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches
(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
CAUTION
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.

View of the engine compartment
View of the engine compart- Engine oil and oil filter

ment N00937702053
N00937600625 Good
To check and refill engine oil
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,

wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. CAUTION
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and  Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
check the oil level by checking the upper sur- oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
1- Engine oil level dipstick face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
9
2- Engine oil filler cap above the line on the dipstick.
3- Air cleaner filter WARNING
4- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid reservoir (if so  Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
equipped) NOTE age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
5- Windshield and rear window washer  If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe contact may cause serious skin disorders,
fluid reservoir off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
moment and then recheck the oil level by used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
6- Engine coolant reserve tank
checking the upper surface of the dipstick. oughly after working with it.
7- Radiator cap
8- Battery  Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
If the level does not reach the line which
shows the smallest amount of oil required,
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve NOTE
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.  Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc.

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads,
in mountainous regions, on roads with many API service symbol
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only economy and cold weather starting.
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- 1- The upper part indicates the quality of If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
bol on the front of the container. the oil. thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
of the oil viscosity. can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors
ILSAC certification symbol Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should
be used at the next oil change to maintain
Recommended engine oil vis- optimum fuel economy and cold weather
starting.
cosity
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for To replace the oil filter
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving. The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
Only use high quality replacement filters on
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
or higher oil with the following label.
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
To add coolant CAUTION
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
Follow the installation instructions printed on Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
perature.
the filter. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based of anti-freeze
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
Engine coolant non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration
of anti-freeze
N00937800584
organic acid technology You can check the concentration level with a
gauge from an automotive supply store, or
To check the coolant level your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides service station can check it for you.
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you excellent protection against corrosion and  Do not use water to adjust the concentration
quickly see when you need to add coolant. rust formation on all metals, including alumi- of coolant.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the  Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
ant in the reserve tank should be between the engine. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature 9
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually If you need to add coolant often, or if the and does not stop rust or freezing. If the
stays full so there is no reason to remove the water freezes, it will damage your cooling
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
radiator cap (B) except when you check the the engine cools, the cooling system should corrosion and rust.
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
coolant. cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for testing. Radiator cap
CAUTION The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre-

 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or vent losing coolant, which may result in
FULL engine damage. Only use a Genuine
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved
parts. equivalent.
LOW

Air cleaner filter
WARNING Air cleaner filter Type 1

 Wait for the engine to cool down before N00937901537
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
steam or boiling coolant could spray up
from the radiator and scald you.
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
Points to remember
1. Remove the upper cover and duct. For
 Do not overfill the reserve tank. details, refer to “Removing and installing
 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap the upper cover and duct” on page 9-11.
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow 2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out Type 2
from the reserve tank back to the radiator the connector (B).
when the engine cools down. If you need
9 to change the cap, use the exact same
kind.
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
ator with the proper gauge, and only when
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
against freezing.
 Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean. 4. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the
 If the engine coolant temperature does not cover back on in its original position.
rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
3. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
cover and take out the air cleaner filter.
NOTE
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
choice to have the thermostat checked, mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
and replaced if necessary.  Make sure that the connector is properly
reconnected.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)
NOTE Oil type CAUTION

 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make  Using the improper transmission fluid may
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover damage the transaxle.
are firmly set.
Mitsubishi Motors Gen-
uine NEW MULTI
Lubricant
GEAR OIL API Classi-
fication GL-3 Special additives
Viscosity range SAE 75W-80
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
mission.
Continuously variable
transmission (CVT) fluid (if Transfer oil (All-wheel drive
so equipped) models)
N00938400271
9
 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
The continuously variable transmission add oil as necessary to maintain the proper
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover. (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by level. Fill or change the oil according to the
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a table.
5. Put the duct and upper cover back on in its repair facility of your choice to obtain the
original position. For details, refer to best performance and longest life. It is impor-
“Removing and installing the upper cover tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the Fluid type
and duct” on page 9-11. correct level.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Manual transaxle oil (if so Fluid type Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
classification GL-5
equipped)
Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Viscosity
N00938200178
SAE 80
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti- range
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is mum transmission performance.
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level,
if necessary.
Refill or change the oil according to the table.

Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
Rear axle oil (All-wheel vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
To check the fluid level
drive models) essary.
N00915200269 Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
level with the dipstick. and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as
necessary to maintain the proper level.
Fill or change oil according to the table.
Fluid type
MAX
FULL EMPTY
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API MIN
classification GL-5
9 Viscosity
SAE 80
range
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
out the water in the reservoir by operating the brake pads, but this does not indicate any
Washer fluid pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti- abnormality.
N00938601355 freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
The windshield and rear window washer fluid the system for a few seconds to flush out the The fluid in the master cylinder should be
reservoir is in the engine compartment. residual water. checked when doing other work under the
engine hood. The brake system should also be
checked for leaks at the same time.
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
so equipped) length of time, it indicates leaks from the
N00938700245 brake system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
reservoir tank. repair facility of your choice.

Battery
Fluid type NOTE Removing and installing the

 After replacing the battery, the electronic upper cover and duct
Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or control system data for the automatic trans- N00901301064
axle, etc., will be erased.
DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly To replenish with the distilled water, remove
As a result, shifting may be rough.
sealed to keep dirt and water out. the upper cover and duct.
Shifting will become smoother after several
changes in speed.
CAUTION WARNING
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This Checking battery electrolyte position or put the operation mode in
will damage the seals.
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
level OFF.
Make sure that your clothes cannot be
damage painted surfaces. caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different injury could result.
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac- 9
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
To remove
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating. 1. Remove the clips (A), and then remove
the upper cover (B).
Battery
N00939101966
The condition of the battery is very important

The electrolyte level must be between the
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
electrical system working properly. Check the
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of
battery regularly.
the battery is divided into several compart-
If battery performance is suspect, have the ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
battery and charging system tested by an and fill to the mark.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Do not fill above the top line because a spill
repair facility of your choice. during driving could cause damage.

Battery
To install
1. Install the air duct (A), and then tighten
the clips (B).
NOTE
 Attach the moulding with the wide part
toward the front of the vehicle.
9 2. Remove the clips (C), and then remove
the air duct (D). 2. Turn the upper cover over. Squeeze the
4. Install the clips (E).
head of the moulding clip (C) with pliers
and remove the moulding.
3. Install the upper cover, and then attach the

moulding (D).

Battery
During cold weather NOTE WARNING

N00901600031  Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of
This has to do with its chemical and physical
water and neutral detergent then imme-
properties and is why a very cold battery,
diately rinse the affected parts with
especially one with a low charge, will have a plenty of water.
hard time starting your vehicle. • If electrolyte gets on your hands or
It is recommended that you have your battery clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If
and charging system checked by an autho- electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair with water immediately and get immedi-
facility of your choice before the start of cold ate medical attention.
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This  Open doors and windows in any closed
will guarantee more reliable starting, and lon- space where you may be charging or
ger battery life. WARNING working with the battery.
 Never disconnect the battery while the  Always wear protective clothing and gog- 9
engine is running, or you could damage gles when working with the battery, or
Disconnection and connection the vehicle’s electrical parts. have a skilled automobile technician do it.
N00901701156  Never short-circuit the battery. This could  If you are quick-charging your battery,
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the cause it to overheat and be damaged. first disconnect the battery cables.
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- from the battery because the battery could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
explode. first, and reconnect it last.
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-  If the electrolyte level is very low, have the
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on battery checked at an authorized
before starting the vehicle.
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
color them. And if it gets on your skin or ity of your choice.
NOTE in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-  Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon- ness. Please observe the following han- sories contain lead and lead compounds.
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi- dling instructions: Wash hands after handling.
nal of the battery.

Tires
• The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
NOTE WARNING metrical tire that has a particular side
 Check each battery terminal for corrosion.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
that must always face outward when
You can stop more corrosion by washing time with age even when they are not
mounted on a vehicle.
with a solution of baking soda and water. being used.
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or It is recommended that tires over 6 years  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use
tightening them. generally be replaced even if damage is on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-
 Check to see that the battery is securely not obvious. ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross
installed and cannot be moved. Also check vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000
each terminal for tightness.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the pounds or less.
 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
following terms:  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by
long period of time, remove the battery and its manufacturer as primarily intended for
 Cold tire pressure:
store it in a place where the battery fluid will use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
not freeze. The battery only should be stored • The measured pressure after the vehicle
passenger vehicles.
with a full charge. has been parked for at least three hours,
 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the or
contact with the road.
9 filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out. • The measured pressure when the vehicle
 Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
ferentially around a tire.
having been parked for three hours.
 Tread separation: pulling away of the
 Maximum pressure:the maximum permis-
Tires sible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tread from the tire carcass.
N00939201592  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
tire.
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
WARNING  Recommended inflation pressure: the
bears the load.
 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-
 Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
or improperly inflated is dangerous. mance.
tread and bead.
These type tire conditions will adversely  Intended outboard sidewall:
 Section width: the linear distance between
affect vehicle performance. • The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
These type tire conditions can also cause a bears white lettering or bears manufac-
tread separation or blowout which may
inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
result in an accident causing serious labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
that is higher or deeper than the same
injury or death.  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
or
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.

Tires
 Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
Size Designation NOTE
cords.
 Cord: the strands forming the plies in the  European/Japanese metric tire
tire. EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 sizing is based on European/Jap-
 Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire Passenger car tire size based anese design standards. Tires
and tube assembly upon which the tire P
on U.S.A. design standards designed to these standards have
beads are seated.
 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the Section width in millimeters the tire size molded into the
215 sidewall beginning with the sec-
bead seat. (mm)
 Groove: the space between two adjacent tion width. The letter “P” is
Aspect ratio in percent (%)
tread ribs. absent from this tire size desig-
65 Ratio of section height to sec-
nation. Example: 215/65R15
tion width of tire.
Tire Markings 96H.
Construction code  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire
•“R” means radial construc- sizing is based on U.S.A. design 9
R tion. standards. The size designation
•“D” means diagonal or bias for LT-metric tires is the same as
construction. for P-metric tires except for the
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.

Tires
NOTE Speed symbol WARNING

 Temporary spare tires are high A symbol indicating the  Overloading of your tire is
pressure compact spares range of speeds at which a dangerous. Overloading can
designed for temporary emer- tire can carry a load corre- cause tire failure, affect vehi-
gency use only. Tires designed sponding to its load index cle handling, and increase
to this standard have the letter under certain operating con- your stopping distance. Use
“T” molded into the sidewall ditions. tires of the recommended load
H
preceding the size designation. The maximum speed corre- capacity for your vehicle.
Example: T145/80D18 103M. sponding to the speed symbol Never overload them.
should only be achieved
Service Description under specified operating
conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, Maximum Pressure
9 EXAMPLE: 95H vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and posted speed limits) Maximum Pressure indicates the
Load index
maximum permissible cold tire infla-
A numerical code associated
95 Maximum Load tion pressure for this tire.
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.
Maximum load indicates the maxi- Tire Identification Number (TIN)
mum load this tire is designed to
carry. The TIN may be found on one or
both sides of the tire but the date
code may only be on one side. Look
for the TIN on the outboard side of
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper- under controlled conditions on speci-
1504 fied government test surfaces of
ature Grades
Department of Transporta- asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
tion C may have poor traction perfor-
This symbol certifies that the Treadwear
mance.
tire is in compliance with the The treadwear grade is a comparative
DOT
U.S. Department of Trans- rating based on the wear rate of the Temperature
portation tire safety stan- tire when tested under controlled
dards, and is approved for The temperature grades are A (the
conditions on a specified government
highway use. highest), B and C, representing the
test course. For example, a tire
tire’s resistance to the generation of
Code representing the tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
MA manufacturing location. (2 half (11/2) times as well on the gov- when tested under controlled condi-
digits) ernment course as a tire graded 100. tions on a specified indoor laboratory
9
Code representing the tire The relative performance of tires test wheel. Sustained high tempera-
L9
size. (2 digits) depends upon the actual conditions ture can cause the material of the tire
ABC
Code used by tire manufac- of their use, however, and may depart to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
D
turer. (1 to 4 digits) significantly from the norm due to excessive temperature can lead to
Number representing the variations in driving habits, service sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
15 week in which the tire was practices and differences in road responds to a level of performance
manufactured. (2 digits) characteristics and climate. which all passenger car tires must
Number representing the meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
Traction cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
04 year in which the tire was
manufactured. (2 digits) B and A represent higher levels of
The traction grades, from highest to
performance on the laboratory test
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
wheel than the minimum required by
grades represent the tire’s ability to
law.
stop on wet pavement as measured

Tires
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor- Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
Tire inflation pressures mal driving conditions is listed on the placard maximum values molded into the tire side-
N00939301955
attached to the driver’s door sill. wall. After driving several miles, your tire
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14
the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-2.) to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures under Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
problems in three major areas: normal driving conditions should be used for specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
the tires listed below. too low.
 Safety Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
Too little pressure increases flexing in the tire looks lower than the others, check the
Item Tire size Front Rear
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much pressure for all of them.
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability 240 240
P215/70R16 kPa, kPa, You should also take the following safety
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and precautions:
potholes could then cause tire damage that Normal 35 psi 35 psi
may result in tire failure. tire 230 230  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
9  Economy P225/55R18 kPa, kPa, mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven 33 psi 33 psi ing information placard attached to the
wear patterns in the tire tread. These driver’s door sill.)
Compact
abnormal wear patterns will reduce the T155/90D16 420 kPa, 60 psi  Stay within the recommended load limits.
spare wheel
tread life, and the tire will have to be  Make sure that the weight of any load in
replaced sooner. your vehicle is evenly distributed.
Too little pressure also makes it harder for Tire pressures should be checked, and
 Drive at safe speeds.
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel. adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
 After filling your tires to the correct pres-
 Ride comfort and vehicle stability Pressures should be checked more often
sure, check them for damage and air
The superior riding experience built into whenever weather temperatures change
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
your vehicle partly depends on the correct severely, because tire pressures change with
valve stems.
tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little are always “cold inflation pressure”.
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
respond. vehicle has been parked for at least three
Unequal tire pressures can make steering hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. after having been parked for three hours.

Tires
 Check tire pressures regularly. When the bands appear next to one another in
Replacing tires and wheels  Have regular maintenance done on the two or more places, replace your tires.
N00939600241
wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
CAUTION sion alignment. NOTE
 Rotate your tires regularly as described in  Tire wear indicators can have different
 Avoid using different size tires from the one
listed and the combined use of different the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-19. marks and locations depending on the tire
types of tires, as this can affect driving manufacturer.
safety. Tread wear indicator
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
N00939800184
 On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires Tire rotation
of the same size, same type, and same brand,
N00939901531
and which have no wear differences. Using
tires that differ in size, type, brand or the To even out the wear on your tires and make
degree of wear, will increase the differential them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
oil temperature, resulting in possible damage tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
to the driving system. Further, the drive train the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND 9
will be subjected to excessive loading, possi- MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
bly leading to oil leakage, component sei- However, the timing for tire rotation may
zure, or other serious problems.
vary according to your vehicle condition,
 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
road surface conditions, and your own per-
should be used, because your vehicle is
1- Location of the tread wear indicator sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem. 2- Tread wear indicator unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks sible.
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly. Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal
you know when your tires should be replaced. wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-
Many states have laws requiring that you sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
Tire maintenance wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
replace your tires at this point.
N00939700141
These indicators are molded into the bottom braking.
The following maintenance steps are recom- of the tread grooves and will appear when the Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
mended: tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
mm). find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

Tires
The first tire rotation is the most important
one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
CAUTION Snow tires
 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the N00940000320
correct direction of rotation, swap the front In some areas of the country, snow tires are
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
direction vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
required in your area, you must choose snow
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tire on its original side of the tires of the same size and type as the original
vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
Front should also be installed on all four wheels.
the arrows point in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the can be reduced.
wrong direction will not perform to its full Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
potential. should not be operated at sustained speeds
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
over 75 mph (120 km/h).
9 Front
CAUTION
Front  Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
should be used, because your vehicle is
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
CAUTION
 A compact spare tire can be installed tempo- CAUTION
rarily in place of a tire that has been removed  Avoid the combined use of different types of
during the tire rotation. However, it must not tires. Using different types of tires can affect
be included in the regular tire rotation vehicle performance and safety.
sequence.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)
Tire chains Brake pedal free play Parking brake

N00940100116 N00940301346 N00940400249
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn

CAUTION off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
Parking brake lever stroke
eral times with your foot. Then press the
The clearance between the chains and the pedal down with your fingers until you first Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
feel resistance. sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged. slowly and count the number of clicks of the
Brake pedal free play: ratchet. You should feel the parking brake
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm) grab between 6 to 7 notches (clicks).
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
Clutch pedal free play (if so the ratchet after pulling.
equipped)
9
N00940201101
To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn

off the engine and press the pedal until you
feel resistance.
Clutch pedal free play:

.2 to .4 inch (4 to 9 mm)
If the free play is not within these limits, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
choice for adjustment. WARNING
 Continued operation of the vehicle with
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when
unattended.

Wiper blades
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
Wiper blades trol system is made of:
NOTE
N00940700138  To meet government regulations and pro-
 a positive crankcase ventilation system mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
 an evaporative emission-control system with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
them regularly to remove deposits of salt and The engine electronic control module that
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
controls OBD functions stores various data
detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the (especially about the exhaust emissions).
blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works This data will be erased if the battery cable is
Replace the blades if they continue to streak properly, have your vehicle inspected and disconnected, which could make a rapid
or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your battery cable when the engine malfunction
choice. This should be done at the time or indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
NOTE mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND “Check engine light”) is ON.
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
time. This wears out the rubber and can
These, and all the other “general” mainte-
9 scratch the glass.
nance services listed in this manual, need to Spark plugs
be performed to keep your vehicle running N00940900228
properly and reliably. Spark plugs must fire properly for good
During cold weather You should also have an inspection and ser- engine performance and emission-control.
vice any time you suspect a malfunction. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
Change them at the mileage listed in the
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
MANUAL”.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
NOTE
Emission-control system  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine
maintenance specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are
N00940800328
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause
engine damage, performance problems or
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- radio noise.
control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually
Fuel hoses fold. need regular maintenance.
N00941000040
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
Have these items checked if you notice a
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe- problem with them.
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors for assistance, if you have any questions.
couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
Disc brake pads
damage, replace the hoses immediately.
N00941600059
Good brakes are essential for safe driving.

Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control Check the brake pads for wear. For good
N00950100050 system (except evaporative braking performance, replace the brake pads 9
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister) with the same type pads as the originals.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- Brake hoses
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- N00941700076
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
adjustments made by an authorized Brake hoses and tubing should be checked
Have the system checked at an authorized for:
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”. spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
connection, and fuel tank filler showing through any cracks or worn spots
General maintenance in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
cap) be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
N00941300173 N00941500247
hose wears through.
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service  Improper installation may cause twisting,
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo- or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
For cold and snowy weather

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
and drive shaft boots
N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, For cold and snowy weather
grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose N00942600102
connections could let dangerous exhaust

 Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage compartment and Ventilation slots
and steering linkage passenger compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
Check for any of the following shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
Exhaust system conditions: snowfall so that the operation of the heating
N00942200094 and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
9 WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. Weatherstripping
 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
damage. on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
be treated with silicone grease.
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
from entering inside your vehicle is to have Hood lock release mechanism
the engine exhaust system properly serviced. Additional equipment (For
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
regions where snow is encoun-
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500101
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood tered)
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
tem of the hood latch and release lever. Work the stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the grease into the hood lock mechanism until all snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for
vehicle the movable surfaces are covered.

Fusible links
the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942700305
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if

a large current attempts to flow through cer-
tain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
repair facility of your choice for inspection 2. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse
and replacement. lid hook (A) with the clamp (B) on the
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse instrument panel and push the lid back in.
load capacities” on page 9-26.
9
A- Main fuse block
WARNING B- Sub fuse block
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle, The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
property destruction and serious or fatal ment are located behind the fuse lid.
injuries at any time.
Main fuse block
Fuses 1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the

N00942800856 fuse lid and pry gently to remove it.
Fuse block location
To prevent damage to the electrical system

from short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
Fuses
Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity
4 Windshield wiper 30 A
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration. Passenger compartment fuse location 5 Optional 10 A
6 Door locks 20 A
Main fuse block Sub fuse block 7 Radio 15 A
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A
Interior lights
9 15 A
(Dome lights)
Hazard warning
10 15 A
flasher
9 11 Rear window wiper 15 A
1- Push the lock lever. 12 Gauges 7.5 A

2- Remove the fuse block cover. Cigarette lighter
13 15 A
/Accessory socket
Ignition
Fuse load capacities 14
Switch
10 A
N00954801384
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 15 Sunroof 20 A

cal systems and their fuse capacities. Outside rearview
Sym- Capac- 16 10 A
There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover No. Electrical system mirrors
bol ity
in the engine compartment. Always replace a All-wheel drive sys-
blown fuse with one of the same capacity as 1 Heater 30 A* 17 10 A
tem
the original. Stop lights
2 15 A 18 Back-up lights 7.5 A
(Brake lights)
19 Accessory socket 15 A
3 Rear fog light 10 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity table bol ity
Power window con- 5 Alternator 7.5 A
20 30 A*
trol
Engine compartment fuse location 6 Headlight washer 20 A
21 Defogger 30 A*
7 Air conditioning 10 A
22 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
ETV/Oil cooler fan
Passenger’s power 25 8 15 A
23 (Twin Clutch SST)
seat (20) A
9 Security horn 20 A
25
24 Driver’s power seat 10 Wiper deicer 15 A
(20) A
25 Heated seats 30 A 11 — — —
12 Power gate 30 A
*: Fusible link 9
Behind the fuse block cover Daytime running
13 10 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your lights
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model Headlight
or specifications. 14 10 A
(high beam) (left)
 The table above shows the main equip-
Headlight
ment corresponding to each fuse. 15 10 A
(high beam) (right)
Headlight
(low
16 Discharge 20 A
Sym- Capac- beam)
No. Electrical system
bol ity (left)
1 Front fog lights 15 A Headlight
(low
2 Engine 7.5 A 17 Discharge 20 A
beam)
3 Automatic transaxle 20 A (right)
4 Horn 10 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Identification of fuse
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity
Headlight 31 Audio amplifier 30 A Capacity Color
(low
18 Halogen 10 A 32 Diesel 30 A 7.5 A Brown
beam)
(left) 33 — Spare fuse 10 A 10 A Red
Headlight 34 — Spare fuse 15 A 15 A Blue
(low 35 — Spare fuse 20 A 20 A Yellow
19 Halogen 10 A
beam)
(right) 25 A Natural (white)
*: Fusible link
20 ENG/POWER 10 A Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible
30 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your link type)
21 Ignition coil 10 A vehicle, depending on the vehicle model 40 A Green (fusible link type)
or specifications.
9 ENG/POWER 20 A
 The table above shows the main equip-
22
Fuel line heater 25 A ment corresponding to each fuse. Fuse replacement
N00954900128
23 Fuel pump 15 A There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses. 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
24 Starter 30 A* If a fuse of one of these capacities blows, the electrical item concerned to the fuse
replace it temporarily by borrowing one of and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
25 — — —
the fuses indicated below. position or put the operation mode in
Anti-lock braking 7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse OFF.
26 40 A*
system 25 A: 20 A spare fuse 2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine
Anti-lock braking 30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse compartment fuse block.
27 30 A* Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that
system
has the correct capacity as soon as possible.
Air conditioning con-
28 30 A*
denser fan motor
29 Radiator fan 40 A*
30 IOD IOD 30 A

Replacement of light bulbs

N00942901405
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is

off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION
B- Fuse is OK  Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, C- Blown fuse being turned off.
and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
block. sufficiently before touching it. You could
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
securely into the appropriate slot.
otherwise be burned.
 Do not install commercially available LED-
9
type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
CAUTION could adversely affect the operation of the
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, other vehicle equipment from operating
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring properly.
to heat up and could cause a fire.  The headlight bulbs on this vehicle are high
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a intensity discharge bulbs which contain mer-
short time, have the electrical system cury. If you need to have your vehicle dis-
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors posed of, you should remove the high
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to intensity discharge headlights before dis-
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
find and correct the cause. posal.
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
The removed high intensity discharge head-
related to the problem. If the fuse is not lights should be disposed of or recycled in
blown, something else must be causing accordance with the applicable laws.
the problem. Have the system inspected [For vehicles sold in Canada]
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

CAUTION Bulb capacity ANSI

• For more information on safe handling, dis-
Trade
N00943000132 Watt-
posal, and recycling of the product, and the Description No. or
The bulb should only be replaced with a new age
measures to be taken in case of accidental Bulb
bulb with the same rating and type. The type
breakage, please visit type
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
<http://www.ec.gc.ca/mercure-mercury/>. Daytime running light / Front fog light
(Type 1)*
Outside
NOTE N00950302085
Front fog light 35 W H8
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the 3 Daytime run-
work as required, it is recommended that Front 13 W P13W
ning light
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
Front fog light (Type
19 W H16
facility of your choice. 2)*
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body Headlight, low beam
9 when removing a light and lens. (Halogen bulb)
55 W H11
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been 4
Headlight, low beam
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes 35 W —
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same (Discharge bulb)
phenomenon as when window glass mists up Front side-marker and
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- 5 5W WY5W
parking light
tional problem. ANSI
When the light is switched on, the heat will Side turn signal light
Trade 6 5W —
remove the fog. However, if water gathers Watt- (on fender)*
Description No. or
inside the light, please have it checked by an age Side turn signal light
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Bulb
type 7 (on outside rearview — —
repair facility of your choice.
mirror)*
1 Front turn signal light 21 W WY21W
2 Headlight, high beam 60 W HB3 *: If so equipped

WARNING Rear NOTE

 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi  The rear side-marker light, the tail and stop
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your light and the high-mounted stop light use an
choice when it is necessary to repair a high LED instead of the bulb. Check with an
intensity discharge headlight or to replace authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
the bulb. repair facility of your choice when either
The power circuit, bulb and electrodes light needs to be repaired or replaced.
generate high voltages that may cause a
severe shock.
NOTE ANSI
 It is not possible to repair or replace only the
trade
bulb for the side turn signal light. Watt-
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Item No. or
age
dealer or a repair facility of your choice bulb 9
when the light needs to be repaired or type
replaced. 8 High-mounted stop
 The side turn signal light (on outside rear- — —
light
view mirror) use an LED instead of the bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors 9 License plate light 5W W5W
dealer or repair facility of your choice when 10 Back-up light 16 W W16W
either light needs to be repaired or replaced.
11 Rear turn signal light 21 W W21W
Rear side-marker
12 light, and tail and stop — —
light

Compartment
N00950401744
*- Front of the vehicle

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
2. Turn the bulb (B) counterclockwise to
Item Wattage remove it.
9 CAUTION
1 Dome light (rear)* 8W
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
2 Vanity mirror lights* 2W inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
Dome light (front)/Reading ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
3 8W halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
light
4 Cargo room light 5W
5 Glove compartment light 1.4 W
*: If so equipped

Headlights (low beam, except
for vehicles equipped with high 3. While holding down the tab (C), pull out
intensity discharge headlights) the socket (D).
N00901801144
1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.
CAUTION
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlights are
used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb.

steps in reverse.
2. Turn the bulb (B) counterclockwise to
remove it.
CAUTION 9
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
Headlights (high beam) halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
N00901901103
1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.
3. While holding down the tab (C), pull out

the socket (D).

CAUTION WARNING
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare  A high voltage is present in the power cir-
hand, dirty glove, etc. cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con-
to break the next time the headlights are tact an authorized Mitsubishi dealer
used. whenever repair or replacement is neces-
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with sary.
Adjustment of headlight aim
N00943200121 *- Front of the vehicle
The alignment of the headlights should be
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9
Front side-marker and parking
lights
Headlights (low beam, for vehi- N00917301737
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

cles equipped with high inten- remove it.
sity discharge headlights)
N00900300099
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-

lights, and do not attempt to replace their
bulbs.
steps in reverse.

Front turn signal lights Side turn signal lights (on

N00943401452
fender) (if so equipped)
To remove N00943501150
1. Remove the upper cover. NOTE

For information regarding how to remove  It is not possible to repair or replace only the
the upper cover, refer to “Removing and bulb for the side turn signal light.
installing the upper cover and duct” on Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
page 9-11. dealer or a repair facility of your choice
2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to when the light needs to be repaired or
remove it. replaced.
To install
1. To install the bulb, perform the removal Side turn signal lights (on out-
steps in reverse.
side rearview mirror) (if so
9
2. Install the upper cover.
For information regarding how to install equipped)
the upper cover, refer to “Removing and N00943501163
installing the upper cover and duct” on

page 9-11. NOTE
 The side turn signal lights (on outside rear-
view mirror) uses an LED instead of the
*- Front of the vehicle bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Front fog lights (if so equipped)

N00943601946
1. Remove the clip (A).

2. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- 5. Turn the bulb (G) counterclockwise to
driver with a cloth over its tip into the
NOTE remove it.
 Except for vehicles equipped with daytime
light cover (B) and pry gently to remove
running lights, when unfastening the screws,
9 it.
be careful not to move the beam position
adjustment screw (D).

steps in reverse.
4. While holding down the tab (E), pull out
3. Remove the screws (C) and remove the
the socket (F).
light unit. CAUTION
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.


2. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
CAUTION driver with a cloth over its tip info the
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
light cover (B) and pry gently to remove
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your
it.
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the fog lights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
5. While holding down the tab (E), pull out

the socket (F).
9
3. Remove the screws (C) and remove the
light unit.
Daytime running lights (if so
equipped)
N00900301184
1. Remove the clip (A).

steps in reverse.
4. Turn the bulb (D) counterclockwise to

Rear combination lights
N00943701530
remove it.
1. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light
unit and remove the light unit.

NOTE NOTE
 The rear side-marker light, and the tail and  When mounting the light unit, align the
stop light uses an LED instead of the bulb. groove (D) on the light unit with the clip on
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the body and the pin (E) on the unit with the
dealer or a repair facility of your choice hole in the body.
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly coun-

terclockwise to remove it.
9
Back-up lights
N00929101077
1. Open the liftgate.

2. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the
cover and pry gently to remove the cover.
steps in reverse.
B- Rear side-marker light, and tail and stop

light (LED)
- cannot be replaced
C- Rear turn signal light


2. Remove the socket (B) and bulb assembly
NOTE NOTE by turning it counterclockwise.
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-  When installing the lid, align the tab on the
driver to keep from scratching the cover. lid with the hole on the vehicle side.
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to

remove it.

License plate lights
N00944000386
9
1. When removing the light unit (A), push it
toward the left side of the vehicle body.

steps in reverse.

Vehicle care precautions

steps in reverse. Vehicle care precautions CAUTION
N00945100166 • Nail Polish Remover
NOTE In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, These can all be dangerous, and they all can
 When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C) perform regular maintenance using the proper damage your vehicle.
first then align tab (D) with its hole. materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula- Cleaning the inside of your
tions. Choose the materials you will use care- vehicle
fully, to be sure that they do not contain N00945200095
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
in choosing these materials.
lated area.
9 CAUTION CAUTION
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
 Do not use organic substances (solvents,
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
alkaline or acidic solutions.
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
These chemicals can cause discoloring,
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
staining or cracking of the surface.
High-mounted stop light sure to follow the instructions. Always open
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
N00943900102 your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
stances mentioned above.
NOTE chemicals to clean your vehicle:
 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED • Gasoline
instead of the bulb. Check with an authorized • Carbon Tetrachloride
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility • Benzine
NOTE
of your choice when the light needs to be  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
• Kerosene
repaired or replaced. label.
• Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE
flocked parts leather should be cleaned with an appro-  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew
N00945300142 priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
may grow.
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber
and water. water. brush.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the cleaner and remove any stains with carpet alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents
soap. cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by can discolor the genuine leather surface and
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth should not be used.
NOTE and spot remover.  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
tectants containing silicones or wax. NOTE shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
Such products, when applied to the instru-
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, 9
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush place it in the shade as much as possible.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
over the surface in one direction.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior
Also, if such products get on the switches of
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail- rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
ure of these accessories. genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
Genuine leather (if so equipped) stick to the seat.
N00945600187
Upholstery 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a

N00945500128 soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen- Cleaning the outside of your
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- tle soap and water. vehicle
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, N00945700058
keep the interior clean. wring it out well, and wipe off all the
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
soap.
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
face.

Foreign material CAUTION CAUTION

N00945800033  When washing the underside of your vehicle  Make sure to do the following when using an
Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- automatic car wash, with help from either
tect your hands. this manual or the car wash operator, to
tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
 If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place avoid damaging your vehicle:
foreign matters can damage the finish on your
the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position • Fold the outside rearview mirrors.
vehicle.
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing • Tape the wiper arm assembly.
Generally, the longer any foreign material the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper- • If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
stays on the finish, the worse the damage. ate in the presence of water spray on the spoiler or roof rails, check with the car
Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- windshield and may get damaged as a result. wash operator before using the car wash.
ever the finish gets soiled.  Never spray or splash water on the electrical • If your vehicle is equipped with the rain
parts in the engine compartment. This may sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever
damage them. Be careful also when washing
Washing the underbody to ensure that water does not
in the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain
sensor.
N00945901682
enter the engine compartment.
9 Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur- ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the During cold weather
faces can damage the paint and body of your paint surface and make it dull.
vehicle if left on. Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way ored vehicles. roads in some geographical areas can have a
to protect your vehicle from this damage.  Some hot water washing equipment uses detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. You should flush the underbody with a high
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Because hot water can damage plastics parts
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with pressure hose every time you wash the out-
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of side of your vehicle.
do the following when using such equip-
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, ment: Take special care to remove mud or other
wash the vehicle from top to bottom. • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches debris which could trap and hold salt and
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. (70 cm) away from the vehicle body. moisture.
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- • When washing around the door glass, hold After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to glass surface.
remain.


information code plate in the engine compart-
NOTE CAUTION ment.
 When the door is frozen, opening it by force  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
installed around the door. Pour warm water from the vehicle surface. Cleaning plastic parts
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe  Do not put wax on the areas having black N00946300194
off the water after opening the door. To pre- matte coating because it can cause uneven
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri- If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
cant. with a soft cloth and warm water. rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
Polishing and a soft cloth or chamois.
Waxing N00946100046
N00946000234
If painted surfaces have been severely dam- CAUTION
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or aged and lost their original luster and color
when water does not bead up on the paint. tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
9
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax polishing compound. Avoid limiting your surface.
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has polishing to the damaged surface only; polish  Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush tic surface.
You should wax when the painted surfaces the compound from the surface and apply a  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-
are cool. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
CAUTION Damaged paint
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
cracks, or discoloration.
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
N00946200047 If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because should be touched up as soon as possible with
them immediately with water.
they also remove paint/clearcoat. touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- Check body areas facing the road or the tires
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc. carefully for damage to the paint caused by
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle

Chrome parts Window glass

N00946400052 N00946600054
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome The window glass can usually be cleaned
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
commercially available chrome polish. dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) Wiper blades

N00946500183 N00946700068
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
not be removed easily with water. blades.
9 Rinse off the detergent after washing the Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
wheel. clean the windshield and rear window prop-
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois erly.
leather or a soft cloth.
Engine compartment
 Do not use a brush or other hard implement Never spray or splash water on the electrical
on the wheels. accessories in the engine compartment. This
 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
so could cause the coating on the wheels to
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
peel or become discolored or stained.
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
cleaner or by any other means. crack, stain or discolor them.
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
substances as soon as possible. of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100171 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201531
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
You can also obtain other informa- of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
tion about motor vehicle safety from SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
http://www.safercar.gov. Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to:  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047300098 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors  Remain calm. Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
call (670)234-7133 or write to:  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to design referred to as “Energy Management”.
the police, and, if necessary, call for an Individual body parts are designed to act as
Triple J Motors ambulance. one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
 Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 are channeled around the passenger compart-
the accident for discussions with your ment. This important feature is possible
insurance company and other persons because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf. Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
For vehicles sold in American thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Samoa Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. protection features in the event of an acci-
 Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with imitations,
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands your vehicle may no longer meet original
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is equipment specifications.
P.O. Box 698 your decision.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Important facts to know in case of an accident

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-3
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4
Battery ............................................................................................11-4
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-5
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 2 - Vehicle identification num- Engine model/serial number

N01147401879 ber plate The engine model and serial number are
Keep a record of the chassis number and stamped on the engine cylinder block as
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle identification number is stamped shown in the illustration.
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.

11
1 - Vehicle emission control Tire and loading information
information label placard
N01148100603
The vehicle emission control information
The tire and loading information placard is
label is affixed on the underside of the engine located on the driver’s door sill.
hood.
4 - Vehicle information code

plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Certification label Overall width 71.3 in (1,810 mm)

N01148200167 Overall height 64.8 in (1,645 mm)
The certification label is located on the Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)
driver’s door sill.
Vehicle dimensions 11
N01147501665
Overall length 171.5 in (4,355 mm)
Vehicle weights
N01147600858
Gross vehicle weight rating 4,343 lb (1,970 kg)

Front 2,271 lb (1,030 kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Rear 2,205 lb (1,000 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Specifications 11-3
Engine specifications
Maximum roof load 176 lb (80 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-11.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Engine specifications
N01147701537
Item 2.0 liter models 2.4 liter models

Engine model 4B11 4B12
Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³) 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³)
11
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in line
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.46 in (88.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.82 in (97.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DIFR6C11 DIFR5C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
75D23L Battery is a 12 volt type.

Battery
N01147801336
11-4 Specifications
Tires and wheels

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation
Tires and wheels holes)
N01147901816
Tire
P215/70R16 P225/55R18 NOTE
99H 97H  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Size 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J dealer for details on the combination used on
your vehicle.
PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
Wheel
Off- 1.81 in 1.50 in described in this owner’s manual.
set (46 mm) (38 mm)
Capacity
N01148002244
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
(approximate) All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
Vehicles with Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) 11
manual trans-
axle Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
burst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil Vehicles with Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L) If these oils are not available, API classification SN or higher
continuously can be used.
variable trans- Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
mission (CVT)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API
Manual transaxle 2.6 qt (2.5 L)
classification GL-3 SAE 75W-80
Continuously 2.0 liter models 7.3 qt (6.9 L)
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
variable trans-
2.4 liter models 7.5 qt (7.1 L) page 9-9.
mission (CVT)
Specifications 11-5
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Transfer oil .53 qt (0.5 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Brake/Clutch (if so equipped) As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
7.9 qt (7.5 L)
{Includes .69 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank} or equivalent*
Washer fluid 4.8 qt (4.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
11 nology
11-6 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Numerics B C
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-60 Back-up light California Perchlorate Materials
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Requirements ..................................... 3-6
Replacement .................................. 9-38
A Capacities .......................................... 11-5
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Card holder ...................................... 5-164
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6
shaft boots ....................................... 9-24
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-70 Cargo area cover............................... 5-177
Battery .............................................. 9-11
Air bag .............................................. 4-26 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Charging system warning light ....... 5-121
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Disconnection and connection ......... 9-13 Cargo room light
During cold weather ....................... 9-13 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning ..... 7-14, 7-19 Specification.................................. 11-4 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Bluetooth 2.0 interface....................... 5-137 Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
7-24 Bottle holders.................................... 5-177 vehicles............................................ 5-63
Manual air conditioning ............. 7-4, 7-9 CD player........................................... 7-25
Brake
Air purifier......................................... 7-25 Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-44 Brake assist system............................. 5-66 Charging system warning light ........... 5-121
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-25 Braking ............................................... 6-5 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-19
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-67 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-67
12
Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-31
Arm rest............................................... 4-7 Hose ............................................. 9-23
Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-65 Cleaning
Assist grip ........................................ 5-178 Parking brake................................. 5-40 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-40
Audio Pedal............................................. 5-64 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-41
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-25 Pedal free play ............................... 9-21 Clutch
CD player ...................................... 7-25 Power brakes ................................. 5-64 Pedal free play................................ 9-21
Troubleshooting ............................. 7-60 Service brake ................................. 5-64 Coat hook......................................... 5-178
Automatic air conditioning ......... 7-14, 7-19 Warning lights .............................. 5-120
Consumer information......................... 10-2
Automatic transaxle Break-in recommendations.................... 5-3
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...
Fluid.............................................. 11-5 Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-30 5-51
12-1
Alphabetical index
Fluid ...................................... 9-9, 11-5 Washer fluid ......................... 9-10, 11-5
Selector lever operation................... 5-51 E Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-5
Selector lever positions ................... 5-54 Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-136 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Sports mode ................................... 5-55
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-12
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5 system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-23 Front fog lights
Cruise control..................................... 5-73 Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-58 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Cup holder ....................................... 5-176 Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-22 Indicators..................................... 5-120
Replacement .................................. 9-35
Engine
Switch ......................................... 5-130
D Compartment................................... 9-5
Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5 Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3
Daytime running lights
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Hood............................................... 9-3 Front side-marker lights
Replacement .................................. 9-37 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Overheating..................................... 8-4 Replacement .................................. 9-34
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-136
Serial number ................................. 11-2 Front turn signal light
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Specification................................... 11-4 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
windows) ................. 7-8, 7-13, 7-18, 7-24
Engine coolant temperature display....... 5-92 Replacement .................................. 9-35
Dimensions ........................................ 11-3
Engine hood ........................................ 9-3 Fuel
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-127 Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Engine switch ..................................... 5-17
12 Disc brake pads .................................. 9-23 Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Exhaust system ................................... 9-24
Dome light Fuel hoses...................................... 9-23
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
F Tank capacity................................. 11-5
Doors
Lock.............................................. 5-28 Floor console box.............................. 5-175 Fuses ................................................. 9-25
Power door locks ............................ 5-30 Floor mat............................................. 6-3 Fusible links....................................... 9-25
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-5 Fluid
Driving precaution ................................ 6-2 Automatic transaxle fluid................. 11-5 G
Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 General maintenance
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Maintenance................................... 9-23
fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5
Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5 General vehicle data............................ 11-3
12-2
Alphabetical index
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 Important facts to know in case of an accident Link System ..................................... 5-137
Glove compartment........................... 5-174 10-4 Loading information.............................. 6-7
Indicators ......................................... 5-119 Lubricants .......................................... 11-5
H Information screen display .................. 5-83 Luggage hooks ................................. 5-179
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-130 Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-42
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-119 Inspection and maintenance following rough M
road operation .................................. 5-63
Head restraints...................................... 4-7 Malfunction indicator light ................ 5-120
Instrument cluster............................... 5-85
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-129 Manual air conditioning.................. 7-4, 7-9
Interior lights .................................... 5-170
Headlights Manual transaxle................................. 5-49
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Oil................................................... 9-9
Dimmer ....................................... 5-127 J Shift points (recommended speed).... 5-50
Headlight flasher .......................... 5-127 Jack Modification of your vehicle .................. 3-5
Replacement ......................... 9-32, 9-33 Storage............................................ 8-5 Multi-information display .................... 5-83
Switch ......................................... 5-123
Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2
High beam indicator.......................... 5-120
High-mount stop light
O
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
K Octane rating ........................................ 3-2
Hill start assist .................................... 5-65
Key slot............................................. 5-22 Oil 12
Keyless entry system .................... 5-7, 5-25 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5
HomeLink® Wireless Control System 5-165
Keys ................................................... 5-3 Manual transaxle oil.......................... 9-9
Hood lock release mechanism and safety Rear axle oil .......................... 9-10, 11-5
catch................................................ 9-24 Transfer oil ............................. 9-9, 11-5
Horn switch...................................... 5-136 L Operation mode .................................. 5-17
Labeling ............................................ 11-2
Operation under adverse driving conditions..
I License plate light 8-14
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-44
Replacement .................................. 9-39
Ignition switch.................................... 5-46 Overheating.......................................... 8-4
Liftgate ............................................. 5-32
Inside liftgate release ...................... 5-33
12-3
Alphabetical index
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
P Replacement................................... 9-37 Side turn signal light
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Rear-view camera ............................... 5-81 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Parking brake break-in .................... 9-21 Rearview mirror Replacement .................................. 9-35
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-21 Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-42 Snow tires .......................................... 9-20
Parking brake ..................................... 5-40 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-44 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-22
Parking lights Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-29 Starting the engine .............................. 5-47
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-19 Steering
Replacement .................................. 9-34
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Power steering fluid ........................ 11-5
Polishing............................................ 9-43 Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
Power brakes...................................... 5-64 5-41
S
Power outlet ..................................... 5-164 Stop lights
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
Power windows .................................. 5-37 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Seat belt ............................................. 4-11 Replacement .................................. 9-37
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-17
Storage spaces .................................. 5-174
Child restraint systems..................... 4-19
Sun visors ........................................ 5-163
R Front passenger seat belt warning light.....
4-16 Sunshade ........................................... 5-39
Radio
12 General information about your radio 7-63
Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-26 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-26
Seat belt extender............................ 4-17 How the Supplemental Restraint System
Reading lights Seat belt force limitter ..................... 4-19 works .......................................... 4-29
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-17 Maintenance service ....................... 4-41
Rear axle oil.............................. 9-10, 11-5 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-17
Rear combination lights Seats ................................................... 4-2
Arm rest .......................................... 4-7
T
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-37 Front seats ....................................... 4-3 Tail light
Head restraints ................................. 4-7 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Rear side-marker lights
Heated seat ...................................... 4-6 Replacement .................................. 9-37
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-37 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-5
Rear turn signal light Service brake ...................................... 5-64 Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-34
12-4
Alphabetical index
Tire ................................................... 9-14
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-18 V
Maintenance................................... 9-19 Vanity mirror .................................... 5-164
Quality grading............................... 10-2
Vanity mirror lights
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-19
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Rotation ......................................... 9-19
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-40
Snow tires ...................................... 9-20 Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-3
To change a tire ................................ 8-6 Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-19
Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-4
Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-77
Vehicle weights.................................. 11-3
Tires
Tire and loading information placard 11-2 Vents .................................................. 7-2
Tire chains ..................................... 9-21
Tools ................................................... 8-5 W
Storage ............................................ 8-5 Warning lights .................................. 5-120
Towing .............................................. 8-12 Washer
Trailer towing..................................... 6-12 Fluid ..................................... 9-10, 11-5
Rear window washer ..................... 5-135
Transfer oil ................................. 9-9, 11-5
Switch.......................................... 5-134
12
Turn signal light
Indicators ..................................... 5-119 Washing ............................................ 9-42
Lever ........................................... 5-129 Waxing ............................................. 9-43
Weights ............................................. 11-3
U Wheel
USB input terminal ........................... 5-160 Covers........................................... 8-11
How to connect an iPod................. 5-161 Specification.................................. 11-5
USB input terminal device Wiper
How to connect a USB memory ..... 5-160 Rear window wiper ....................... 5-135
Switch.......................................... 5-131
Wiper blades.................................. 9-22
12-5
last-page.fm 1 ページ２０１５年６月２６日　金曜日　午後３時４８分
How to calculate your gasoline mileage
You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre 3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again,
by using the following process: as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.
4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number
1. Fill your vehicle’s fuel tank and record the odometer mile- to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide
age. the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of
2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do. gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles-
per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.
Gas mileage record Gas mileage record
Gallons Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- Gallons Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo-
Cost meters Per Litre Cost meters Per Litre
Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome- Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome-
This Fill /Litre This Fill /Litre
ters/Litres) ters/Litres)

2017 Mitsubishi Outlander Sport 101290 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 Mitsubishi Outlander Sport 101290 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outlander Sport & RVR

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-129

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-123

Instrument cluster P.5-83

Wiper and washer switch P.5-130

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-17

Steering wheel audio remote control

Instruments and controls

Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System 1

Multi-information meter switch

Fuses P.9-25 Side vents P.7-2

Engine hood release lever

Heated seat switch Rear window defogger switch P.5-136

Gearshift or selector lever P.5-49, 5-51

Sun visors P.5-163

Dome light (front)/Reading lights

Bottle holder P.5-177

Sunshade illumination lamp

Inside rearview mirror

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

Spare tire P.8-6

Luggage hooks P.5-179

Luggage hooks P.5-179

Luggage hooks P.5-179

Tools P.8-5 Jack P. 8-5

Side turn signal lights

Windshield wipers P.5-130

Front turn signal lights

Headlights, high beam

Antenna Liftgate P.5-32

High-mounted stop light

Rear window wiper

Turn signal lights P.5-123, 9-30, 9-37

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-3

If this problem occurs...

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P. 7-8, 7-13,

The engine does not start.

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

The engine is overheated.

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

2-6 Quick index

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank